IHRDC E-Learning Solutions Detailed Catalog

e-Learning Solutions
Detailed Course Catalog IPIMS Background Learning IPIMS Action Learning Petroleum Online Business Essentials Operations & Maintenance
IPIMS
Background Learning Course Catalog
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t30)
Description: An overview of the fundamentals, introducing the primary geological factors controlling pet roleum generation and accumulation. Present s source rocks, primary and secondary migration and sealing conditions. Provides perspective on varying geological histories, basin configurations and economic considerations. Duration: Min: 2 hours 10 minutes Max: 2 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Basic Concepts of Pet roleum Geology Petroleum Generation and Maturation Migration and Accumulation Processes Petroleum Exploration Overview Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology: References and Addit ional Information Topic 1 of 123

Hydrocarbon Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_t31)
Description: Introduces the physical and chemical properties of petroleum, and the terminology explorat ionists use to classify and describe t hem. Explains how these propert ies affect the behavior of petroleum--it s migration, ent rapment and availability t o exploitation. Outlines specific production problems when unfavorable petroleum properties are present. Duration: Min: 1 hours 0 minutes Max: 1 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Gas Properties and Classificat ions Crude Oil Properties, Classifications and Alt erations Hydrocarbon Propert ies: References and Addit ional Information Topic 2 of 123

Subsurface Environment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t32)
Description: Establishes the general conditions of subsurface environments. Presents the nature and behavior of subsurface waters, fluid pressures, geot hermal factors and the fluid dynamics of sedimentary basins. Discusses how these factors can affect petroleum in t he subsurface environment. A reminder that for acquiring subsurface data, a dry hole can be as valuable as a producer. Duration: Min: 1 hours 40 minutes Max: 2 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Water Origins and Chemistry Temperature and Thermal Gradient Pressure Environments Fluid Behavior Subsurface Environment: References and Additional Information Topic 3 of 123

Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t34)
Description: Out lines basic characteristics of reservoir lithologies and discusses identification, measurement and evaluation of reservoir conditions in rocks. Considers reservoir properties which determine overall qualit y: porosity, permeability, and their interrelationship; diagenet ic effects and reservoir continuity. Stresses the different requirements for evaluation of clast ic and carbonate reservoirs. Duration: Min: 1 hours 20 minutes Max: 1 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Rock Properties Diagenesis Reservoir Continuity Reservoirs: References and Additional Information Topic 4 of 123

Traps (IHRDC_IPIMS_t35)
Description: Petroleum generated from source rocks moves up through permeable st rata and would be lost at t he earth's surface if not "trapped" on its way up. Describes the characteristics of the principal trap types, how they appear on geologic sections and maps, and how they are analyzed in terms of geologic history. Examines constraints on production imposed by variat ions in t rapping. Duration: Min: 1 hours 20 minutes Max: 2 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Hydrocarbon Traps: Introduction Structural Traps Stratigraphic Traps Other Trap Types Traps: References and Additional Information Topic 5 of 123

Habitat of Hydrocarbons in Sedimentary Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36)
Description: Provides the format for genetic classification of sedimentary basins, drawing together the principles of the previous six modules into the evaluat ion of the earth's plate t ectonic framework. Explains identificat ion and classificat ion of sedimentary basins, their role in forming oil and gas, and t he habit at s of oil and gas within them. Duration: Min: 2 hours 20 minutes Max: 2 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Sedimentary Basins: Overview Cratonic Basins Divergent Margin Basins Convergent Margin Basins Downwarp Basins and Tertiary Deltas Basin Types: Review Exercises Petroleum Characterist ics by Basin Type Habit at of Hydrocarbons in Sedimentary Basins: References and Additional Information Topic 6 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Basic Skills of the Petroleum Geologist

Geologic Cross-Sections (IHRDC_IPIMS_t37)
Description: Teaches the construct ion of the t wo principal types of cross sections--structural and stratigraphic--and their extensions into t hree-dimensional (fence) diagrams. Int roduces computer generation of maps and sections. Duration: Min: 1 hours 20 minutes Max: 1 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Cross-Section Elements Cross-Sections in Two Dimensions Cross-Section Diagrams in Three-Dimensions Cross-Sections: Computer Methods Geologic Cross-Sections: References and Additional Information Topic 7 of 123

Subsurface Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_t38)
Description: An integrat ed approach to subsurface mapping, discussing downhole data, correlations between wells, and how to depict surfaces and three-dimensional units on contour maps. Presents surface maps and geophysical or remote sensing surveys as aids in delimiting important st ructural and st ratigraphic relationships. Stresses proper correlation and use of borehole informat ion. Duration: Min: 1 hours 30 minutes Max: 1 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Lat eral Correlation of Logged Data Structural Contour Maps Isopach and Other Subsurface Maps Subsurface Mapping: References and Additional Information Topic 8 of 123

Prospect Generation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t39)
Description: Teaches how prospects are generated, emphasizing recognition of previously undelineated anomalies, and that although each prospect is unique, the general patt erns of prospect generat ion are roughly similar. Presents learning basic patterns by using the experience of others and reviewing past cases. Duration: Min: 1 hours 20 minutes Max: 2 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Prospect Generat ion: Basic Concepts and Definitions Prospect Generat ion in Front ier Regions Model Prospect s Prospect Generat ion: References and Additional Information Topic 9 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for the Non-Engineer

Drilling and Well Completion (IHRDC_IPIMS_t40)
Description: Presents the integration of drilling and well complet ion technology in an overall development program, showing t he equipment and procedures involved as operations are carried out. Focuses on the responsibilities of individuals and service companies at the drillsite. Duration: Min: 3 hours 10 minutes Max: 4 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Drilling Fundamentals Rotary Drilling Rig Components Drillstring, Drill Bits and Drilling Fluid Drilling Operations Well Completion Technology Case Histories, Drilling and Completion Programs Drilling and Well Completion: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 10 of 123

Production Technology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t41)
Description: Describes the production technology techniques used to maximize production. Once production begins, the reservoir is only a part of a larger system, and understanding t he relat ionships among all element s--the wellbore, tubing string, artificial lift equipment, surface cont rol devices, separators, treaters, tanks and measuring devices--is crucial to economical and safe recovery. Duration: Min: 2 hours 40 minutes Max: 3 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Well Completions Surface Production Facilities Production System Performance Art ificial Lift Production Technology: References and Additional Information Topic 11 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

Subsurface Facies Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t48)
Description: Reviews basic parameters in defining a facies--lithology, sedimentary st ructures, paleontology, geomet ry and associated environments. Discusses informat ion sources, including cores, cuttings, well logs and seismic, and summarizes diagnostic features of major facies. Presents case st udies on environment al diagnosis of productive sandstone and carbonate reservoirs. Duration: Min: 3 hours 40 minutes Max: 5 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Sedimentary Environments and Facies Lithology Sedimentary Structures, Geometry and Facies Paleontology Sources of Information Sandstone Reservoir Facies Carbonate Reservoir Facies Subsurface Facies Analysis: References and Additional Information Topic 12 of 123

Nonmarine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t49)
Description: Presents basic concepts and techniques of exploration for nonmarine sandstone reservoirs. Applies common tools for examining nonmarine settings--such as rivers, desert dunes and lakes-- in terms of their genesis and recognition in t he subsurface. Duration: Min: 3 hours 0 minutes Max: 3 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Classification of Nonmarine Sandstones Alluvial Fan Environments Braided St ream Environment s Meandering Channel Alluvial Systems Eolian Environments Lacustrine Environments Exercises: Identifying Reservoir Environments Nonmarine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Additional Information Topic 13 of 123

Marginal Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t50)
Description: Examines coastal barrier islands, shallow-marine shoals, bars and deltas, presenting depositional and erosional conditions dominant during formation. Describes diagnosis and recognition through use of seismic, well-log, map and core dat a. Duration: Min: 3 hours 30 minutes Max: 4 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Marginal Marine Sandst one Reservoirs Deltaic Environments Barrier Islands Marginal Marine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Additional Information Topic 14 of 123

Shelf Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t51)
Description: Describes characteristics of shelf sand reservoirs, including elongate submarine fans, radial submarine fans and slope-apron systems. Presents detection met hods including seismic, well-log, core analysis, paleontology and production studies. Duration: Min: 1 hours 20 minutes Max: 1 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Shelf Marine Sandstone Reservoirs Depositional Processes of Shelf Sands Shelf Sand Deposits Diagnosis and Detection of Shelf Sands Petroleum Geology, Reservoir Characteristics Shelf Marine Sandst one Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information Topic 15 of 123

Porosity Evolution in Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t52)
Description: Describes porosity evolution in all sandst one reservoirs, regardless of depositional environment, and reviews factors that control primary and secondary porosit y. Evaluates tools and t echniques used for description of sandstone porosity and porosity evolution. Illust rates applications of porosity evolut ion through case studies. Duration: Min: 3 hours 50 minutes Max: 6 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Description of Sandst one Porosit y Diagenesis Secondary Porosity Evaluat ion Tools and Techniques EandP Applications Case Studies Porosity Evolution in Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Additional Information Topic 16 of 123

Exploration in Carbonate Rocks (IHRDC_IPIMS_t53)
Description: Introduces carbonat es by examining formation and deposition, focusing on ramp and slope models and t he depositional settings within them. Presents field examples of ancient and modern carbonate deposits and their reservoir charact eristics. Duration: Min: 4 hours 10 minutes Max: 5 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Explorat ion in Carbonate Rocks Carbonate Rocks Described Analysis of Carbonate Rocks and Facies Distribution Nonmarine Carbonate Settings Coastal Sett ing Shelf Setting Shelf-Margin Setting Foreslope Sett ing Basinal Setting Exploration in Carbonate Rocks: References and Additional Information Topic 17 of 123

Porosity Evolution in Carbonate Rocks (IHRDC_IPIMS_t54)
Description: Demonstrates the systematic evolution of carbonate porosity and describes classificat ions and condit ions used for predicting porosity dist ribut ion. Discusses deposit ional and diagenet ic models of carbonates. Field st udies illustrate how to handle porosity parameters in production planning. Duration: Min: 2 hours 40 minutes Max: 3 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Porosity Evolution in Carbonate Rocks Diagenesis and Porosity Evolution Evaluat ion of Porosit y and Diagenetic History Porosity Evolution and Petroleum Exploration Porosity Evolution and Field Development Porosity Evolution in Carbonate Rocks: Reference Section Topic 18 of 123

Evaporites and their Role in Petroleum Exploration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t55)
Description: Describes characteristics of evaporites and examines t heir relationship t o hydrocarbon accumulations, including their role as source beds, reservoirs, traps and seals. Discusses evaporite mineralogy and diagenesis, as well as analysis and identification t echniques. Field examples illustrate occurrences, evaluation and significance of evaporite struct ures. Duration: Min: 5 hours 20 minutes Max: 8 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Evaporites and their Role in Petroleum Exploration Sabkha Depositional Facies and Reservoirs Subaqueous Evaporites Ancient Depositional Models Salt Structures, Sediment s and Hydrocarbons Evaporite/Dolomite/Hydrocarbon Association Evaporites and their Role in Pet roleum Exploration: References and Addition Topic 19 of 123

Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_t56)
Description: Reviews a typical strat igraphic sequence, and examines each of its component syst ems t racts. Stresses the interplay bet ween sea level and sediment supply and how this interplay affects depositional geometries. Present s a methodology for interpreting st ratigraphic sequences, incorporat ing well, seismic and biostratigraphic data. Discusses current controversies and future t rends. Duration: Min: 2 hours 50 minutes Max: 4 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: General Concepts Cyclostratigraphy The Making of a Stratigraphic Sequence Sequence Strat igraphy Interpretation of Stratigraphic Sequences Conclusions and Current Cont roversies Sequence Strat igraphy: References and Additional Information Topic 20 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and Global Tectonics

Structural Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t57)
Description: Introduces struct ural geology and its application to explorat ion programs. Presents mechanics of deformation and use of outcrop and subsurface studies to diagnose tect onic forces. Emphasizes regional deformat ion and reviews plate tectonic schemes and effects. Duration: Min: 6 hours 40 minutes Max: 9 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Structural Features of Non-Tectonic Origin Examples of Recent Structural Movements Stress and St rain Folds Faults Joints and Fractures Unconformities Structural Styles Structural Geology: References and Addit ional Information Topic 21 of 123

Plate Tectonics and Sedimentary Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t58)
Description: Presents the history and concepts of plate t ectonic theory as applied t o pet roleum exploration. Examines tectonic processes involved in development of sedimentary basins, and describes tectonic influences on the explorat ion concerns of source, reservoir, t rap, maturation and migrat ion. Discusses current issues in plate tectonic theory. Duration: Min: 3 hours 50 minutes Max: 5 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Plate Tectonics and Sediment ary Basins Plate Tect onics Sedimentary Basin Parameters Sedimentary Basin Development Special Considerations of Plate Tect onics Basin Classificat ion and Petroleum Prediction Plate Tect onics and Sedimentary Basins: References and Additional Information Topic 22 of 123

Divergent Margins and Rift Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t59)
Description: Applies tectonic concepts learned in GL601 and 602, focusing on pet roleum habitats in divergent margin and rift basins. Discusses theories of rifting and its effect on sedimentation. Classifies rift basins and examines each type through present day examples. Duration: Min: 5 hours 0 minutes Max: 7 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Sedimentary Basins and Continental Margins Petroleum Habitat Rift ing and Basin Development Structural Styles and Trapping Mechanisms Nonmarine Basins in t he Continental Int erior Marine Basins in the Continent al Interior Prot o-Oceanic Basins Subsided Divergent Margins Exploration Considerations Divergent Margins and Rift Basins: Reference Section Topic 23 of 123

Convergent Margin Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t60)
Description: Places convergent margins in a plate tectonic setting and examines general characteristics. Relates petroleum habitats to t heories of basin development. Classifies convergent margin basins and presents examples. Proposes a strategy for petroleum exploration in convergent margin basins. Duration: Min: 4 hours 40 minutes Max: 6 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Convergent Margins Basin Classificat ion and Development Basin Development Foreland Basins and Associat ed Struct ures Petroleum Habitat Convergent Tectonic Regimes Exploration Considerations Convergent Margin Basins: References and Additional Information Topic 24 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Geochemistry

Introduction to Petroleum Chemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_t61)
Description: Focuses on characteristics and chemical makeup of petroleum, tracing mat uration of organic matter to petroleum. Emphasizes development of kerogen and bitumen as transitional steps, and explains modification of intermediate materials during diagenesis, catagenesis, and metagenesis in response t o increasing subsurface t emperature. Presents examples of source-rock studies, crude-oil correlations and crude oil-source rock parings. Duration: Min: 5 hours 20 minutes Max: 8 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Petroleum Hydrocarbon Groups Resins Asphalt enes Organic Matter: Progenitor of Petroleum Organic Matter Maturat ion Geochemical Evaluation Overview Source Potential (Inherent ) Source Potential (Realized): Kerogen Evaluation Source Potential (Realized): Bit umen/ Petroleum Evaluation Correlation Studies Introduction t o Petroleum Chemistry: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 25 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Geochemistry

Applications of Petroleum Geochemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_t62)
Description: Demonstrates uses and limitations of geochemical techniques and their importance in exploration and production. Presents appropriat e sample select ion and preparation, as well as analytical techniques used in laboratories. Reviews and integrat es basic source rock and crude oil evaluation programs into more advanced basin study and modeling programs. Duration: Min: 4 hours 20 minutes Max: 6 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Geochemical Analyses: Kerogen Geochemical Analyses: Bitumen/ Petroleum Geochemical Analyses: Analytical Procedures Geochemical Analyses: Sample Types Geochemical Analyses: Sampling Procedures Geochemical Programs in Pet roleum Exploration Geochemistry and Basin Evaluation Geochemical Problem Solving Applications of Petroleum Geochemistry: References and Additional Information Topic 26 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques

Photogeology and Remote Sensing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t63)
Description: Describes the physical principles of the major remote sensing techniques, evaluating t he strengths and weaknesses of each during applicat ion. Discusses aerial photographs, Landsat images, SPOT images, and thermal infrared and radar techniques. Includes a glossary of remote sensing t erms, and interpretation projects for each technique which relate remote surveys to other geological data. Duration: Min: 4 hours 0 minutes Max: 5 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Remote Sensing Fundamentals Aerial Phot ographs Satellite Images (Landsat) Satellite Images (SPOT, Fuyo and Resource) Thermal Infrared Images Radar Images Photogeology and Remote Sensing: References and Additional Information Topic 27 of 123

Basin Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t64)
Description: A complete introduction to basin evolut ion and evaluation. Discusses basin formation processes, geodynamic models, source rocks, maturation, migration, and sedimentary basin models. Presents the impact of basin models on prospect generation, measurement of basin histories and properties, and the principles and application of various basin evaluation methods. Refers t o case studies for analysis and summary. Duration: Min: 4 hours 50 minutes Max: 6 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Basin Analysis and Pet roleum Analysis Basin Formation Processes Geodynamic Models Source Rocks Maturation Processes Sedimentary Basin Models Prospect Generat ion Basin Histories and Properties Mathematical Basin Analysis Models Stratigraphic Basin Analysis Models Basin Analysis Case Studies Basin Analysis: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 28 of 123

Play Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t65)
Description: Examines the critical elements of play analysis and evaluation, including play controls for structural styles and depositional systems as well as t he elements of reservoir, source, seal, t rap maturation and migration, and economic considerat ions. Discusses the dat a requirements of play analysis and t he planning and evolution of the play summary. Present s various examples and case studies from both frontier and developed basins. Duration: Min: 3 hours 0 minutes Max: 4 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Play Analysis Int roduction Play Elements Play Controls Play Analysis Methods Risk Assessment and Analysis Play Analysis Case Histories Play Analysis: References and Additional Information Topic 29 of 123

Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_t993)
Description: Describes the reservoir management techniques used to maximize product ion. Once production begins, the reservoir is only a part of a larger system, and understanding t he relat ionships among all element s--the wellbore, tubing string, artificial lift equipment, surface cont rol devices, separators, treaters, tanks and measuring devices--is crucial to economical and safe recovery. Duration: Min: 2 hours 0 minutes Max: 2 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Rock and Fluid Properties Natural Drive Mechanisms in Petroleum Reservoirs Improved Oil Recovery Reservoir Simulation Reservoir Management: References and Additional Information Topic 30 of 123

Deepwater Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t2613)
Description: Describes characteristics of deepwater sand reservoirs, including elongate submarine fans, radial submarine fans and slope-apron systems. Presents detection met hods including seismic, well-log, core analysis, paleontology and production studies. Duration: Min: 2 hours 40 minutes Max: 3 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Deepwater Marine Sandstone Reservoirs Sedimentation Processes Depositional Systems Subsurface Diagnosis and Detection Sequence Strat igraphy Petroleum Geology and Reservoir Characteristics Deepwater Marine Sandst one Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information Topic 31 of 123

Hydrocarbon Generation and Migration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t3561)
Description: Traces t he natural conditions leading to hydrocarbon generation and migration. Presents t he effects of diagenesis and petrogenesis on organic matter. Discusses kerogen types, physical and chemical factors that affect the maturation level and geochemistry of petroleum, and the migration processes from petroleum source beds into t he permeable carrier or reservoir rock. Duration: Min: 1 hours 30 minutes Max: 2 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Generat ion and Mat uration Processes Migration Processes Hydrocarbon Generation and Migration: References and Additional Information Topic 32 of 123

Basic Geostatistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23340)
Description: This presentation describes both classical statist ical and geostatistical methodologies designed to quantify qualitative information. Though the material present ed is not heavily mathematical, the presentation is not simplistic. General equations and matrix notation are used in some sections. The equat ions are presented mostly for informational purposes, because calculations used in geostatistics tend to be tedious and very computer-intensive. This module presents an overview of t echniques that can be used to t ransform a traditional geological reservoir description (a surface or 3D volume) into a mathematical reservoir. Duration: Min: 3 hours 50 minutes Max: 5 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Basic Geostatist ics Classical St at istical Concepts Data Posting and Validation Regionalized Variables Kriging Data Int egration Conditional Simulation Public Domain Geostatistics Programs Case Studies Selected Readings Geostatistics Glossary Topic 33 of 123

Geosteering: Fundamentals, Planning, and Implementation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36018)
Description: GeoSt eering is the application of geologic and engineering skill to direct a horizontal or extended-reach wellbore pat h, based upon knowledge of the enclosing stratigraphy, with the expressed aim of maximizing wellbore exposure to the target reservoir. This TOpic reviews valuable insights into the GeoSteering process, provided by a leading company with experience gained over the course of st eering nearly 2000 horizontal wells. Duration: Min: 2 hours 50 minutes Max: 4 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Directional Drilling: The Driving Force in Geosteering Drilling Measurement s and Logging Tools Preparing the Geost eering Plan Geosteering Practices Case Study Geosteering: Fundamentals, Planning, and Implement at ion: References and Add Best Practices Topic 34 of 123

Geographical Information Systems (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36166)
Description: This topic examines the use of Geographical Information Systems (GIS) in the oil and gas industry. Beginning with an overview of GIS design and applications and a description of Geodetic Frameworks, it examines the type of information contained in a t ypical oil and gas GIS. Case studies and examples are presented relating to a variet y of GIS systems, and an Appendix of GIS-related websites is included to help users find the most up-to-date information in this important area. Duration: Min: 2 hours 10 minutes Max: 3 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Geographical Information Systems GIS Design and Systems Geodetic Frameworks General and Background GIS Data Exploration and Production GIS Dat a Examples and Case Studies Geographical Informat ion Systems: References and Additional Information Topic 35 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and Seismic Signals

Fundamentals of Exploration Geophysics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t66)
Description: Analyzes geological situations where petroleum accumulations are possible and discusses tools used to locate and evaluate t hose areas. Examines t he divisions of an E&P company and the exploration decision-making process. Describes various cult ural and political environments that affect explorat ion. Assumes no prior knowledge of geophysics. Introduces reflection seismology, which accounts for 95% of the geophysical exploration effort. Examines the basic principles of t he method and discusses field work, processing, and int erpret at ion. Describes the effect ive use of seismic dat a, as well as t he known pitfalls awaiting the geophysicist.
Duration: Min: 2 hours 0 minutes Max: 2 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Petroleum Exploration Overview Seismic Met hods Fundamentals of Explorat ion Geophysics: References and Addit ional Information Topic 36 of 123

Signal Theory: A Graphical Introduction (IHRDC_IPIMS_t67)
Description: Imparts a broad understanding of the principles of signal theory. Extensive graphics introduce Fourier series, convolution and correlat ion. Duration: Min: 6 hours 0 minutes Max: 8 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Waveforms Operators Noise Correlation Techniques Nonlinearity and Distortion Digital Represent at ion of Waveforms Signal Theory: A Graphical Introduct ion: References and Additional Information Topic 37 of 123

Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission (IHRDC_IPIMS_t69)
Description: Examines the earth's response to a seismic source--a response affected by compression, divergence, absorpt ion, and the generation and partitioning of other wave t ypes. Explores the nat ure of the seismic input, its variat ions, and the interpretation risks that attend different sources. Duration: Min: 4 hours 40 minutes Max: 6 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission Plane Compressional Waves Spherical Compressional Waves Physical Description of t he Seismic Method Density and Velocity Losses Source Signature Seismic Pulse Components: the Overall Pict ure Shear Waves and Surface Waves Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission: References and Additional Information Topic 38 of 123

Seismic Reflection (IHRDC_IPIMS_t70)
Description: Explores t he causes of seismic reflection and the effect s of t he earth's layering. Presents the synthetic seismogram and the vertical seismic profile, and ties these images t o the picture yielded by the seismic section. Examines the effects of mult iples and saturant s, as well as the geological significance of seismic reflection. Duration: Min: 4 hours 50 minutes Max: 6 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Reflect ion and Transmission Multiple Reflect ion Curved and Discont inuous Reflect ors Seismic Response of a Layer Short Path Multiples Geological Meaning of Reflectors Saturant Effects Non-Normal Incidence and Mode Conversion Seismic Reflection: References and Additional Information Topic 39 of 123

Geological Messages in the Seismic Trace (IHRDC_IPIMS_t71)
Description: Explores t he relat ionship between geological and seismic properties. Uses seismic strat igraphy to describe the seismic reflection patterns of depositional environment s, how to recognize source rocks, reservoir rocks and seals, and how to infer burial history, likely saturant and geologic age. Duration: Min: 3 hours 20 minutes Max: 5 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Seismics and Geology Rock Properties Seismic Measurements and Geology Reflect ion Pat terns and Geology Geological Messages in the Seismic Trace: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 40 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

Introduction to Field Work (IHRDC_IPIMS_t72)
Description: Introduces the field aspects of reflect ion seismology, examining seismic explorat ion in the field--on land, at sea, and in between. Describes elements of seismic operation--instruments, locations, people and steps taken by seismic crews to record high-quality data. Details various tasks and environments peculiar to land-oriented field work. Emphasizes use of explosive sources and safety of operations. Stresses public relat ions due to direct impact of land work on land owners, lessees and political bodies. Analyzes field work at sea and in the transition zone. Examines equipment, costs and special problems, hazards, requirements and advantages of field work in marine settings. Part icular attention is paid to navigational syst ems. Duration: Min: 5 hours 20 minutes Max: 7 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Field Work Improving t he Signal-to-Noise Ratio Multiple Coverage in Action Recording Instrument s The Land Seismic Source The Land Seismic Receiver The Seismic Record Acquisition Constraints Costs and Contracts Marine Work The Transition Zone Multi-Component Data Organizat ion of the Field Crew Safety The Location of Seismic Lines The Observer's Report Introduction t o Field Work: References and Addit ional Information Introduction t o Field Work: Exercises Topic 41 of 123

Surveying and Mapping on Land (IHRDC_IPIMS_t75)
Description: Describes tasks of seismic crew surveyor: laying out seismic lines and recording spatial coordinates of each source or receiver. Emphasizes precision, accuracy and appropriate tools. Examines electronic surveying and sat ellite-aided positioning, including Global Posit ioning System. Duration: Min: 4 hours 0 minutes Max: 6 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Object ives and Requirements The Figure and Rotation of t he Earth Frames of Reference Surveying Methods Land Surveying in Pract ice Satellite Positioning Methods Surveying and Mapping on Land: Exercises Surveying and Mapping on Land: References and Addit ional Information Topic 42 of 123

Positioning and Mapping at Sea (IHRDC_IPIMS_t76)
Description: Illustrates requirements and methods of navigation and positioning in marine seismic operations. Gives the land surveyor's nautical counterpart the necessary background to make required measurements, computations and compensations. Illustrates steering ship on a planned line, relating line t o previous surveys, and ensuring t hat a drilling rig can ret urn t o opt imal location. Duration: Min: 5 hours 10 minutes Max: 7 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Positioning and Mapping at Sea Towed Streamer Acquisition Satellite Positioning Syst ems Secondary Positioning Systems Positioning Syst ems Calibration Definitions Controls and Checks Navigation Data Navigation QC and Reporting Additional Exploration Positioning Requirements New Developments Supplemental Informat ion Positioning and Mapping at Sea: Exercises Positioning and Mapping at Sea: References and Additional Information Topic 43 of 123

Multiple Coverage (IHRDC_IPIMS_t77)
Description: Focuses on multiple coverage method of obt aining field data, which is an efficient means of improving signal-to-noise ratio, and discusses use on land and at sea. Describes combination wit h common-midpoint stacking t o further improve the rat io. Illustrates survey planning to maximize coverage, minimize noise and work around physical obstacles. Duration: Min: 3 hours 30 minutes Max: 5 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Background The Benefits and Limitations of Multiple Coverage The Surface Diagram Multiple Coverage at Sea Multiple Coverage On Land Common-midpoint Stacking Migration and Multiple Coverage Vertical Seismic Profiling Summary and Conclusions Multiple Coverage: References and Addit ional Information Exercises and Solut ions Conceptual Questions Topic 44 of 123

Array Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_t78)
Description: Illustrates noise reduction in the field by using arrays to enhance signal-t o-noise ratio. Harmonizes array design as a field problem with array design as a processing problem. Introduces an easy and effective approach to array design. Duration: Min: 4 hours 50 minutes Max: 7 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Array Design Factors Affecting Group Dimensions Approaches to Array Design Traditional Array Design Field Tests Measuring Source Generat ed Noise A Universal Approach to Acquisit ion Arrays in 3D Arrays at Sea Array Design: References and Addit ional Information Exercises and Solut ions Topic 45 of 123

Vibroseis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t79)
Description: Describes vibroseis--its use in the field and it s processing requirement s--as an attract ive alt ernative to explosives in restricted areas, now used in over half of all land operations. Discusses t he mechanics of vibrator technology and the concept of pulse compression to shape the sweep to an "impulsive" form. Duration: Min: 2 hours 40 minutes Max: 4 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Vibroseis in Principle Vibroseis in Practice Vibroseis: Exercises Vibroseis: References and Additional Information Topic 46 of 123

Choosing the Field Variables (IHRDC_IPIMS_t80)
Description: Analyzes t he exploration problem, the proper design of field programs, and the importance of the frequency variable. Demonstrates how other variables depend on frequency and on each other. Illustrates how to optimize field work. Duration: Min: 7 hours 0 minutes Max: 10 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Introduction and Basic Concepts Judgements From t he Field Data Field Variables Experimental Shoot ing Criteria for Choosing Field Variables The Land Impulsive Source The Vibroseis Source Receivers and Recording Systems Marine and Transition Zone Surveys Conclusions Choosing the Field Variables: References and Addit ional Information Choosing the Field Variables: Exercises Topic 47 of 123

Quality Control in the Field (IHRDC_IPIMS_t81)
Description: Discusses quality control of land and marine operations. Presents the four major considerations of field quality cont rol: posit ioning, operations, record qualit y and report ing. Discusses crew safety and environmental concerns. Duration: Min: 3 hours 0 minutes Max: 4 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Quality Cont rol in the Field Land Surveys Marine Surveys Safety and Environmental Concerns Cost Effectiveness Quality Control in the Field: References and Additional Informat ion Quality Control in the Field: Exercises Topic 48 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation

Basic Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t90)
Description: Introduces seismic data interpretation. Describes petroleum habitats, explorat ion economics and management decision crit eria. Outlines specific geologic features recognizable on seismic sections. Teaches how to follow event s along a section, as well as timing, picking and mapping them. Illustrat es the use of seismic sections in interpreting geologic history. Duration: Min: 1 hours 20 minutes Max: 2 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Seismic Sections and Geological Features Seismic Interpretation Examples Basic Seismic Interpretation: References and Additional Information Topic 49 of 123

Seismic Contouring (IHRDC_IPIMS_t91)
Description: Introduces contouring. Describes mapping subsurface horizons by picking and timing seismic events, finding counterpart s across faults or intrusions, and correlating between lines. Emphasizes interpolation for geologically plausible results. Duration: Min: 3 hours 10 minutes Max: 4 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Contouring Fundamentals Contouring by Hand Contouring by Machine Interval Maps Contour Maps: Operations Seismic Contouring: References and Additional Information Topic 50 of 123

Fault Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t92)
Description: Presents types of faulting along with the corresponding struct ural settings. Discusses the seismic expression of faults, in particular diffractions and fault plane reflect ions. Presents guidelines for fault interpretation, and discusses the impact of 3-D data and workstations. Duration: Min: 4 hours 50 minutes Max: 6 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Faults in Petroleum Provinces Stress and St rain Fault Nomenclature Seismic Expression of Fault s Fault Dat a Interpretation Structural Styles and Faulting Faults: 3-D and Workstation Interpretation Fault Interpretation: References and Additional Information Topic 51 of 123

Velocity Interpretation and Depth Conversion (IHRDC_IPIMS_t93)
Description: Provides an overview of the rock properties that affect velocity dat a. Presents time-depth conversion methods, det ailing the normalized int erval velocit y technique. Emphasizes the need for reliable maps when making exploration and drilling decisions. Duration: Min: 3 hours 0 minutes Max: 4 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Seismic Velocities Normalized Interval Velocity Well Velocities Seismic Velocity Databases Time-Depth Conversion Methods Normalized Interval Velocity Techniques Error Factors Velocity Interpretation and Depth Conversion: References and Additional Information Topic 52 of 123

Hydrocarbon Indicators (IHRDC_IPIMS_t94)
Description: Discusses the various hydrocarbon indicators, explaining the physical causes of the significant feature recognized on seismic. Presents approaches in acquisition, processing or interpretation which may upgrade an anomaly through validation as a hydrocarbon indicator. Examines in detail the preservation of seismic att ribut es, amplituderelated and other direct indicators, inversion techniques and t he use of 3D data and workst at ions. Duration: Min: 4 hours 30 minutes Max: 6 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Seismic Met hods and Hydrocarbon Detection Reflect ions and Seismic Parameters Seismic At tributes and Their Preservation Amplitude HCIs Amplitude Versus offset (AVO) Seismic Modeling 3-D Seismic Data, Workstations and Hydrocarbon Indicat ors Shear Waves and Other Hydrocarbon Indicators Hydrocarbon Indicat or Validation Hydrocarbon Indicat ors: References and Additional Information Topic 53 of 123

Seismic Stratigraphic Modeling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t95)
Description: Presents methods for extracting stratigraphic information from seismic data. Discusses acquisition concerns when the goal is st ratigraphic analysis. Examines forward and inverse modeling, and AVO analysis. Presents case st udies and the methods for determining the success or failure of the methods applied. Duration: Min: 2 hours 20 minutes Max: 3 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Stratigraphic Prospects Stratigraphic Seismology Velocity and t he Seismic Response Forward Modeling Inverse Modeling Amplitude vs. offset Analysis Seismic Strat igraphic Modeling: References and Additional Information Topic 54 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other Geophysical Methods

Gravity and Magnetics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t96)
Description: Examines the physical processes responsible for observed gravimetric or magnetic effects, relating them to specific geophysical or geological features. Explains instrument s, proper field techniques and data processing methods. Using case studies, discusses interpretation of both surface and borehole gravit y surveys as well as magnetic surveys. Duration: Min: 7 hours 10 minutes Max: 9 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Gravitational Force Fields Densities of Rocks Determination of Gravity Effects on Geologic Bodies Gravity Data: Reduct ion and Processing Gravity Survey Design and Gravit y Meters Surface Gravity Interpretation Borehole Gravit y Magnetic Force Fields Magnetism of Rocks Magnetic Anomalies and their Geological Significance Magnetic Anomaly Signat ures Magnetic Inst ruments and Field Surveys Magnetic Data Processing and Mapping Magnetic Int erpret at ion Gravity and Magnetic Maps: Enhancement Methods Gravity and Magnetics: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 55 of 123

Other Geophysical Techniques (IHRDC_IPIMS_t996)
Description: Presents in-situ velocity measurement s. Int egrates acoustic-log data with velocity survey data. Describes interpretation of first break arrival times and considerat ions in constructing a synthetic seismogram. Emphasizes correlation between t he seismic section and t he synthetic seismogram. Duration: Min: 4 hours 20 minutes Max: 7 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Borehole Velocity Measurements Synthetic Seismogram Other Geophysical Techniques: References and Additional Information Topic 56 of 123

Crosswell Seismology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5600)
Description: Crosswell methods use seismic t omography t o image the reservoir zone between two or more wells. This topic int roduces you to crosswell techniques and helps you understand when and where to apply them. Duration: Min: 1 hours 50 minutes Max: 2 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Crosswell Seismology When to Run a Crosswell Survey Crosswell Data Acquisition Crosswell Seismic Dat a Processing and Analysis Crosswell Seismology Case Studies Crosswell Seismology Exercises Crosswell Seismology References and Additional Information Crosswell Seismology Recommended Practices Topic 57 of 123

Multicomponent Seismic Applications (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6105)
Description: Provides an understanding of the value of recording multicomponent seismic data. Describes the concepts of wave propagation, shear wave splitting and amplitude variation wit h offset. Provides the basic principles of processing and interpretation of multicomponent data. Duration: Min: 3 hours 40 minutes Max: 5 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Multicomponent Seismic Applications Exploration Value Theory Shear Source Shear Receiver Compression Source Compression Receiver Compression Source Shear Receiver Processing Interpretation Review of Best Practices Multicomponent Seismic Applications: References and Additional Information Multicomponent Seismic Applications: Exercises Topic 58 of 123

Vertical Seismic Profiles (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6365)
Description: Examines VSP sources and receivers, and presents guidelines for planning and executing VSP surveys. Discusses data acquisition, processing and interpretation, and met hods for correlat ing VSP and seismic data. Provides examples of VSP exploration and applicat ions. Duration: Min: 5 hours 0 minutes Max: 6 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Vertical Seismic Profiles VSP Survey Fundamentals VSP Survey Recording Geometries The VSP Receiver The VSP Source Recording Systems Pre-Survey Modeling VSP Acquisition Practices and Concerns VSP Processing Fundamentals VSP Applications Summary Vertical Seismic Profiles: References and Additional Information Vertical Seismic Profiles: Exercises Topic 59 of 123

3-D and 4-D Seismic (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23455)
Description: Introduces 3-D seismic techniques used in exploration and reservoir delineation. Describes operations involved in 3-D surveys, including field work, processing and interpretation. Presents a comprehensive look at 3-D techniques, including acquisition, processing and int erpret at ion. Discusses acquisition methods and quality control for land and marine surveys. Addresses velocity analyses, trace binning, NMO and migration. Examines time slices, chair displays and other 3-D displays. Illustrates role and capabilit ies of the workstation in 3-D interpretation. 4-D Seismic, also known as time-lapse monit oring is intended to highlight the differences between successive vintages of 3-D seismic surveys that are caused by changes in reservoir propert ies due to production.
Duration: Min: 7 hours 0 minutes Max: 9 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: 3-D Seismic Techniques: An Overview 3-D Seismic Data Acquisition 3-D Seismic Data Processing 3-D Interpretation Basics 3-D Interpretation in Practice Overview of 3-D Volume Visualization 4-D Seismic Applications 3-D and 4-D Seismic: References and Additional Informat ion Exercises and Solut ions Topic 60 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing

Basic Processing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36504)
Description: Out lines seismic processing objectives and describes how t he sequential steps of pre-processing, st acking and velocity analysis, migration and post-processing are used to generate the best possible image of the subsurface from recorded field data. Discusses the effect of each step on the overall sequence, with emphasis on the two-fold goal of improving the signal-to-noise ratio and locating seismic reflections with respect to their true spat ial positions. Duration: Min: 1 hours 40 minutes Max: 2 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Basic Processing Overview Pre-Processing and Deconvolut ion Stacking and Velocity Analysis Migration and Post-Processes Basic Processing: References and Additional Information Topic 61 of 123

Initial Processes (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36535)
Description: Describes the SEG-D and SEG-Y formats for recording and storing seismic data, along with the Observer's Report s and Field Notes that contain essential informat ion for seismic data processing, and the initial checks that are performed on field data. Examines the steps involved in pre-processing seismic data, including gain recovery, de-multiplexing, re-sampling, assigning geometry, datum correct ions, amplitude adjustments, trace editing, common midpoint gather and common offset gather. Addresses the pract ical considerat ions involved in selecting variables, establishing the processing order and reprocessing existing seismic lines. Duration: Min: 2 hours 0 minutes Max: 2 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Field Data Pre-Processing Flow Practical Considerations Init ial Processes: References and Additional Information Topic 62 of 123

Velocities (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36565)
Description: Reviews the physical factors t hat influence seismic velocity. Defines t he various components of seismic velocity, and introduces t he concepts of stacking velocity and normal moveout. Describes analysis procedures and the practical considerations involved, including t echniques for interpreting and refining the velocity model. Discusses velocity analysis for anisotropic media. Provides overviews of tomographic velocity analysis and migration velocit y analysis. Duration: Min: 2 hours 50 minutes Max: 3 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Influencing Fact ors Seismic Velocities Definition Velocity Analysis Practical Considerations for Velocity Analysis Interpreting and Refining the Velocity Model Additional Technologies Velocities: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 63 of 123

Stacking, Filtering and Display (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36607)
Description: Describes the process of common midpoint stacking and int roduces alternate forms of stacking. Examines the use of t wo-dimensional filters in separat ing different arrivals on the basis of their characteristic velocities. Discusses pre-stack and post-stack filt ering processes, and t he use of band pass filters, time variant filters and filt er panels. Reviews different methods for displaying final record sect ions based on the needs of the seismic interpreter. Duration: Min: 2 hours 40 minutes Max: 3 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Common Midpoint Stacking Alternative Forms Velocity Filters Final Filtering Display Stacking, Filt ering and Display: References and Addit ional Information Topic 64 of 123

Seismic Migration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36616)
Description: Reviews the seismic reflect ion process. Examines the fundamentals of seismic migration and how geological features affect seismic data. Discusses practical considerations in applying migration methods. Addresses t he issue of seismic migration in anisotropic media. Duration: Min: 2 hours 30 minutes Max: 3 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Overview of Seismic Migration Seismic Migration Methods Depth Migration 2D Versus 3D Migration Seismic Migration in Anisotropic Media Seismic Migration: References and Addit ional Information Topic 65 of 123

Deconvolution (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36653)
Description: Introduces the concept of t he convolutional model and describes the use of deconvolution in removing coherent noise and minimizing t he effect of the wavelet on the final stack. Defines deconvolut ion parameters. Examines single-trace, deterministic and multi-trace deconvolut ion methods, along with alternative methods such as maximum likelihood, minimum ent ropy and L1-norm deconvolution. Addresses pract ical considerat ions in applying deconvolution methods and provides a suggested processing scheme. Duration: Min: 4 hours 0 minutes Max: 5 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Basic Concepts Single-Trace Statistical Deconvolution Deterministic Methods Multi-Trace Deconvolution Alternative Methods of Deconvolut ion Practical Considerations in Deconvolut ion Deconvolution: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 66 of 123

Static Corrections (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36726)
Description: Examines how st at ic corrections are applied to seismic data t o compensate for near-surface or water-bottom effect s. Describes long-wavelength st at ic problems and computation methods, including considerations in choosing a seismic dat um and accounting for t he geology of the area. Examines deterministic methods for deriving the near-surface velocity model. Discusses short-wavelength st at ic corrections, including cross-correlation met hods, surface-consistent met hods, genetic algorithms, cross-dip correct ions and 3-D statics. Describes layer replacement techniques of ray trace modeling and wave equat ion datuming. Duration: Min: 3 hours 40 minutes Max: 5 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Basic Concepts Long Wavelength Statics Deterministic Techniques for Deriving the Near Surface Velocity Models Short Wavelength Static (Residual Static) Layer Replacement Techniques Static Corrections: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 67 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Equipment and Operations

Wellheads, Flow Control Equipment and Flowlines (IHRDC_IPIMS_t110)
Description: Reviews the types and features of casing and tubing housings, Christmas tree component s and flowline valves, as well as flowline sizing, installations and operating procedures. Describes the basic design and operating requirements of typical production manifolds and presents a wide variety of equipment options. Duration: Min: 3 hours 50 minutes Max: 5 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Casing and Tubing Head Equipment Flow Cont rol at the Wellhead Flowlines Valves, Fittings and Flanges Production Manifolds Wellheads, Flow Control Equipment and Flowlines: References and Additional Topic 68 of 123

Fluid Separation and Treatment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t111)
Description: Describes the functions and components of vert ical and horizontal separators and oil treating equipment . Illust rates design considerations, including sizing calculations, for both two-phase and three-phase flow. Duration: Min: 2 hours 40 minutes Max: 3 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Production Facility Overview Separation of Produced Fluids Treatment of Separat ion Oil Fluid Separation and Treatment: References and Addit ional Information Topic 69 of 123

Wireline Production Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_t112)
Description: A comprehensive introduction to wireline operations. Describes each component of the basic surface equipment setup and t he typical workstring of tools, along wit h commonly used subsurface complet ion and production control wireline equipment. Describes the running and pulling procedures for Baker, Camco and Otis equipment . Duration: Min: 5 hours 0 minutes Max: 6 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Wireline Production Work Wireline Surface Equipment Wireline Tool String, Basic Component s Wireline Tubing Conditioning Skills Wireline Pulling Tools and Running Tools Wireline Fishing Tools Wireline Bailers Wireline Specialty Tools Wireline-Operated Completion and Production Control Equipment Wireline Remedial Operations Wireline Well Maintenance and Data Gathering Wireline Operat ing Requirements Wireline Production Operations: References and Additional Information Topic 70 of 123

Oilfield Safety (IHRDC_IPIMS_t113)
Description: Introduces principles and general procedures for managing emergencies, reporting and investigating accidents, and maintaining safety in day-to-day activities. Addresses hazards that are common to most oil and gas sites, emphasizing awareness, planning and training as keys to preventing accident s. Duration: Min: 4 hours 10 minutes Max: 6 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Emergency Prepareness Incident Reporting and Invest igation Safety Hazards in Oil and Gas Production Safe Work Practices Safety and Control of Site Activities Fire Prevent ion and Control Oilfield Safet y: References and Additional Information Topic 71 of 123

Cased Hole Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t114)
Description: Introduces the logging techniques used in cased wells. Describes various types of radioactive tools for determining lithology and fluid saturation, acoustic devices for well int egrit y logging, and a range of flow monitoring logs. Highlights each tool's operating principles. Duration: Min: 4 hours 0 minutes Max: 5 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Cased Hole Logging Overview Formation Evaluation in Cased Holes Cement Bond Evaluation Casing Inspection Qualitative Flow Evaluat ion Flow Rat e Determination in the Wellbore Production Logging of Multiphase Flow in Horizontal Wells Cased Hole Logging: References and Additional Information Topic 72 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering

Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_t115)
Description: Introduces the drilling procedure and provides a clear "blueprint" for the safe, efficient drilling of a well. Integrat es the mud, casing, bit, cementing and safet y programs. Presents an understanding of how a well proposal is initiated and justified economically. Duration: Min: 3 hours 30 minutes Max: 5 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Well Planning Overview Well Selection AFE Preparat ion Well Plan Organizat ion and Data Gathering Well Design Considerations Rig Design Considerations Procedures Drilling Contract s Cost Reviews Well Planning: References and Additional Information Topic 73 of 123

Drill String Components (IHRDC_IPIMS_t116)
Description: Introduces the tools that make up a typical drill st ring, including the kelly, the drill pipe, and the components of the bot tomhole assembly. Describes design, selection, performance and evaluation of common drill bit types. Emphasizes the general applicat ion of various downhole tools and development of sound drilling practices. Duration: Min: 1 hours 50 minutes Max: 2 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Drill String Overview Kelly Drill Pipe Drill Collars Heavy Wall Drill Pipe Bottomhole Assembly Tools Drill String Components: References and Additional Information Topic 74 of 123

Drilling Fluids and the Circulating System (IHRDC_IPIMS_t117)
Description: Introduces drilling fluid types and describes field monitoring of their properties, along with cleaning and circulation equipment employed at the wellsit e. Emphasizes applications of drilling fluids and unique properties which make each fluid suitable to cont rol specific subsurface environments. Incorporates field footage of equipment with laboratory footage showing mud components and test ing procedures.Summarizes environmental concerns related to use and disposal of drilling fluids. Includes basic calculations used in drilling fluid engineering. Duration: Min: 5 hours 40 minutes Max: 8 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Drilling Fluids Overview Drilling Rig Circulating System Drilling Fluid Components and Additives Drilling Fluid Systems Solids Cont rol Clay Chemist ry Environmental Aspects of Drilling Mud Engineering Field Tests of Drilling Fluids Mud Engineering Calculations Drilling Fluids and the Circulating System: References and Additional Information Topic 75 of 123

Directional and Horizontal Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t118)
Description: Introduces basic principles of wellbore deviation and directional control. Describes feat ures, applications, benefits and limit at ions of various directional and horizontal well profiles. Discusses tools, planning, survey techniques and operating practices, pointing out problems that are unique to horizontal and high-angle directional drilling. Duration: Min: 2 hours 50 minutes Max: 3 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Directional Drilling Overview Deviation in Vertical Wells Directional Drilling Tools and Techniques Horizontal Wells Drilling Hydraulics in Deviated Wells Drill String and Bit Considerat ions in Deviated Wells Underblanced Drilling in Direct ional Wells Directional and Horizont al Drilling: References and Additional Information Topic 76 of 123

Drilling Problems and Drilling Optimization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t119)
Description: Describes occurrences, preventive measures and remedial actions for common downhole drilling problems. Addresses considerations involved in drilling abnormal pressures, working in sour gas environments and planning fishing operations. Discusses procedures for opt imizing bit hydraulics, bit weight and rotary speed to attain minimum cost drilling. Emphasizes importance of the mud system in meet ing well objectives. Duration: Min: 5 hours 10 minutes Max: 7 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Drilling Object ives Pressure, Hydraulics and Hole Cleaning Abnormal Pressure Environments Kick Detection and Cont rol Lost Circulation Borehole Instability Stuck Pipe Fishing Operations Hydrogen Sulfide Drilling Optimization Drilling Problems and Drilling Optimizat ion: References and Additional Information Topic 77 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation

Basic Completion Design and Practices (IHRDC_IPIMS_t120)
Description: Introduces feat ures used to categorize well completions, emphasizing the importance of correct tubing design and t echniques. Presents downhole component s common in producing wells. Outlines the major completion operations: cementing, logging, perforating, stimulation and sand cont rol. Duration: Min: 2 hours 30 minutes Max: 3 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: General Design Crit eria Basic Downhole Configurat ions Lift Methods Subsea Completions Completion Productivit y Completion Planning Topic 78 of 123

Cementing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t121)
Description: Covers procedures and equipment used in primary and secondary cement jobs. Reviews the basic chemistry of various bulk cement and cement addit ives, as well as industry-standard mixing procedures. Describes surface and downhole equipment, precise placement t echniques, quality control and safe work practices. Duration: Min: 4 hours 40 minutes Max: 6 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Cementing Manufact ure and Classification of Oilwell Cements Cement Testing Procedures Cement Additives Primary Cementing Equipment Primary Cementing Operat ions Squeeze Cementing Cement Plugs Evaluat ing/Testing the Cement Job Fluid Flow Properties and Mud Displacement Cementing: References and Additional Information Topic 79 of 123

Perforating (IHRDC_IPIMS_t122)
Description: Describes the operation of shaped charges, as well as basic categories of perforating guns and perforating methods. Reviews API test ing procedures, met hods of predicting and maximizing perforation product ivity, equipment and operating procedures for wireline and tubing-conveyed techniques. Emphasizes job-planning, quality cont rol and safety guidelines. Duration: Min: 2 hours 30 minutes Max: 3 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Perforating Perforating Gun Types Perforating and Production Performance Electric Wireline Perforating Tubing-Conveyed Perforating Perforating: References and Addit ional Information Topic 80 of 123

Acidizing and Other Chemical Treatments (IHRDC_IPIMS_t123)
Description: Introduces safe, cost-effective acid treat ment design. Covers three basic treat ment s: acid washing, matrix acidizing and acid fracturing. Describes t he costs and potential hazards of acidizing, and emphasizes proper justification and care in field procedures. Reviews fundamentals of acid chemistry and testing and field procedures. Duration: Min: 3 hours 20 minutes Max: 4 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Acidizing Acid Treating Solutions Additives in Acidizing Fluids Matrix Acidizing Fracture Acidizing Diverting Materials in Acidizing Wellbore Cleanout and Scale Removal Paraffins and Asphaltenes Acidizing and Other Chemical Treatments: References and Additional Information Topic 81 of 123

Hydraulic Fracturing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t124)
Description: Introduces three aspects of hydraulic fract ure st imulation: theory, design, and execut ion. Reviews rock mechanics and fracture modeling. Discusses hydraulic fracture stimulation treatments, including determining fracture dimensions and selecting proppants and chemical addit ives. Presents case study of an actual fracturing job. Duration: Min: 3 hours 0 minutes Max: 4 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Hydraulic Fracturing Fundamentals Hydraulic Fracturing Fluids Proppant Agents Acid Fracturing Hydraulic Fracture Treat ment Design and Execut ion Hydraulic Fracturing: Emerging Technologies Hydraulic Fracturing: References and Additional Information Topic 82 of 123

Sand Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_t125)
Description: Covers sand control topics from rock mechanics to equipment. Emphasizes estimation and control methods. Presents gravel-pack design and placement procedures in detail, describing surface equipment used, as well as downhole screens and associated equipment. Duration: Min: 4 hours 30 minutes Max: 6 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Sand Production in Oil and Gas Wells Completion and Production Practices Liners and Screens Gravel Packing Frac-and-Pack Techniques Consolidation Techniques Sand Control in Wells Producing Heavy Oil Sand Control: References and Additional Information Topic 83 of 123

Horizontal Wells: Completion and Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t126)
Description: Introduces the deliverability equation for horizontal wells. Compares horizontal and vertical well performance. Identifies formation characterist ics t hat favor horizontal wells, and discusses methods for their determinat ion. Describes basic well configurations and complet ion designs. Looks at practical aspects of cementing, zonal isolation, casing design and sand cont rol. Address guidelines for matrix acid treatments and hydraulic fracture stimulations. Duration: Min: 3 hours 50 minutes Max: 5 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Horizontal Wells in a Reservoir Management Strat egy Horizontal Well Completions Matrix Stimulation of Horizontal Wells Hydraulic Fracturing of Horizontal Wells Multilateral, Multibranched and Multilevel Wells Horizontal Wells: Completion and Evaluat ion: References and Additional Information Topic 84 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Other Petroleum Engineering Topics

Natural Gas Fluid Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_t141)
Description: Introduces basic concepts, inst rumentation and terminology used in natural gas engineering. Reviews characterist ics of natural gas fluid systems. Describes devices for measuring temperature, pressure, volume, flow rate, density and other properties, and discusses well selection, conditioning and sampling procedures. Outlines methods for measuring mass flow rates and determining mixed-stream compositions. Duration: Min: 3 hours 0 minutes Max: 3 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Natural Gas Fluid Systems Natural Gas Fluid Properties Temperature Measurement Pressure Measurement Volume and Flow Rate Measurement Gravity/ Density Measurement and Gas Composition Natural Gas Fluid Sampling Mass Flow Rat e Mixed Stream Composition Natural Gas Fluid Properties: References and Additional Information Topic 85 of 123

Risk Analysis Applied to Petroleum Investments (IHRDC_IPIMS_t142)
Description: Introduces concepts of risk and uncertainty as they apply t o the oil and gas indust ry. Describes risk analysis models, measures of profitabilit y and other decision-making tools. Reviews principles of probability distribution and introduces the Monte Carlo simulat ion model. Presents procedures for running simulation models using @RISK software. Discusses the role of competitive bidding in the petroleum industry. Duration: Min: 3 hours 20 minutes Max: 4 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Risk Analysis Fundament als Probabilit y Distributions Monte Carlo Simulation Models Competitive Bidding Risk Analysis Applied to Petroleum Invest ment s: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 86 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Petroleum Production Performance

Fluid Flow and the Production System (IHRDC_IPIMS_t978)
Description: Out lines the basic components of the producing system: reservoir, wellbore, and surface flow-control equipment. Explains the interrelated nature of these components from the perspective of the production engineer. Discusses inflow performance in more detail, presenting the basic methods for determining IPR curves from limited data. Mathematics and terminology are explained for each technique. Elaborat es on vertical lift performance, illustrat ing the flow regimes possible in vertical tubing st rings as well as correlations for determining pressure losses. Integrates inflow performance and vertical lift performance for a flowing well. Integrates the concepts introduced in the previous three modules, presenting graphical techniques for int egrating inflow and vertical lift performance with surface-control conditions.
Duration: Min: 3 hours 10 minutes Max: 4 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Production Systems Inflow Performance Relationship Vertical Lift Performance Flowing Well Performance Fluid Flow and t he Production System: Reference Sect ion Topic 87 of 123

Production Performance Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t982)
Description: Presents the basis for graphical production-rate-ext rapolation techniques. Illustrates and explains t he fundamental equat ions and smoothing procedures with examples. Duration: Min: 50 minut es Max: 1 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Production Rate Decline Curves Production Performance Evaluation: Reference Section Topic 88 of 123

Drill Bits (IHRDC_IPIMS_t983)
Description: Describes design, selection, performance and evaluation of common drill bit types. Emphasizes the general applicat ion of various downhole tools and development of sound drilling practices. Duration: Min: 2 hours 30 minutes Max: 3 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Drill Bits Bit Design (Rolling Cutter Types) Bit Design (Fixed Cutter Types) Bit Hydraulics Bit Selection Criteria Bit Grading and Evaluation Bit Operating Guidelines Drill Bit s: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 89 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Reservoir Engineering

Reservoir Environments and Characterization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t984)
Description: Introduces import ant deposit ional environments and processes. Explains the geological, geophysical and engineering information vital to reservoir characterization, and its use in reservoir management. Duration: Min: 3 hours 10 minutes Max: 4 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Sandstone Reservoir Environment s Carbonate Reservoir Environments Reservoir Characterization Reservoir Environments and Characterization: References and Additional Information Topic 90 of 123

Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering (IHRDC_IPIMS_t986)
Description: Introduces fluid flow and natural drive mechanisms. Describes basic reservoir engineering goals and the tools and resources employed by reservoir engineers. Describes the behavior of gas and gas condensate reservoirs, using the real gas equation of st at e and the P/Z versus cumulative production approaches. Discusses major drive mechanisms and the calculation of OIP using material balance equations. Duration: Min: 2 hours 30 minutes Max: 3 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Basic Concepts in Reservoir Engineering Reservoir Fluid Flow and Nat ural Drive Mechanisms Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering: References and Additional Information Topic 91 of 123

Improved Recovery Processes (IHRDC_IPIMS_t987)
Description: Secondary Recovery: Waterflooding & Gas Injection Introduces the fundamental principles governing the displacement of oil by water in reservoir rocks, as well as techniques for predicting oil recovery by water and gas injection. Describes the important factors t o consider in planning secondary recovery projects. Enhanced Recovery: Miscible Flooding Introduces the physical and chemical processes governing the recovery of oil by miscible displacing agents. Contains extensive discussion of methods for estimating oil recovery. Describes the considerations involved in designing a miscible flood, and illustrat es these considerat ions by reviewing a number of pilot tests and commercial projects.
Duration: Min: 7 hours 20 minutes Max: 12 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Secondary Recovery: Waterflooding and Gas Injection Enhanced Recovery: Miscible Flooding Improved Recovery Processes: References and Addit ional Information Topic 92 of 123

Reservoir Modeling and Reserves Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t989)
Description: Reservoir Simulation Introduces the concept s of reservoir modeling, and outlines the steps involved in a reservoir simulation st udy. Reviews rock properties, fluid propert ies and t he mathematical descript ion of fluid flow dynamics in porous media. Describes computer methods for sett ing up a numerical model and solving flow equations. Discusses pract ical applications of reservoir modeling, including the use of special purpose simulators. Reserves Estimation Introduces reserves estimation and t he industry definitions used to categorize reserves. Illustrates principal met hods of calculation: analogy/statistical, volumetric, mat erial balance and performance trend analogy. Presents special considerations for estimating reserves in fractured, geopressured, heavy oil, low permeability or partial water-drive gas reservoirs.
Duration: Min: 7 hours 30 minutes Max: 12 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Reservoir Simulation Reserves Estimation Reservoir Modeling and Reserves Evaluation: References and Additional Information Topic 93 of 123

Issues in Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_t991)
Description: Evaluation of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs Discusses the origin and classification of natural fractures, and outlines methods for detecting and characterizing them. Discusses how the properties of fractured formations affect reservoir engineering considerations. Out lines general approaches t o modeling fractured reservoirs, illustrating these approaches with several case studies. Reservoir Management of Mature Fields Introduces the concept of synergism in reservoir management, stressing an interdisciplinary approach as key to maximizing a field's pot ential. Outlines data requirements and methodology for evaluating a mat ure reservoir. Discusses applied reservoir management from the standpoint of increasing reserves and monit oring performance, with special emphasis on waterflooding and enhanced oil recovery projects.
Duration: Min: 5 hours 40 minutes Max: 8 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Evaluat ion of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs Reservoir Management of Mature Fields Issues in Reservoir Management : References and Additional Informat ion Topic 94 of 123

Completion Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t1926)
Description: Presents downhole components common in producing wells. Duration: Min: 2 hours 20 minutes Max: 2 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Tubulars Packers Art ificial Lift Equipment Downhole Completion Accessories Subsurface Safety Valves (SSSVs) Wellhead Equipment Completion Equipment: References and Addit ional Information Topic 95 of 123

Oil and Gas Pipelines (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5723)
Description: This topic covers the engineering design and construction aspects of oil and gas pipelines. Discusses pipeline history, key design considerations (including hydraulic calculations and mechanical st rength), onshore and offshore constructions pract ices, cost estimating, current operating practices and This t opic covers the engineering design and construction aspects of oil and gas pipelines. Discusses pipeline history, key design considerations (including hydraulic calculations and mechanical strength), onshore and offshore construct ions practices, cost est imat ing, current operating practices and potential operating problems. Duration: Min: 4 hours 10 minutes Max: 5 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Overview of Oil and Gas Pipelines Hydraulics Mechanical Design Construction Operations Oil and Gas Pipelines: References and Additional Information Topic 96 of 123

Integrated Reservoir Characterization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5858)
Description: Integrated Reservoir Characterization pulls together data and t alents from a number of disciplines t o opt imize field production. This topic describes the contributions of the geologist, geophysicist, petroleum engineer, and petrophysicist as they combine data and interpretations to build a comprehensive model of the reservoir. Duration: Min: 4 hours 0 minutes Max: 5 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Int egrated Reservoir Characterizat ion Assembly and Review of Existing Dat a Data Acquisition Data Analysis and Interpretation Data Int egration Conclusion Recommended Processes Case Study 1 - Anasazi Field Case Study 2 - Yibal Field Integrated Reservoir Characterization: References and Additional Information Integrated Reservoir Characterization: Exercises Topic 97 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Facilities Design

Oil Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6433)
Description: These presentations provide an understanding of two-phase and three-phase separators, describe how they work and what t he design procedures are for sizing t hem. Then, different methods and procedures are described for oil t reating and associated equipment design. Oil desalting is the process of removing water-soluble salt s from an oil stream. This present at ion describes the equipment commonly used and provides references for sizing the equipment. Crude oil or condensate stabilization describes t he various processes used to stabilize a crude oil or condensate st ream, and present s a preliminary method for determining liquid recoveries through stabilization. Duration: Min: 5 hours 50 minutes Max: 8 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Two Phase Separators Three Phase Separators Oil Treaters Desalt ing Crude Stabilization Oil Systems and Equipment: References and Additional Information Topic 98 of 123

Gas Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6434)
Description: Besides sales contract restrictions, several other reasons exist for t he removal of acid components from natural gas streams. Among these are personnel safety, odor reduct ion, and fuel Btu improvement. The process of removing water vapor from a gas st ream is called "gas dehydration. This presentation discusses conventional TEG dehydration and presents a method to size and design the glycol dehydration equipment. Compressors are used whenever it is necessary to flow gas from a low pressure system t o a higher pressure system. This presentation provides guidelines on selecting t he type of compressor to use for each applicat ion, determining power requirements, and designing the piping system associated with the compressor. Duration: Min: 4 hours 30 minutes Max: 6 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Acid Gas Removal Glycol Dehydration Reciprocating Compressors Gas Systems and Equipment: References and Additional Information Topic 99 of 123

Water Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6435)
Description: In production operations, it is often necessary t o handle wastewater. The wat er must be separated from the oil and disposed of in an environmentally safe manner. This presentation describes the equipment used to separate, t reat, collect, and dispose of wastewater, along with procedures for designing a water treating system consisting of skimmer tanks and vessels, plat e coalescers, flotation units, and/or disposal piles. Information about equipment selection and sizing for removing suspended solids and dissolved gases from water is also provided. Duration: Min: 3 hours 10 minutes Max: 5 hours 0 minutes Subtopics: Treating Oil from Produced Water Removing Solids and Dissolved Gases from Produced Water Water Systems and Equipment: References and Additional Information Topic 100 of 123

Utility Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6436)
Description: This topic presents informat ion on fuel system design, providing guidelines for determining the facility fuel requirements and information on select ing equipment needed t o treat fuels prior to use. Technical explanations on Fired heaters and their uses, along wit h guidelines for selecting and specifying a fired heater is present ed. The next tutorial provides methods for determining t he amount of waste heat energy available, and present s information and procedures on the design of a waste heat recovery system. Then, various components of refrigeration and heating systems are described, and a procedure is established for sizing evaporator duties, condenser duties, compressor horsepower, fan horsepower and duct sizes. In the last two subtopics, a basic understanding of reciprocating and centrifugal pumps is provided. Duration: Min: 8 hours 50 minutes Max: 13 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Fuel Gas Systems Fired Heaters and Hydrate Control Heat Transfer Systems Waste Heat Recovery Heating, Vent ilat ion, and Air Conditioning Reciprocating Pumps Centrifugal Pumps Utility Systems and Equipment: References and Additional Information Topic 101 of 123

Instrumentation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6437)
Description: This presentation covers the principles of control theory and the popular methods of implementation. Pressure, temperat ure and, flow measurement equipment types and their selection crit eria is explained in detail. Different types and typical mounting practices for Level Instruments is presented. Control valves are described in terms of how to select the proper type of valve, suitable materials, and an appropriate size. Specifications and review of Safet y Shutdown and Wellhead Control systems are covered in det ail. Duration: Min: 8 hours 0 minutes Max: 11 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Controllers and Control Theory Pressure Measurement and Control Temperature Measurement and Cont rol Flow Measurement and Control Level Measurement and Control Control Valves Safety Shutdown Systems Wellhead Shutdown Systems Instrument at ion: References and Additional Information Topic 102 of 123

Platform and Structural Design Considerations (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6438)
Description: This presentation describes planning, designing, and arranging of equipment on offshore structures for the safe and efficient production of oil and gas. General criteria is provided for designing living quarters. This cont ent also provides the project engineer wit h information for determining line size, wall t hickness, and pressure rating class. Miscellaneous det ails to be considered in designing a piping system also are discussed. Duration: Min: 4 hours 10 minutes Max: 6 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Offshore Facility Layout Living Quarters Layout Facilities Piping Platform and Structural Design Considerations: References and Addit ional Information Topic 103 of 123

Underbalanced Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23393)
Description: This presentation covers the underbalanced drilling met hod, which is defined as the practice of drilling a well with t he wellbore fluid gradient less than the natural formation gradient. Besides minimizing lost circulation and increasing the penetrat ion rate, t his t echnique has a widely recognized benefit of minimizing t he damage caused by invasion of drilling fluid into the formation. Different underbalanced drilling equipment and t echniques are discussed under this topic. The underbalanced well classification system used by t he industry and several case studies are also covered in this presentation. Duration: Min: 4 hours 40 minutes Max: 5 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Underbalanced Drilling Dry Air Drilling Nitrogen Drilling Natural Gas Drilling Mist Drilling Foam Drilling Stiff Foam Drilling Gasified Liquids Flow-Drilling Snub Drilling Underbalanced Drilling: General Issues Case Studies Underbalanced Drilling: References and Additional Information Topic 104 of 123

Intelligent Completions (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36209)
Description: As the oil indust ry matures, it must seek better and more efficient ways to exploit diminishing resources. To maximize production and improve the economics of reservoirs, oil companies must resort to a wide range of sophisticat ed completion strategies. By real-time data monitoring wit h remote-controlled sliding sleeves or variable chokes, int elligent completions help operat ors to better manage production, eliminat e or reduce interventions and associated production downtime, well costs and risks. This new IPIMS t opic discusses the overall evolution of intelligent well complet ions, and describes a variet y of intelligent well t echnologies that focus on measurement and control t echniques to optimize oil and gas production. Duration: Min: 4 hours 10 minutes Max: 5 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Int elligent Completions Fundamentals of Pressure Sensors Fiber Opt ic Sensing and Telemetry Systems Downhole Flow Control Assessing Reliabilit y Intelligent Completions: References and Further Reading Topic 105 of 123

Artificial Lift Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36234)
Description: Introduces the concept of artificial lift as a means of optimizing production performance. Est ablishes screening and selection crit eria for the major artificial lift methods. Describes surface and subsurface equipment, design procedures and operat ing practices for continuous and int ermittent gas lift, reciprocating rod pump, progressive cavity pump, hydraulic pump, electrical submersible pump and plunger lift systems. Duration: Min: 6 hours 30 minutes Max: 9 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Art ificial Lift Overview Gas Lift Reciprocating Rod Pump Systems Progressive Cavit y Pump (PCP) Systems Hydraulic Pump Systems Electrical Submersible Pump (ESP) Systems Plunger Lift Systems Art ificial Lift Methods: References and Additional Information Topic 106 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Offshore Operations

Offshore Production Facilities (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36282)
Description: Starting with a broad look at t he offshore oil and gas industry, including it s hist ory, current scope, trends, challenges and an overview of regulatory environments, this Topic examines the primary design considerations for offshore production facilities and identifies key drivers and decision factors in offshore project development. It goes on to describe the various types of platforms, surface components and subsea production facilit ies: their design features, equipment components operating considerat ions and areas of applicat ion. Included are discussions of offshore pipelines, production equipment and operations, and requirements for decommissioning and removal of offshore facilities. The presentation concludes with case studies of deepwater operations in West Africa and the Gulf of Mexico. Duration: Min: 7 hours 20 minutes Max: 11 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Overview Of The Offshore Petroleum Industry Primary Design Considerations For Offshore Production Facilities Development Project Drivers And Key Decision Factors Platforms And Surface Facilities Subsea Production Facilities Offshore Pipelines Offshore Production Equipment And Operations Decommissioning And Removal Of Offshore Facilities Offshore Development: Case Studies Offshore Production Facilities: References and Additional Information Topic 107 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Offshore Operations

Deepwater Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36797)
Description: The term deepwater has always been defined in t erms of where offshore technology stood at a given moment. In t he early 1960s, 500-foot water depths placed a practical limit on offshore drilling capabilit ies; by 2003, the water depth record had surpassed 10,000 feet. This Topic describes the equipment and technology that have made such advances possible. Starting with an overview of worldwide drilling activity, it looks at the charact eristics of deepwater environments and the challenges t hey pose with respect to rig requirements and offshore project management. It goes on to discuss t he systems, equipment and considerations involved in deepwater well planning, design and construction. It then examines some of the innovat ive solutions to deepwater drilling challenges, ranging from riserless drilling to dual act ivity operations. Finally, it presents several case studies to show how these solutions have been applied in the Gulf of Mexico, offshore eastern Canada and the North Sea. Duration: Min: 4 hours 40 minutes Max: 7 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Deepwater Projects And Environment s Deepwater Drilling Systems And Equipment Deepwater Well Planning And Design Deepwater Well Const ruction Advanced Solutions For Deepwater Drilling Challenges Deepwater Case Histories Deepwater Drilling: References and Additional Information Topic 108 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Wireline Well Logging

Well Log Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t26)
Description: Explains commonly used log analysis techniques and formulas. Demonstrates t he use of logging tools to evaluate porosity, lit hology and saturation. Presents computer applicat ions, methods and models and combines the various tools and measurement s in a concluding case study. Duration: Min: 7 hours 30 minutes Max: 10 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Quick-Look Analysis Fluid Saturation Fractures Porosity Lithology Interpretation Models Computer Applications Field Studies Well Log Interpretation: Reference Section Advances in Low Resistivity Pay Evaluat ion Topic 109 of 123

Dipmeter Surveys (IHRDC_IPIMS_t27)
Description: Introduces the standard four-arm dipmeter tool, which measures resistivity, hole size and sonde orientation. Describes correlat ions between recorded t races and true dips of bed boundaries. Present s characteristic patterns from which structural dip, faulting, unconformities, bed geometry and deposit ional environment can be inferred. Also discusses the use of clustered microresistivit y buttons t o reveal bedding textures, vugs and fract ures. Duration: Min: 4 hours 50 minutes Max: 6 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: General Principles Computation Dip Patterns Interpretation Overview Structural Dip Interpretation Lithological Interpretation Fault Interpretation Reef Int erpret at ion Unconformity Interpretation Depositional Interpretation Interpretation Dipmeter Surveys: References and Addit ional Information Topic 110 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Rock and Fluid Sampling and Analysis

Sampling and Analysis of Drilled Cuttings (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29)
Description: Rock cuttings from drill bit s can be the most reliable source of information available at a wellsite. Presents the procedures and responsibilities involved in wellsite evaluation of cuttings and cores. Emphasizes att ention to qualit y control in the collection, preparation, and st orage of cuttings and cores to ensure laboratory analysis accurately measures subsurface conditions. Duration: Min: 1 hours 10 minutes Max: 1 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Rotary Drilling and Cut tings Generat ion Sample Collection and Handling Sample Description Sampling and Analysis of Drilled Cutt ings: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 111 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Well Testing and Analysis

Fundamentals of Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t127)
Description: Introduces the theory of pressure-transient analysis. Illust rates the measurement devices used to detect and record pressures during well testing. Presents fundamentals of well sampling and test ing. Duration: Min: 2 hours 0 minutes Max: 2 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Fundamentals of Well Testing Pressure Profiles at the Wellbore Defining the Reservoir Model Quantitative Well Test Int erpret at ion Well Test Planning and Execution Fundamentals of Well Testing: References and Additional Information Topic 112 of 123

Gas Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t128)
Description: Presents the fundament al theory and mathematical basis for det ermining gaswell performance from well test data. Outlines field t esting procedures and interpretation met hods. Duration: Min: 1 hours 50 minutes Max: 2 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Conventional and Isochronal Gas Well Tests Additional Testing Options Special Considerations in Testing Gas Wells Test Procedures and Regulat ions (Examples) Gas Well Testing: References and Additional Information Topic 113 of 123

Oil Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t129)
Description: Reviews the mathematical basis for different types of well tests and interpretation procedures for well test data, including buildup and drawdown tests, multiple rate t ests, interference and pulse test ing. Duration: Min: 2 hours 20 minutes Max: 2 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Basics of Pressure Transient Analysis Log-log Analysis Test Design Test Analysis Oil Well Testing: References and Additional Information Topic 114 of 123

Drillstem Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t130)
Description: Introduces equipment and procedures for drillstem testing. Describes basic t ool assemblies and operating procedures for fixed and floating rig testing. Illustrates qualit at ive and quantitative analysis of drillstem test dat a. Duration: Min: 2 hours 50 minutes Max: 3 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Overview of Drillstem Testing Types of Drillstem Tests Tool String: Convent ional DST (Open Hole) Tool String: Other DST Types Test ing on Floating Vessels Pressure Recorders for DSTs Surface DST Equipment DST Design and Field Procedures DST Interpretation: General Aspects DST Interpretation: Qualit at ive Analysis DST Interpretation: Quantitative Analysis Drillstem Testing: References and Additional Information Topic 115 of 123

Mud Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t997)
Description: Demonstrates the t echniques of conventional mud logging during the preparation of a formation log and accompanying event reports. Presents t he rate-of-penetration curve, lit hology plot, t otal gas curve, gas composition curves and descriptive t rack. Also discusses the use of mud logging in overpressure recognition, hydrocarbon evaluation and non-hydrocarbon gas detect ion. Summarizes computer-based data acquisit ion and measurement-while-drilling t echniques. Duration: Min: 3 hours 20 minutes Max: 5 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Mud Logging Conventional Mud Logging Practices Penetration Rate and Lithology Gas Measurement and Analysis Supplemental Logging Techniques and Applications Advanced Mud Logging and Advisory Practices Selection of Services and Equipment Mud Logging: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 116 of 123

Coring and Core Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t998)
Description: Introduces the equipment and procedures used in core analysis. Outlines coring program objectives and design considerations, as well as steps t aken to properly preserve represent at ive reservoir samples. Illustrat es bot h routine and special core analysis t echniques. Duration: Min: 4 hours 30 minutes Max: 6 hours 10 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Coring and Core Analysis Borehole Environment Bottomhole Coring (Coring While Drilling) Sidewall Coring (Coring Aft er Drilling) Major Types of Core Analysis Core Sample Preparation Porosity Measurement Permeability Measurement Saturation Measurement Complementary Core Information Core Analysis Reports Special Core Analysis Coring and Core Analysis: References and Addit ional Information Topic 117 of 123

Fluid Sampling and Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t999)
Description: Reviews basic properties of hydrocarbon reservoir fluids and format ion water. Illustrates phase behavior, PVT properties, and categorization of reservoir fluids. Describes equipment and procedures for laboratory analyses and fluid sampling including surface and subsurface techniques. Present s correlations used to estimate reservoir fluid behavior. Duration: Min: 4 hours 0 minutes Max: 5 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Reservoir Fluids: Overview Hydrocarbon Phase Behavior Hydrocarbon Gases Hydrocarbon Liquids Two-Phase Systems Formation Water Fluid Sampling: General Considerations Hydrocarbon Sampling Water Sampling Sampling: Transportation and Safety Reservoir Fluid Analysis Reservoir Fluid Correlations Fluid Sampling and Analysis: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 118 of 123

Borehole Imaging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5610)
Description: Advanced imaging technologies provide high-resolution information about lithology, structure, sedimentary features and borehole conditions. This Topic describes the operating principles, applications and limitations of acoustic and resistivity imaging t ools, and illustrates how you can use borehole imaging as a reservoir monitoring and characterization tool. Duration: Min: 1 hours 10 minutes Max: 1 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Borehole Imaging Overview Borehole Imaging Technology Borehole Imaging Methods Borehole Imaging References and Additional Informat ion Best Practices Exercises and Solut ions Topic 119 of 123

Advanced Pressure Transient Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t24035)
Description: This presentation examines in detail the mathematical basis for well test interpretation, starting with the concept of an ideal reservoir model and the partial differential equat ions used to describe single-phase and mult i-phase flow in porous media. It discusses t he use of dimensionless variables and type curves in pressure transient analysis, and describes interpretation methods for anisotropic, het ereogenous and multi-phase reservoirs. It also provides an overview of computer applications in pressure t ransient analysis, discusses specialized well testing procedures and their applications, and describes mathematical tools used in pressure transient analysis, including Transformations, applications of the Superposition Principle, Convolution/Deconvolution Methods, and Pressure Derivative Analysis. Duration: Min: 4 hours 10 minutes Max: 5 hours 50 minutes Subtopics: Pressure Transient Testing: Overview Different ial Flow Equat ions for Pressure Transient Analysis Dimensionless Variables and Their Applications Type Curves Pressure Transient Analysis in Anisotropic Reservoirs Pressure Transient Analysis in Heterogeneous Reservoirs Pressure Transient Analysis in Multi-Phase Reservoirs Pressure Transient Analysis-Computer Applications Pressure Transient Analysis-Specialized Well Test ing Techniques Advanced Pressure Transient Analysis: References and Additional Informat ion Pressure Transient Analysis-Mathematical Tools Well Testing Nomenclature and Systems of Unit s Topic 120 of 123

Formation Evaluation Overview (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29946)
Description: Introduces the techniques of downhole formation evaluation, comparing wireline logging to other conventional downhole evaluation met hods. Discusses wellsite logging equipment and procedures, logging t ools and the scientific principles on which t hey are based, and t he characteristics of t he borehole and surrounding rocks. Demonstrates int erpret at ion through common "quick-look" crossplots, overlay procedures, and computer analysis. Duration: Min: 2 hours 20 minutes Max: 3 hours 40 minutes Subtopics: Introduction t o Formation Evaluation Borehole Environment Rock and Fluid Properties Laboratory Measurements Formation Evaluation Overview: References and Additional Informat ion Topic 121 of 123

Logging Equipment and Procedures (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29947)
Description: Petrophysics, the study of rock-fluid systems, relates the physical parameters measured by well logging tools to actual reservoir porosity, permeabilit y and fluid sat uration. Presents t he commonly used logging tools--SP, gamma ray, resist ivity and porosity--and their characteristics and functions. Examines the int eraction of rocks and fluids in both st at ic and dynamic situations. Duration: Min: 1 hours 10 minutes Max: 1 hours 30 minutes Subtopics: Logging Systems Logging Procedures Logging Equipment and Procedures: References and Additional Information Topic 122 of 123

Well Logging Tools and Techniques (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29948)
Description: Presents the commonly used logging tools--SP, gamma ray, resistivit y and porosity--and their characterist ics and functions including coverage of Magnetic Resonance Logging. Examines the interaction of rocks and fluids in both static and dynamic situations. Duration: Min: 7 hours 0 minutes Max: 10 hours 20 minutes Subtopics: Magnetic Resonance Logs Spontaneous Pot ential Log Gamma Ray Log Resistivity Logs Dielect ric Logs Density Logs Neutron Logs Acoustic Logs Special Open Hole Tools Cased Hole Logs Casing Inspection Logs Production Logs Sampling and Testing Well Logging Tools and Techniques: References and Additional Information Topic 123 of 123
IPIMS
Action Learning Course Catalog
EXPLORATION: Basin Analysis

Sedimentology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a290)
Description: Competency Statement: Identify sedimentary rocks and processes from such information as outcrops, core reports, well logs and cuttings. Describe sedimentary and diagenetic processes. Define depositional environments and facies architecture wit hin the cont ext of basin analysis. Describe the role of petrographic studies, such as XRD, SEM and t hin-section analysis in sedimentology. Learning Objective: Use core and out crop data to define lithofacies and depositional environments in terms of composition, t exture, geometry and sedimentary st ructure. Use core data and well logs to construct lit hostratigraphic columns, infer depositional environment s and build geologic cross-sections. Review facies trends and extrapolate them t o a regional scale. Use sediment ological interpretations as a basis for building facies and net-to gross sand maps. Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibilit y is to evaluat e new exploration opportunities. Your role is to understand t he sediment ological development and pot ential of basins that Beta Exploration, Inc. desires to explore in. In many cases you have a limited amount of dat a to make a recommendation wit h. This learning module will allow you to use the data available in this region and interpret the depositional systems. The existing information in t his exploration area is limited. Some wells have been drilled in t he past and sp and gamma logs are available. New wells have been drilled recently and intervals of interest were cored. Gathering, defining and interpreting well data are important tasks of explorat ion geologists to construct correlations and maps. The base map of the region is below. The data set used for this exercise includes surface outcrop information, core descriptions and electric logs of wells. You will have the description of grain size and texture, primary sedimentary structures, ichnofacies and other dat a to classify t he lithofacies and complete the facies analysis for cert ain wells. Additionally, you will calibrate cores to well logs to complet e your analysis. Using this information, you will interpret the facies successions and depositional environment s in each well. Subsequently you will const ruct a correlation with 5 wells (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) and map paleoenvironments distribution. Finally, you will make a net sand map to observe the t rend of sandstone deposition.
Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 1 of 87

Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a291)
Description: Competency Statement: Identify sequence boundaries and flooding surfaces in a chronostratigraphic framework. Det ermine depositional environment s and related facies wit hin a chronostratigraphic framework by analyzing well logs, core samples, outcrops and other information. Develop a model t o evaluate the basin-wide distribution of source, reservoir and seal rocks. Learning Objective: Out line principle genetic types of deposit s used in sequence st ratigraphy (e.g., normal regressive, forced regressive, t ransgressive, and st illstand.). Define st ratigraphic cross-sections based on sequence stratigraphy concepts. Predict reservoir occurrences based on an understanding of the relationships bet ween accommodation space, sediment supply, stacking patterns and unconformities. Interpret stratigraphic evolution in a basin. Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for ACME Petroleum Co., you have been selected for a sequence st ratigraphy study in t he Eastern Venezuelan Basin, one of the largest oil producing basins of t he world. As part of your responsibilities, you will have to provide information on the continuity of reservoirs and regional seals that might be useful for the rest of your team. The section comprises a fluvial deltaic system deposit ed during the Early Miocene (18.5 my) and Middle Miocene (13.8 my). The units deposited since the Middle Miocene, unconformably overly Cretaceous shales with high organic matter content, which const itutes most of the source rock which for the hydrocarbons of t he basin. The geological interpretation of well logs was int egrated with t he biostrat igraphic and sedimentological information obtained from core and sidewall samples. This integration allowed for the sedimentary sect ion to be subdivided into geometrical packages bounded by unconformit ies and internal surfaces. Based on this int erpret at ion third order sequences were identified. For carrying out this exercise GR and resistivity logs of 5 wells were used as well as information from two cores taken from Wells 1 and 4. The figure below shows the location of t he wells studied. Wells location map.

Seismic Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a292)
Description: Competency Statement: Use t he sequence stratigraphic framework to define seismic sequences with seismic reflection data. Analyze system tracts and determine depositional environments. Predict the distribution of source, reservoir and seal from the established sequence stratigraphy framework. Learning Objective: Explain key concept s of seismic sequence st ratigraphy and the techniques used to evaluate the seismic data. Establish the major sequences and flooding surfaces for basic sequence analysis. Integrate available well, biostratigraphic and outcrop data into t he framework. Determine depositional environment and facies. Use seismic data t o interpret deposit ional sequences. Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibilit y is to evaluat e new exploration opportunities for Bet a Exploration, Inc. As the Seismic Sequence St ratigrapher your role is to evaluat e the seismic data to provide insight to other team members on the stratigraphic section of t he basin with particular emphasis on potent ial source, reservoir, seal and traps. The studied area is located to the northeast of the Australian Platform. Stratigraphically, the sect ion varies from Upper Triassic t o Lower Cretaceous (Location map). The exercise is roughly based on a paper by Erskine and Vail (After Erskine and Vail: in Bally, A. W. (editor), Atlas of Seismic St ratigraphy 1987, AAPG). Three seismic lines were used for the exercise. In addition, two wells A and B support the st ratigraphic interpretation of the area. See locat ion map below. Four unconformities, as well as their correlative surfaces, bound three third order sequences including their identifiable system t racts ident ifed from older to youngers as: I, II and III. The age of the unconformit ies were determined through paleontological data obtained from wells drilled in the area and from t he global marine cycles chart. The Sequences are named SB132, SB129, SB127 and SB126. TD (Time Depth) plots were deived for bot h wells by means of synthet ic seismograms calculated from sonic logs taken in the wells. The creation of synthet ics allows well linformation in depth to be tied to seismic dat a in time. Thus we are able to evaluate the same lithological intervals in the well and on the seismic line. As a final remark, a composit e stratigraphic cross sect ion, where the seismic and the well data are integrated, is provided in order to show the result obtained in this seismic strat igraphy exercise (Integrated st ratigraphic section).

Biostratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a293)
Description: Competency Statement: Use plant and animal fossils from cuttings, cores or outcrops to distinguish among rock units, determine t heir ages and infer the sedimentary environment . Learning Objective: Describe the different classes of microfossils and their use. Infer sedimentary environments based on occurrences, identification and classification of microfossils. Use microfossils as a basis for est imat ing the ages of rock units. Demonstrate the use of abundance and diversity charts. Use microfossils as a basis for correlating rock units between two wells. Assignment Instruction: The company Beta Exploration Inc. is planning a bid for a new block. As a member of the exploration t eam, your role is to analyze the biostratigraphic information available in t he area. You count on t he informat ion of four wells, which will be integrated with well-logs and the seismic profiles. This exercise will show t he importance of biostratigraphic analysis t hroughout the microfossil examination. You will learn about t he use of several groups of microfossils which can be used to "date" rocks (through biostratigraphy) and to interpret sedimentary environments. Biozones were inferred from first occurrences down hole. The ages were assigned using the zonal schemes applied to the area. You will use the accompanying charts with equivalent zonal schemes for your analysis. This information will inable you to build a biost ratigraphic correlation of the 4 wells. Analyzing the microfossil indicators of depositional environments you will interpret t he biofacies changes through the sect ion st udied and you will make a biofacies maps of the area. The integration of biostratigraphy wit h other geological disciplines, such as geophysics, sediment ology, pet rophysics, and geochemistry is needed for geologicalmodeling and petroleum system studies, which in turn are essential for planning and developing bet ter exploration strategies The chart 'Chronostratigraphic equivalence of the palynological zonations for northern South America and Venezuela' (modified from Lorente et al., 1997) contains ages of stage boundaries (in Ma) according to (1) Haq et al. (1987) and (2) Berggren et al. (1995). You will make a chronost ratigraphic correlation between the wells using biostratigraphy.

Petroleum Geochemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_a294)
Description: Competency Statement: Understand geochemical concept of origin and occurrence of petroleum. Describe its composition and classification of oil and gas. Identify source rock based on geochemical analysis. Understand correlat ion of source rock wit h subsurface hydrocarbon accumulation. Learning Objective: Understand composition and classification of oil and gas. Understand t ypes of kerogen, generation, expulsion and migration of pet roleum. Describe principal tools and methods for evaluation of source rock. Interpret source rock qualit y and maturity. Evaluat e 1-D maturation model. Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibilit y is to evaluat e a regional integrated geochemical study which includes source rocks evaluation, oil geochemistry and their correlation with source rocks, reconstruction of the hydrocarbon generating area and the analysis of the geochemical modeling of a pilot well as an example of a sedimentary basin. The total drainage area of t he basin is limited to the nort h and northeast by a fault , and to t he south, sout heast, southwest , west and nort hwest by mount ains (Fig.1). The tectonic sett ing of t he basin, relevant t o hydrocarbon habitat, changed t hrough time and includes the evolutionary hist ory of the basin during Cretaceous and Cenozoic periods. The present structural configuration of the basin began to develop since the Miocene. During the Miocene-Recent period it became an intermontane basin in a foredeep position. In Aptian-Albian times, a marine transgression led to the deposition of thick shallow wat er carbonate platform and associated sediments. During maximum t ransgression between t he Cenomanian and t he Coniacian, t he sediment at ion was typically of pelagic and euxinic facies, represented by limestones and calcareous shales. During Paleocene t owards SW and W of the basin, clast ic sediments were deposited and in the central part t he sediment at ion occurred in a shallow marine platform. During t he lower to middle Eocene time, the sedimentation was mainly fluvial (SW), fluvio-deltaic to deltaic on t he platform and t urbidite and flysh t o the east. Nearly 100 wells were analyzed (cores and cuttings), and the analysis of TOC, pyrolysis, visual kerogen, UV, GC, biomarkers (GC-MS), and TTI were determinated The important oil prone source rocks were deposited during t he Cretaceous. The other sequences in the basin (Paleocene and Eocene) show mainly gas prone t ype III organic matt er with low potentials. Limest ones and calcareous shales contain organic carbon (OC) between 1.5 9.6% with average of 3.8%. The samples show high concent ration of extractable organic matt er (>2000ppm) and hydrocarbons (>1000 ppm).
EXPLORATION: Dynamics of Deformation

Tectonics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a297)
Description: Competency Statement: Determine global t ectonic setting based on age and paleogeographic maps. Recognize resulting basin and it s evolut ion. Illustrate structural styles det ermined by this tectonic sett ing. Learning Objective: Determine plate t ectonic hist ory for prospective geographic area and age. Describe basin development and evolut ion based on tect onic set ting. Define potent ial struct ural styles based on tectonic setting. Ident ify pot ential hydrocarbon traps resulting from a structural style. Assignment Instruction: As a member of Acme Explorat ion, Inc., New Ventures Team, your responsibility is t o evaluate new exploration opportunities. The Company, has decided to explore in the Maracaibo Basin because of new leasing opportunities. Your role is to provide the exploration team with an evaluation of the plate t ectonics setting, basin development and potent ial trapping style. Your contribution will affect many team members work because accurate understanding of the regional tectonics will influence many of your team member's working hypotheses. The user will learn about global plate movement and lithosphere formation. The genesis, evolution and st ructuring of the Caribbean region will be highlighted. The assignment will include t he tectonic evolution of t he Maracaibo Basin. The evolution of the main faults, their movement, periods of deformation and type of basin formed will be developed. General knowledge about the different stages of t he paleogeographic evolution of the basin as well as age of rifting, foreland basin structuring and passive margin phase will be addressed. The user will also ident ify the tectonic regime of the study area and t he type of faulting present using sample seismic lines drawings and structural map. This analysis of the main fault will allow for the identificat ion of potential hydrocarbon t raps resulting from t his st ructural st yle and the hydrocarbon migration routes.

Structural Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a298)
Description: Competency Statement: Identify and interpret different st ructural st yles in their tectonic setting using geologic maps, cross sections, seismic and well log data. Analyze and predict potential trapping configurat ions based on the struct ural style. Evaluat e the effect of structural style on the overall petroleum system. Learning Objective: Use surface maps, subsurface maps, cross sections and logs to identify and interpret structural styles. Predict the potent ial types of faults and folds associated with a structural style. Understand key characteristics of different types of faults and folds. Determine different t rapping mechanisms which result from different st ructural st yles. Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibilit y is to evaluat e new exploration opportunities. Lake Oil Ventures Ltd, is a subsidiary of Acme Exploration Inc. The former has decided to explore in the central part of the Maracaibo Basin because of new leasing opport unit ies. Your role is to provide t he exploration team with an evaluation of t he structural sett ing and potential trapping configurations corresponding to the structural style. Additionally you will evaluat e the effect of structural style on the possible pet roleum syst em present. Your contribution will affect many of the team members work, because accurate understanding of the t ectonic derived st ructural st yle of the area will influence many of your team members working hypotheses. The concept of structural style is based on comparat ive tectonics. This concept ident ifies pat terns in deformation which in turn can lead to better understanding global repetition of such patterns. Structural geology in it s broadest sense, examines regional st ructural features, t heir interrelationships, evolution, and effects on sedimentation. This means that, prior t o exploration, the types of source and reservoir rock, migration paths, and hydrocarbon traps can be predicted, or at least anticipat ed to a certain extent. The user will identify the st ructural st yle of the study area and type of faulting present in t he sample seismic lines drawings and st ructural map. The type of faulting and ident ification of potential hydrocarbon traps resulting from a structural style.

Rock Properties and Mechanics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a296)
Description: Competency Statement: Identify rock mechanical properties from core, cuttings and electrical logs. Use analysis to address issues related to fractures, subsurface pressures, subsidence and compaction. Illustrate an understanding of rock propert ies t hat effect seismic response. Learning Objective: Define basic rock mechanical properties, describe how they are measured. Understand t he differences between laboratory measurements and in-situ properties. Predict formation subsurface pressure environment and principal stress direct ions. Define properties that effect seismic response and how these propert ies relate to AVO effect. Assignment Instruction: As a specialist assigned to the Exploration New Vent ures Team, your responsibility is to apply your specialt y to evaluate new exploration opportunities. Explorat ion team members come to you to gain insight and support in applying rock properties and mechanics to exploration problems. These problems may be related to tectonics, seismic evaluation or reservoir performance. You oft en have a limited data set to extrapolate from. Rock Mechanics is a very powerful approach for reservoir description and management . It provides useful and efficient links between mechanical and acoustical properties which lead to a deep underst anding of the stress-st rain behavior of subsurface beds. Used properly, together with geostatist ical concepts, it can substantially help to elaborate an accurat e picture of our geological targets. In this assignment, you will observe laboratory dat a from well cores and well logs that will assist you in t he calculation of the elast ic modulus of a reservoir target. Using these characterizations t ogether with fluid substitution concepts and storage (porosity) and transport (permeability), you will be able to estimate t he acoust ic response t o different sat uration fluids. In this sense, you will: Calculate porosity and permeabilit y from laboratory data Use stress-strain relationships for linear elasticity to estimate the elastic modulus Use inversion from acoustic logs and laboratory data to estimate the elastic modulus Give a very educated guess for the stress state on the subsurface Estimate t he seismic signature of fluids and porosity Take all the questions as input for the subsequent questions. Take not e of all your correct answers because you may use that information in the next t asks.
EXPLORATION: Surface Geology and Reconnaissance

Surface Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a300)
Description: Competency Statement: Identify surface geologic units and tectonic elements with a geologic map. Demonstrate the use of cross sections in conjunction with geologic maps. Learning Objective: Demonstrate ablity to read surface geological maps. Illustrate relationship between a cross section and geological map. Locate a particular rock unit on a surface geology map and define t hat unit's geographic dist ribut ion. Demonstrate understanding of an outcrop description and find rock units on a geological map. Understand various cross-section preparation tehniques and fact ors influencing their choice. Assignment Instruction: As a Geologist member of the New Ventures Exploration Team, your assignment is to evaluate new exploration opportunities for Beta Exploration Inc. Your task is to evaluate t he surface geological information available in the setting of the Basin that Beta Explorat ion Inc. Needs t o explore. The other team members will integrate this information with subsurface information that will provide a bet ter understanding of t he strat igraphy of the basin and it s petroleum system. A surface geologic map is shown of an area located at the southern flank of t he Eastern Venezuela Serrania del Interior. In this area, essentially Cretaceous age sedimentary rocks outcrop (Location Map). The geologic map shows t he geographic distribution of the lithostratigraphic unit s recognized in the area through t he informat ion collected from outcrops, aerial photographs and their relat ionship with t he topography. The stratigraphy of t he area is comprised by the Barranquin, Garcia and El Cantil Formations, from the Lower Cretaceous (Barremian t o Albian) and San Antonio (Campanian). The Barranquin Formation consists essentially of coarse grained quartz sandstones, siltst ones and shales of fluvial-deltaic environment s, interbedded with scarce fossiliferous limestones towards t he upper section. The Garcia Formation represent s a rapid deepening of t he environments, as well as deposition of dark, calcareous, highly fossiliferous shales, with an estimated uniform thickness of 90 meters throughout the area. The Cant il Format ion, is charact erized by a shallowing t rend of t he marine environments and carbonaceous shales. The San Antonio Formation shows a fault contact with the previously mentioned sections, towards the south of t he area. A geologic cross sect ion in an E-W direction, allows observat ion of the st ratigraphic configuration of the Lower Cretaceous unit s and t heir relationship t o the topographical features. For the most part, the Garcia Formation, given its characterist ic shaly and fossiliferous content, represents the maximum marine flood for the Lower Cretaceous of Eastern Venezuela, and could be considered a potential source rock. The type section of the Garcia Formation is located east of the eastern flank of the Pico Garcia, where it outcrops in a cont inuous manner.

Remote Sensing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a302)
Description: Competency Statement: Demonstrate understanding of different remot e sensing data and its application to explorat ion. Use remote sensing techniques to identify geomorphological and structural charact eristics. Demonstrate knowledge of how remote sensing can identify surface hydrocarbon anomalies. Learning Objective: Use sat ellite imagery t o identify geographical and geological element s on the Earth surface. Ident ify simple structural styles based on remot e sensing data. Use remote sensing dat a to locate hydrocarbon seeps. Analyze regional structural styles from remote sensing images in order to identify potential areas for exploration. Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for ACME Petroleum Co., you have been assigned for a Geomorphologic and geological interpretation study at the western edge of the Barinas-Apure basin. Satellite Landsat images are analyzed toget her with various complementary data sets to evaluate their potential in the hydrocarbon exploration process. Wit hin your responsibilities, you will have to provide information using a met hodology based on phot o interpretation criteria using optical sensor LANDSAT at a 1:100,000 scale. The first step will be to identify drainage patterns based on the main hydrography. Aft erwards, a geomorphologic reconnaissance identifying valleys, terraces, alluvial fans will be conduct ed. From t he geological point of view, traces of layers, structural guidelines, synclines, anticlines, fault s and unconformities will be identified. The study area is located at the western edge of the Barinas-Apure basin on the Sout h American Craton.

Geodetic Coordinate Systems (IHRDC_IPIMS_a303)
Description: Competency Statement: Understand the differences between coordinate syst ems and t he variables that define them. Recognize the need to convert dat a from one system to another. Determine the most appropriat e cartographic system for the area of interest. Learning Objective: Distiguish bet ween different coordinate systems. List variables necessary to define a coordinate systems. Ident ify strengths and weakness of different coordinate systems. Descripe work flow to establish coordinate system of different dat a types. Describe the Global Posit ioning System and how it is used in determining geodesic positions. Review and convert cartographic data and maps to the most applicable geographic syst em. Assignment Instruction: You are a member of the Company New Ventures Inc. In this exercise, you are going to be a team member of two different projects. The first project is a geodetic survey to support the development of a geologic map of Mexico. The second project is a topographic survey for shot points of a seismic lines from a survey conducted in the Eastern part of Venezuela. Your responsibility is to establish the Primary Control Net work t aking into consideration t he legal and technical standards of t he t wo coordinate systems.This includes their transformation, precision, specific ties according to client`s specifications, as well as verify horizontal and vert ical control points. Wit h this exercise you will learn how to design a Geodetic Survey; defining the survey method in order to analyze and int erpret t he field data that will aid in development of the corresponding maps.

Magnetostratigraphy, Chemostratigraphy and Radiometric Dating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a301)
Description: Competency Statement: Understand principles and techniques of magnetostrat igraphy, chemostratigraphy and radiometric dating. Describe t he practical application of these techniques in non-fossiliferous rock units. Explain how they provide pertinent information in petroleum exploration. Learning Objective: Describe the basic principles and techniques used in magnetostratigraphy. Describe the basic principles and techniques used in chemostrat igraphy. Describe the basic principles and techniques used in radiometric measurements. Demostrate an underst anding of the geologic reasons to apply these techniques. Incorporate these dating techniques with outcrop and surface geological maps. Understand dating techniques for subsurface samples like convent ional cores. Understand advantages and disadvantages of each dating technique. Assignment Instruction: You work in the special st udies section of a very experienced E&P Company. The role of your section is to advise the different exploration projects/teams about frontier basins, areas, plays and prospects. Your specialty is the use of special dating techniques and their int egration into the prospecting processes. In this assignment you will use different dating techniques (Magnetostratigraphy, Radiometry and Chemostratigraphy) in order t o provide a geo-chronologic framework for exploration of several frontier areas.

Gravity, Magnetic and Electromagnetic Exploration Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a304)
Description: Competency Statement: Recognize uses and limit at ions of gravity, magnetics and electromagnetic (EM) methods of exploration. List survey design criteria for each technique. Est imat e the thickness of the sedimentary section of a basin using different data t ypes. Learning Objective: Describe the basic principles and tools used in gravity, magnetic and elect romagnetic techniques. Ident ify main exploration applicat ion for gravity, magnetics and electro-magnetic surveys. Out line design considerat ions of gravity, magnetic and electromagnetic surveys. Apply basic int erpret at ion techniques to determine depth to basement . Assignment Instruction: Potential Fields (Gravity, Magnetism and Electromagnetic) dat a are very often neglected as an exploration tool. In the early history (1900 to 1960) of t he petroleum indust ry, these methods played a superb role in the discoveries of most of the reserves already consumed worldwide. These discoveries included almost 100% of t he onshore fields in Texas, California, Russia, Iraq, Iran, Saudi Arabia and Venezuela, which are still under exploitation t oday. Since the 90s, integrat ed interpretation (using gravity, magnetism, seismic, well and outcrop data) is the common st andard in many major O&G companies. Electromagnetic methods were the preferred tool of choice used by the Russians in the exploration and discovery of its vast reserves until the 70`s, using either magneto-telluric or conventional arrays. Also, in the present , elect rical methods are used to detect aquifers which are of interest for water formation disposal and /or CO2 sequestrat ion. In this Assignment, you will play the role of a Geophysical advisor to diverse E&P teams within you company. Your duties will include: Defining the feasibility of gravity and/or magnet ic surveys (establishing if a given geological configuration is detect able using gravit y and/or magnetic measurements) Defining parameters for gravity data acquisition and processing Interpreting gravit y and/or magnetic dat a in order t o det ect and characterize causative bodies (basement and/or within the sedimentary section), and for establish next steps in explorat ion Interpreting Magneto-Telluric data to interpret Basement structural features Defining the feasibility of electrical surveys (establishing if a given geological configuration is detectable using convent ional electrical methods) Defining parameters for acquisition and processing of electrical data Interpreting electrical data in order to recommend future activities in either water formation disposal and /or CO2 sequestration, produced at fields present ly under explot at ion
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods

Seismic Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a306)
Description: Competency Statement: Select the most favorable seismic acquisition configuration for the area of interest . Select source and receiver array for proposed survey. Evaluat e trade-off between 2-D and 3-D acquisition for t he exploration objective. Learning Objective: Understand t he primary principles of seismic survey design. Ident ify the basic concepts and field operat ions involved in seismic data acquisition. Contrast differences between 2-D and 3-D acquisition. Describe key elements of marine vs. non-marine acquisition. Evaluat e horizontal and vert ical seismic resolution. Evaluat e practical considerations in survey design. Assignment Instruction: You are a junior member of the Geophysics E&P team for the Company Acme Inc. Your t eam is presently involved in t he seismic data acquisit ion process in Bass Basin, offshore Australia. You should be acquaint ed with the seismic dat a acquisition methods that are one of the key activities in Exploration and Production for obtaining the best possible images of the subsurface. Seismic prospecting is actually the most widespread tool for hydrocarbon exploration. Its power is based on the ability t o give you an image of the subsurface. This information can be used to describe structurally the area of study or obtain acoustic (somet imes elastic) response of the rocks and fluids contained on them. Seismic Acquisition represents more than 80% of the exploration financial investment, due to this fact a good survey design is crucial not only for the quality of t he image that should be obtained but also for st rong economical reasons. In this scenario you will make a simple 3D marine seismic survey design based on an initial geological descript ion and some basic seismic information. The main parameters t hat you need to estimate are (not necessarily in this order): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Areal extent of the survey Line length Migration aperture Line interval Group interval Shot Int erval Vertical and Horizont al resolution
In this case our target is at Bass basin, offshore Australia. Basin depositional models indicate that probable reservoir sands are now within the oil window, giving deep unexplored port ions of the Bass basin considerable petroleum potent ial. The survey objective is to illuminate all Paleocene formations trough the whole area wit h 48 fold coverage near structural traps. For this exercise t he complexities of shot interval estimation due to vessel speed and air-gun recovery are not taken into account. The Assignment Pages should be done sequentially as all answers could be used as input for subsequent questions. So, t ake notes of all your findings during the completion of t his exercise.

Geophysical Instrumentation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a307)
Description: Competency Statement: Evaluate the physical mechanics of source and receivers. Describe receivers and possible receiver configurations depending on noise. Review application of field test ing. Evaluate basic recording instrument types. Incorporate quality control during dat a collection. Learning Objective: Describe different types of seismic sources, receivers and their applications. Ident ify the most common t ypes of recording instruments. Ident ify the most common t ypes of restrictions that limit configurat ion of a seismic program. Describe different data formats for the acquisition process. Propose a work flow to monit or and maintain qualit y control over seismic acquisit ion procedures. Assignment Instruction: Subsurface seismic imaging is based on mechanical waves reflect ions in the Earth interior. The basic protocol involves wave generation and wave recording usually at surface level. In other words is like hitting the earth and wait and listen to the echo from beneath. This apparent ly simple experiment becomes quite complex if you realice that your t arget is several kilometers deep, so you need a strong and clean signal (emission and reception) t o enhance your subsurface image. The seismic information volume you will manage could easily exceed the terabyt e size. Also there are plenty of noise sources which will degrade the quality of your seismic data. The instrument s used to excite and record t he Earth mechanical response must be adequate to topographic and environmental condit ions in order t o be able to perform the seismic experiment in a particular terrain and also obtain the best possible signal/noise rat io. In this assignment you are working for the instrumentation department of a transnational geophysical services provider. You have been requested t o analyze an area for environmental, topographical and cultural considerations effecting a seismic surveying and propose t he best source receiver configuration according for that survey. Specifications and descriptions for available seismic equipment are located in Reference and Field Data. It is strongly suggest ed to read this mat erial before attempting this exercise and save the informatioon on your hard drive to keep it easily available.

Seismic Survey Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a338)
Description: Competency Statement: Describe enviormental fact ors that require modification to normal marine/non-marine seismic data acquisit ion. Include access, water depth, surface terrain, noise and obstruct ions. Indicate appropriate source, reciever or geometries considerations for each case. Learning Objective: List non-conventional seismic survey types and their application. List non-conventional source and reciever types and their application. List source and receiver limitations for a t ransit ion zone seismic survey. Describe possible shooting solutions for seismic acquistion in an exist ing field with obstruct ions. Describe exploration reasons for shear wave acquisition. Assignment Instruction: The design of a seismic survey is a complex task since it depends on several factors in addition to wave propagation, such as costs: logistics, safety regulat ions, environment and geographical settings. The design for a particular survey should take into consideration all Geological and Geophysical requirements as well as the survey environment. A successful seismic survey design not only generates a good seismic image of the subsurface but does so economically, safely, efficiently and in as environmentally friendly manner as possible. In this assignment you are a E&P team seismic acquisition geophysicist. Your resbonsibility is to make decisions regarding t he design of three seismic surveys. Project #1: A seismic survey in a t ransit ion zone. Project #2: A seismic survey in an area with obstructions Project #3: A shear wave survey in a marine environment In this assignment you are a E&P team seismic acquisition geophysicist. Your resbonsibility is to make decisions regarding t he design of three seismic surveys. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Decide which seismic source and receiver type is most appropriate for a specific area. Decide which operational technique is most suitable for specific areas of a transition zone survey. Make decisions when faced with operational limitations in a transition zone. Ident ify possible shooting solutions when obst acles are encountered. Decide between telemetry and distributed systems depending on environmental fact ors. Ident ify important aspects of shear wave acquisition.

Seismic Data Processing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a308)
Description: Competency Statement: Design the seismic processing sequence by select ing the appropriat e processing met hods. Perform the data processing and qualit y control, and work with the interpreter to make sure that the outcome truly reflects the geological characteristics of the area. Learning Objective: Describe the basic seismic processing sequence from pre-processing and deconvolution through stacking and velocit y analysis, t o migrat ion and post-processes. Understand t he application of different types of deconvolution, velocity analyses and migration techniques. Review processing steps in the context of t he objectives of the seismic interpretation. Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for t he Company Solut ions. Inc, you should be acquainted with t he seismic data processing methods that are one of the key activities in Exploration and Production for obtaining the best processing of subsurface images. Reflect ion Seismic Methods, as part of the seismic data processing process, are the tools of choice for hydrocarbon exploration because t hey can give an image of t he subsurface and its structural and (sometimes) stratigraphical features. Seismic data processing is the cornerst one for this image generation from the raw dat a recorded at seismic surveys. Different processes are applied to improve the qualit y of the image, not only for the purpose of interpretation but also for extract ing acoustic and elast ic information from seismic sections or volumes. This module will introduce you to the basic t heoretical concepts and its applications at different seismic processing stages. During this exercise you will process a 3D onshore seismic survey. The survey area is about 500Km2 with low st ructural complexity and one well has been drilled. The target is around 3 seconds two way travel time. The seismic source used was dynamit e. From previous 2D seismic informat ion, the main faulting system is extensional wit h some half-graben interpreted. Your task is t o go t hrough the QC (Quality Control) of a processing sequence applied t o seismic data.

Wellbore Seismic (IHRDC_IPIMS_a309)
Description: Competency Statement: Evaluate the applicability of wellbore seismic technology to a particular well. Determine the need for check shot survey, synthetic seismogram, vertical seismic profiling (VSP) and cross-well tomography. Use seismic sect ions, petrophysics and geological informat ion to determine the wellbore seismic program. Learning Objective: Ident ify the applicabilit y of a wellbore seismic program for t he exploration objective. Acquisition configurations for different wellbore seismic t echniques. Describe the acquisit ion and QC of t he check shot survey / VSP. Describe the generation and QC of a synt hetic seismogram from well logs and check shot data. Surface Seismic has become the tool of choice for reservoir delineation. However, t he generated image is always an offset-time image. In order to obtain an offset-depth image (which corresponds to a more accurat e subsurface picture) several t echniques have been developed. Synthetic seismograms, Check shots and VSP (Vertical Seismic Profile) surveys are some of t hese techniques. This assignment will introduce you in the basic steps in Synthetic Seismograms generation and its correlations with real seismic data. Also you will develop a VSP project where t he seismic-well calibration power of this technique is evidenced. You are assigned int o two different projects for t he Upstream Technology Group Inc. (UTC). Their descriptions are: 1.- Synthetic Seismogram Building and Seismic-Well Calibration: In an exploratory block a 3D seismic survey has been acquired. Only one well has been drilled (Well UTC-1X). This well has a total dept h of 6390 and GR, density and DT logs were run from 4000 to final depth. A T-Z table was obtained using a local check shot. 2.- Zero-Offset VSP survey acquisition, processing and interpretation: An offshore exploratory block has 3D pre-stack seismic data. A successful well has been drilled (Well UTC-1Y) and UTC wants to calibrat e the seismic and the well information in order to have a better pict ure of the prospecting horizons in their areal extent.

2-D Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a310)
Description: Competency Statement: Evaluate seismic sections to interpret chronostratigraphic units and structural elements. Use the t echniques of seismic int erpret at ion to pick horizons and faults over an interval of interest. Tie existing well informat ion to the seismic section using a synthetic seismogram. Combine the seismic int erpret at ion and well dat a to create a seismic time map. Learning Objective: Tie well information to the seismic section using the synt hetic seismogram or check shot survey. Ident ify major reflections in the seismic data set. Enumerate criteria for picking faults based on the regional struct ural style. Describe conformable and unconformable seismic reflection geometry. Describe the st eps to complete a seismic time map. Assignment Instruction: You work for an oil company who has intentions to bid for an offshore and practically unexplored area. The Host Government has provided your company wit h a data pack consisting of 160 Km of 2D seismic and two wells (see map below). As a member of the exploration team, your work is to use t his information for evaluating the hydrocarbon potential of t he area in order to decide whether to abandon further effort s or t o continue with the explorat ion, provided your company makes an at tractive proposal for the area and the Host Government accepts. Your contribution to this initiat ive is to provide t he seismic interpretation of the area, mapping st ructural and st ratigraphic features with exploration potent ial.After analysis you will propose further seismic surveys and/or reprocessing of existing seismic lines as needed. 2D seismic lines and wells distribution
Data Provided: Six 2D seismic lines Well A Info (TD=11940 ft), Sonic log, gamma ray log, density log, check shot survey Well B Info (TD=12585 ft) Map with seismic lines and wells locat ion The assignment should be done sequent ially as all answers could be used as input for subsequent questions. So, take notes of all your findings during the completion of this exercise.

3-D Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a339)
Description: Competency Statement: Interprete a 3-D seismic survey using seismic sections and time slices t o interpret horizons and faults. Display an understanding of the use of time slices, horizon slices and other 3-D techniques play in 3-D interpretation. Learning Objective: Ident ify common horizon auto-picker parameters and their effects. Enumerate criteria for picking faults on time slices. Describe various 3-D survey display options. Describe creation and uses of horizon slices. List paramet ers for amplitude extract ion of a 3-D horizon. Assignment Instruction: In a given deep water area (see map), there will be a bid round for exploration. Your company has interest in the area and consequently has assigned you to evaluate t he area and t o provide a specialist opinion for further investment. Only four wells have been drilled in t he basin, the results were: Well A: dry Well B: dry with gas shows Well C: oil discovery well Well D: oil and gas discovery well The first step in your assignment is to attend to a data room, where you will analyze a dataset composed by information gathered from the int erpret at ion of two 3D seismic volumes (see map), including struct ural maps, time slices, attributes maps/horizons. Aft er completion of t he data room activities you will: Use the information previously analyzed to present a structural and strat igraphic framework for t he area Recommend the use of cert ain techniques t o improve the knowledge of the basin Convey to your company management the meaning of seismic amplit udes and t he character of the seismic reflect ion data Use the available data to propose and support potential prospect s in the area; Give advice for decisions to be taken over the area, in terms of prospect ranking

Seismic Attributes and Direct Hydrocarbon Indicators (DHIs) (IHRDC_IPIMS_a340)
Description: Competency Statement: Evaluate seismic attribute sections to enhance conventional seismic int erpret at ion. Identify the seismic effects of a 'bright spot' anomaly and their physical cause. Describe t he Amplitude Vs. Offset (AVO) effect and the physics that govern the response. List the attributes of the Hilbert Transform and their mathmatical formulation. Learning Objective: List possible effects to seismic amplitude response on 'Bright Spot' prospect. Describe AVO response and its causes. Explain the limit at ions of AVO response. Review Hilbert transform at tributes. Describe work flow for evaluating attribute effectiveness. Assignment Instruction: Surface seismic has become the most import ant tool in hydrocarbon reservoir delineation. During t he last decades most of the effort was focused on structural imaging and hydraulic barriers descriptions. However due to the recent advances in computational hardware and new theoretical approaches to sediment at ion processes and wave phenomena, seismic att ribut es have t aken the leading edge as hydrocarbon indicators. AVO, Amplitude analysis, Frequency decomposition, Wave Attenuation and Elastic inversion are only a few important techniques which t ransform wave information into probabilistic paramet ers to hydrocarbon discovery. The following assignment will take you through an example of hydrocarbon indicators starting from t he QC of the seismic data t o the feasible presence of hydrocarbons using wave information. You are a member of a reservoir characterization team working on a gas prone area. Two exploratory wells have been drilled in t he area. The first well was located over a structural high and was proved successful. The second well was located down dip and no production was achieved from it. Both drilling plans and locations were devised using 2D conventional seismic. A new 3D seismic survey was acquired in order to have a better picture of the Gas-Water-Contact distribution and other possible accumulations in the block using seismic attributes as hydrocarbon indicat ors. The main target is the reservoir discovered by the first well at 4500 depth (2000ms TWT approx) and other two possible accumulations at 3500ms and 7000ms TWT in the area which have not been proven yet. In this project you need t o supervise a complete sequence of reservoir seismic attributes characterization from the seismic QC t o AVO charact erization and the identification of new opportunities.
EXPLORATION: Reservoir Description and Characterization

Petrophysical Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a313)
Description: Competency Statement: Determine rock and fluid propert ies using open hole logs, mud logs, cuttings and core data. Evaluate lit hology, mineralogy, fluid distribution, temperat ure and pressure gradients including rock quality. Learning Objective: Define key petrophysical properties and their significance. Describe the operating principles, capabilities, limitations and areas of application of commonly used open hole logging devices. Describe basic response and limitation of each log type. Validate log response using core and well cuttings. Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum is to drill a wildcat on a structure in the New Basin. As t he Operations Geologist you will have a significant influence on the data acquisition for this well including the open-hole logging program in consultation with t he Petrophysicist. Following agreement wit h those involved you will specify a data acquisition program (mud-logging and wireline logging). To ensure you are prepared for this assignment you will review the petrophysical principles that you have previously learnt on t raining courses. As it is not clear what lithology and pore fill may be encountered, you will review the log responses t o be expected for a variety of possibilities. The last part of t he assignment you will witness the logging job and carry out a quick look evaluation of the logs t o select WLFT pressure and sample points plus SWS depths. Based on the information gathered you will int erpret the fluid distribution in the well and establish the basic petrophysical parameters :- clay volume, porosity and water saturation.

Interpretation of Well Logs (IHRDC_IPIMS_a314)
Description: Competency Statement: Use electromagnetic, radioactive, acoustic and other logs t o infer stratigraphic and st ructural characteristics of subsurface formations. Determine basic propert ies of a potential reservior. Learning Objective: Describe common log responses for source, reservoir and seal units. Describe common log patterns and their facies equivalent. Apply basic log interpretation methods to determine porosity, permeability, fluid saturation and boundaries for reservoir description. Make a preliminary estimate of reserves using Well 1 and analog field parameters. Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a wildcat on the Gama structure in the New Basin. The well has reached TD and t here are indications of reservoir rock and hydrocarbons from mud logs, cuttings and side wall cores. The init ial logging run, t riple combo, indicates a high resistivit y zone. You will analyze the logs for reservoir and seal. As part of your evaluation of the reservoir you will determine: gross t hickness, net sand, net pay, porosity, permeability and water saturation. If possible you will use log charact er with other dat a to determine a lithofacies for the reservoir. Remember this evaluation will directly influence whether or not an additional well is drilled on t he structure. On the last Assignment Page you will be asked by the VP of Exploration t o use your analysis t o support or reject a delineation well.

Reservoir Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a315)
Description: Competency Statement: Generate a geological reservoir model. Define reservoir in terms of continuity, lithology, facies distribution, struct ural geomet ry and st yle. Using the petrophysical parameters developed from well log analysis, estimate the original oil and gas volume in place. Learning Objective: Establish geological reservoir model define, object ives and modeling tasks. Review reservoir archit ecture, reservoir properties and their dist ribut ion, and integrate for construction of a st at ic geological model. Integrate seismic horizons and facies int o the geological model. Estimate original hydrocarbons in place. Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a successful wildcat (Gama 1) and three delineation wells (Gama 2, Gama 3 and Gama 4) on the Gama structure in the New Basin. The discovery well found gas and oil in the so called Lower Graben Sand Formation, albeit with a ODT/WUT situation. Therefore t he 1st appraisal (delineation) well (Gama 2) was aimed at defining the OWC. All of t he wells have been logged and a whole core was taken of the reservoir in Well #3 (Gama 3). As the Exploration geologists you are aksed to develop a static reservoir model and determine the oil in place (STOIIP) for the Lower Graben Sand Reservoir. This requires you to interpret flow units in and between the wells and assess the reservoir properties across the structure. Regional knowledge indicates that the Lower Graben Sands can be sub-divided into 4 Flow Unit s each with (slightly) different properties. As reference, as type log, well (F2-2A) located some 8.6 km to the North-West can be used to sub-divide the objective sands in t he wells under investigat ion. Developing the static model requires insight into t he depositional environment and at present you only have information from a regional study. Therefore interpretation of the local, or prospect depositional environment needs t o be determined from logs t aken in the 1st well (Gama 1) and subsequently verified with core data from the Gama 3 well. Based on regional information the Lower Graben Sand in the field area is int erpret ed as a fluvial-deltaic to a tidal delt a depositional system, building out in a Northern direction. The top of the Lower Graben Sands is picked at the occurence of t he first (larger) sand beds below t he (marine) shales of the Middle Graben Shale package. These Lower Graben Sands have been subdivided elsewhere into four "Flow Units". These Units (1 to 4) are considered successive cycles of lower delta plain deposits, in which the reservoir sands were developed as: tidal distributary channel fills, tidal channel bars, channel margins and lagoonal backwash systems. Using the Depositional Environment as referenced, a judgement will be made with regards to the reservoir continuity of the individual permeable and non-permeable beds defining the flow units (i.e. t he individual beds controlling the direction of fluid flow t hrough the reservoir into the producing wells). Based on different relat ions in width/thickness and length/width rat ios, several cases with respect to sand body dimensions have been considered, but t he medium case is still considered the most reasonable in t he fluvio-deltaic/tidal dist ribut ary, and estuarine environment. In this scenario the width/thickness ratio is 100 and the length/widt h ratio is 5. Although in the process of subsurface modelling the definition of Flow Units is an essential step, for calculating t he STOIIP this information is only relevant when estimating the average reservoir properties as parameters to the calculat ion. As part of this Learning Plan the learner will need to review t he depth st ructure map for the prospect reservoir as derived from seismic, showing the overall st ructural configuration and the presence and distribution of the field faults. The structure is faulted, displays 4 way dip-closer, and appears to be filled to spill point . The crest of t he structure is found at a depth of some 3025 m and to the northwest of t he discovery well. The struct ure is broken up by two sets of normal faults which form a NW-SE trending 1.5 km wide crestal graben, believed to be of Triassic age. A younger NNE-SSW t rending set breaks up t he eastern and north-east ern flanks of t he field. The throw of the faults varies from 10 - 85 m. The fault s are partly sealing and may be contributing to some compartmentalization of the field. Wells 3 & 4 (Gama 3 & 4) were drilled on the same structure, penetrat ing what appears t o be the same hydrocarbon bearing

Reservoir Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a315)
reservoir and display similar contacts as far as can be concluded from the present data, but this needs to be verified using the available pressure iinformation. Wells 3 & 4 (Gama 3 & 4) were drilled on the same structure, penetrat ing what appears t o be the same hydrocarbon bearing reservoir and display similar contacts as far as can be concluded from the present data, but this needs to be verified using the available pressure iinformation.

Reservoir Geophysics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a334)
Description: Competency Statement: Analyze and int erpret seismic and geological information for the purpose of reservoir description. Convert seismic t ime horizons to depth, based on well and seismic velocit ies. Evaluate seismic facies and their depositional environment in order to produce analogs of their potential reservoirs. Learning Objective: Analyze seismic interpretation to determine best methodology for depth conversion. Present Pros and Cons of different depthing approaches. Select depositional model analog t hat best fits t he regional and seismic facies characteristics. Evaluat e seismic facies wit h reservoir properties det ermined from wells, to gain insight to reservoir property distribution. Assignment Instruction: As the lead Geophysicist for Beta Petroleum's explorat ion effort in the New Basin you have developed t ime structure maps for multiple horizons for Structure Gama. Now four wells have been drilled and the Geologists are preparing t o develop a reservoir model for evaluation of reserves. Your first concern is to develop a met hodology for t aking t he known reservoir to depth. The data available are two check shot surveys, two sonic logs and seismic velocities from the 2-D seismic survey of the area. An additional concern is the different oil/wat er contact in Well 3. Secondarily, you have noticed a seismic facies change in the reservoir in a north to south direction. Coordinate your seismic facies analysis with the Geologist t o det ermine a depositional environment and likely lithofacies. As part of this effort describe a methodology for evaluating seismic amplitudes in the reservoir interval.

Exploration Geostatistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a336)
Description: Competency Statement: Use st at istical methods to describe the charact eristics of the hydrocarbon-bearing system. Validate t he description by comparing data with reservoir analogs. Establish supporting t rends for predicting properties in bot h drilled and non-drilled areas. Characterize dependence among mult iple variables. Describe risk and uncert ainty using probabilist ic distributions. Learning Objective: Apply preliminary st at istical analysis methods to geological dat a. Apply conventional techniques to validate reservoir data and trend maps. Demonstrate an understanding of risk and uncertaint y in probablistic distributions. Build single model variograms for simple reservoir properties. Apply basic Krigging t echniques to generate representative reservoir parameter maps. Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a wildcat and three delineation wells on a st ructure in the New Basin. All of t he wells have been logged and a whole core was taken of the reservoir in Well 4. Petrophysical analysis has been completed for all wells and is available for use. You are to evaluate different statistical methods for distributing reservoir propert ies. In addition to petrophysical data a facies map based on the well information and seismic data is available. As part of this process variograms will be developed for each of the reservoir properties. Incorporate the range of data available: basin analog, out crop, whole core and well log analysis into construction of t he variograms. Remember t hat Well 3 is anomalous due to its thin reservoir sect ion and different oil/water contact.
EXPLORATION: Wellsite Geological Operations

Geological Operations and Logistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a318)
Description: Competency Statement: Determine the necessary resources for carrying out exploratory projects. Build a plan to address permitting, environmental and safet y considerations, location construction, contracts, evaluation and specialized services. Understand t he importance of the budgetary cycle and how it effect s operations. Learning Objective: Determine resources, steps and t imeline for exploratory well. Ident ify and address issues related to contracting for exploratory services: such as scope of work, technical evaluation, and input for commercial evaluation. Describe data collection program for exploratory well. Collect and evaluate requests for exploratory well data and evaluate impact on budget. Describe data collection program for delineation well. Assignment Instruction: As an Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory well in the New Basin. If this well is a discovery, appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the pot ential size of the discovery. You will be involved in all stages of the explorat ory program and report progress to management and the explorat ion team. Your first responsibility is to coordinate the drilling plan. This includes location confirmation, permitting, site preparation, coordination with drilling engineers, communicat ion with drilling contractor and coordination with contractors providing data collection services. Construction of a timeline for all activities will be crucial for successful completion of your function. Part of this role is a budget ary function with regard to overall cost and cost of individual expenditure areas. The Exploration Manager will look to you t o develop and t rack expendit ures. You need t o plan for cont ingencies and have alternat ives to the initial drilling and evaluation program t hat still conform to the overall objectives of the well.

Data Logging and Geological Information (IHRDC_IPIMS_a320)
Description: Competency Statement: Design programs for collecting subsurface rock and fluid samples. Design mud-logging and cuttings program. Evaluate and select coring program. Specify requirements for measuring formation pressures and temperatures. Determine the necessary studies to be carried out using these data. Learning Objective: Specify mud logging requirements including: collection intervals, sampling preparation, hydorcarbon indicators and lit hology reporting. Design a well-cut ting program including analysis; identify what uses these samples are used for. Describe order and inter-relationshiip of different well evaluation techniques. Design a coring program and specify procedures for sample collection, handling and analysis. Define fluid sampling requirements. Specify types of equipment to be used. Ident ify other data collection services that maybe needed for the successful evaluation. As Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory well in New Basin. If this Well 1 is a discovery appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the potential size of the discovery. You will be involved in all stages of t he exploratory program and report progress to management and t he exploration team. The Operations Geologist needs t o have a clear understanding of the objectives of t he well and subsequent evaluation program. Design a well logging program and other dat a collection programs for evaluation of t his intial wildcat well. Consider t he needs of Geologist , Geophysics and Engineer. The first well has indicated hydrocarbons and reservior based on mud log results. What changes to your intial data collect ion program will you propose? What will be t he order of these additional data? Planning has included additional funds for enhanced evaluation but requests for addit ional data outstrip available funds. Describe the prioritization of additional evaluation data.

Exploratory and Delineation Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_a319)
Description: Competency Statement: Monitor drilling programs for explorat ory and delineation wells. Discuss the drilling program and understand the required equipment and procedures for each stage of well operations. Evaluate logic for wildcat location and subsequent delineation wells. Learning Objective: Generat e a proposal and Statement of Requirements for an exploratory or delineation well, providing input for the well design, drilling program and evaluation. Describe the relationship bet ween formation evaluation requirements and t he various aspect s of well design and const ruction. Monitor and report on drilling operat ions to ensure clear communications. Discuss trade offs bet ween drilling 'High' or 'Off" struct ure for initial wildcat . Evaluat e location of delineation well, Well 2, based on results of a wildcat discovery and economic threshold. As Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory well in the New Basin. If this well, Well 1, is a discovery appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the potential size of the discovery. You will be involved in all st ages of the exploratory program and report progress to management and the exploration team. The Operations Geologist needs t o have a clear understanding of the objectives of t he well and subsequent economic evaluation program. Based on t he existing structure map and expected reservoir properties select a location that balances chance of discovery and understanding of the reservoir size. Five other structures have been identified in the New Basin. The first well, Well 1, has indicated hydrocarbons and reservoir based on well logs, samples and formation testing. An updated st ructure map and economic threshold have been developed with data from Well 1, select a second locat ion. This location should be selected t o define a commercial hydrocarbon accumulation. The second appraisal location, Well 2, has proven t o be a successful well. Logs indicate a thicker reservoir full to base. Where will t he third appraisal well be drilled to try to define a water contact?
EXPLORATION: Exploration Project Management

Exploration Project Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a322)
Description: Competency Statement: In t his Learning Module you will be introduced to t he project management stage-gate process with specific focus on the initial visualizat ion or exploration phase. Learning Objective: Upon complication of this module, the learner will be able to: Describe the five step stage-gate process. Determine the criteria necessary to move a prospect t hrough the process to drilling. Determine what data is necessary to provide a basic economic analysis of a prospect. Apply uncertaint y to determine stage-gate qualification. Assignment Instruction: As the team lead for your integrated exploration interpretation project you are responsible for the t echnical assessment quality of the project but also making sure the prospect meets commercial and company economic goals. Because of t he risks, the complexit ies and t he sheer magnit udes of the investments needed to develop an oilfield, your company has divided the analysis and decisions into discreet, sequential st ages using a disciplined project management process. In this lesson you will work t hrough the defined process. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 30 of 87

The Exploration Process (IHRDC_IPIMS_a323)
Description: Competency Statement: Examine the data t ypes and steps necessary to construct a vision of success statement thru to prospect generation and evaluation. Learning Objective: The objectives of this Learning Module are to introduce the learner to: Key steps of an exploration study. Understand t he roles science, engineering and commercial input play in the decision process. Integrate the concepts of risk and risk sensitivit y to the decision process. Assignment Instruction: The exploration process integrates several fields of knowledge. As the team lead in your exploration depart ment it is your responsibilit y to make sure all available data has been gathered, analyzed, and uncertainties have been identified for your management t eam. For this assignment you will be asked to review your prospect, determine what data has been integrated, and if uncertainties exist, explore what steps you might recommend to eliminate or reduce the uncertainty impact on your decisions. You will make a decision to participate in the play or not.

Value of Information (IHRDC_IPIMS_a326)
Description: Competency Statement: Analyze the value of the information that will be gained by applying various technologies to a high risk variable and then decide if it is worth the extra cost t o the project. Learning Objective: The objectives of this Learning Module are to: Measure the value of data vs. the cost on a project. Determine mult iple scenarios that can accomplish the business goals and their impact on t he prospects economics. Understand t he cost benefit decision process and uncertainty in making both science and business and decisions. Assignment Instruction: The exploration team has preliminary maps over the structures associated with our concessions. The maps are based on old vintage 2D data. Based on t he available data it appears the structure is present, however the team has assigned a high risk factor t o the struct ure due to its struct ural orient at ion. Management has pushed back on funding this new drill project unless you can convince them other wise. Your team will need t o det ermine the value of shoot ing a new seismic survey, its impact on the projects profit ability and if there are other data available that could convince management to commit the funds.

Prospect Economics and Uncertainty Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a327)
Description: Competency Statement: Evaluate the risk under uncertainty of an ident ified play area and apply business principles that will lead to assigning an economic value to the proposed concessions. Learning Objective: The learner will be able to: Charact erize a reservoir. Assess the impact of drilling hazards and wellbore design on prospect economics. Use field analogies to estimate range of risked recoverable reserves. Develop and exploratory drilling plan Create a drilling AFE Assignment Instruction: The exploration team has completed prospect generation for t he play area of interest and are now ready to evaluate the economics and request funding to invest in t he exploratory well. In t his assignment you will test t he sensitivity of t he exploration variables to underst and their impact on the value of the prospect, the design criteria for drilling, and t he impact of regulatory constraints on the exploratory drilling plan. You will then const ruct an AFE t o present t o decision review board t o request funding. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 33 of 87

Exploration Business Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a342)
Description: Competency Statement: Management is asking you for prospects that can be considered for drilling in the upcoming year. You will evaluate a prospect based on the findings of two different exploration teams. Learning Objective: The Learner will be able to: Build a business case for drilling an exploratory based on input data from your teams. Understand t he components and processes behind the process. Apply the process to make a decision t hat measures value against opportunity. Present the business case for the play identified by your explorat ion teams. Assignment Instruction: As the manager of exploration you have asked two independent technical teams to analyze the same area in the basin. They have each come up with a recommendation for the area that you will have to evaluate and decide which one you want to move to FID. In t his assignment you will review the input of known data, look at which team has minimized the uncertainty and the overall value of the prospect and make recommendations to your management decision review board. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 34 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Engineering Fundamentals

Reservoir Rock and Fluid Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_a1)
Description: Competency Statement: Define the properties of the reservoir rock/fluid system. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o define the following reservoir properties and understand t heir importance in the overall reservoir development scheme: Rock propert ies: porosity, permeability, fluid saturat ion, compressibility, anisotropy Fluid propert ies: phase behavior, PVT relationships, density, viscosity, compressibilit y, formation volume factor, gas-oil ratio Rock/fluid int eract ions: wettability, interfacial tension, capillary pressure, relative permeability read and understand wellsite descript ions of recovered core material, evaluate the core handling and preservation t echniques employed, and select sample int ervals for laboratory analysis generate a procedure for preparing and analyzing selected core samples, specifying the t ests to be run and the information to be obtained; describe the laborat ory techniques and perform the calculations used for determining rock properties design procedures for obt aining represent at ive surface and subsurface formation fluid samples describe procedures for generating PVT analyses of reservoir fluid samples, and interpret the resulting reports use published correlations to est imat e reservoir fluid properties Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will define the basic rock and fluid properties of a recently discovered reservoir in t he Republic of Sucre. You will be in charge of obtaining representative fluid samples and determining their Pressure-Volume-Temperature (PVT) characteristics. You will also design a coring and core analysis program for a new well, and use the results to define basic rock properties and rock-fluid interactions. The discovery well, Well 4E1-NE, tested at 1550 STB/D of 35 degree API oil [246 m3/D, 0.85 specific gravity], with a producing gas-oil ratio of 680 SCF/STB [121 m3/m3] and a wat er cut of about three percent. It is currently on an ext ended product ion test. The second well drilled in this field , Well 5C1-SW, tested all water and was subsequently suspended. Before your company acquired these drilling blocks, a medium-sized independent had run a series of seismic surveys in the area. Your company purchased these dat a, from which the Geology and Geophysics departments constructed a subsurface cont our map showing the approximate st ructure boundaries and the top of the Upper Sand. You are now part of the int erdisciplinary team charged wit h charact erizing t he reservoir and developing an optimal exploitation strat egy. Right now, you do not have much to work withjust the cont our map and the well data obtained so far. (You can access this material by clicking on t he References that accompany each assignment question.) What you will need to do at this point, then, is to use the available data to try to define some basic reservoir rock and fluid properties.

Rock Mechanics Fundamentals (IHRDC_IPIMS_a2)
Description: Competency Statement: Apply rock mechanics fundamentals t o discribe well, reservoir and production behavior. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o define the following rock mechanical properties under various conditions of confining pressure, describe how t hese properties influence wellbore stability, directional drilling considerat ions, well completion design and other aspects of reservoir development , and know how they are measured in the laboratory: Brinell hardness Tensile st rength Normal/shear stress relationships and failure mechanisms (Mohr circles) Youngs modulus Poissons ratio Compressive strength Shear st rength Assignment Instruction: Rock mechanics is a basic element of reservoir descript ion, well design and production optimization. Knowledge of rock mechanical properties is critical t o successful reservoir management. In this assignment, you will define rock mechanical propert ies based on an analysis of core samples from Well 2A5-NE. You will: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) select core samples for measuring rock mechanical properties estimate the overburden and pore pressuress at reservoir dept h det ermine rock mechanical properties under reservoir conditions calculate rock compressive strength, Young's Modulus and Poisson's rat io, Use a Mohr diagram to int erpret the reservoir's shear stress rate

Stability and Rock Deformation Models (IHRDC_IPIMS_a3)
Description: Competency Statement: Generate a stability and rock deformation model. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o identify the presence and orientation of fracture systems in the reservoir Assignment Instruction: To underst and formation stress response, we start by measuring the mechanical properties of representative core samples in the laboratory. This gives us information about the rock's strength and stability under a given set of conditions. We then apply this empirical knowledge to the formation by combining our core observations wit h such geologic informat ion as well logs, st ructure maps and regional outcrop studies. In this assignment, you will review core descriptions for evidence of natural fractures and other tectonic activity. You will then incorporate your observations with other dat a sources to determine the principal stress directions in the formation. Core analysis, including rock mechanical properties tests, have been done on selected samples from Well 2A5-NE. Early seismic measurement s and log data from offset wells indicate that the reservoir is bounded by normal faults on the east and west . Your object ive in reviewing this core information is t o (1) (2) determine t he formations principal stress directions, and find indications of tectonic activity.

Reservoir Drive Mechanisms (IHRDC_IPIMS_a4)
Description: Competency Statement: Identify and interpret production mechanisms to predict the behavior of oil, gas and gas condensate reservoirs. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o identify primary reservoir drive mechanisms (solution gas drive, water drive, gas cap drive) by observing production and pressure trends. estimate original hydrocarbons in place, using both volumetric and material balance methods, and develop a range of estimates for technical recovery factors and reserves. Assignment Instruction: The ultimate goal of reservoir management is to optimize economically the development and production of hydrocarbons. This requires answers to three questions: (1) (2) (3) How much hydrocarbon is there? How much of it is recoverable? How fast can it be recovered?
In other words, we need t o det ermine , respectively, the oil and gas in place, the reserves, and the production rate. Your job in this assignment scenario is to review the reservoir data t hat have been collected to t his point and estimate the original hydrocarbon in place using volumetric and mat erial balance met hods, qualitatively evaluat e the reservoir drive mechanisms, and estimate the reservoirs primary recovery factor

Multidisciplinary Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a6)
Description: Competency Statement: Contribute to the efforts of a multidisciplinary reservoir management team, based on a general knowledge of related disciplines. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o demonstrate a basic knowledge of disciplines outside of reservoir engineering (i.e., Geology, Sedimentology, Petrophysiscs, Geophysics, etc.), and establish a working relationship wit h specialist s from these disciplines. understand the role of different disciplines in the overall process of reservoir characterization and exploitation. Assignment Instruction: Much of our reservoir data comes from disciplines outside of reservoir engineering. The init ial struct ure map, for example, may be generated from seismic measurements and geological interpretation, wit h subsequent information coming from well logs, cores, production dat a and other sources. In this assignment, you will review the well and field dat a that have been gathered to date for t he Upper/Middle sands, so t hat you can have an idea of what tools are available for describing the subsurface environment. You will also look at how various E&P disciplines may fit into t he overall reservoir management task.
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Well Logging and Subsurface Mapping

Interdisciplinary Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a121)
Description: Competency Statement: Gat her, view, classify and validate the mult idisciplinary information required for conducting integrated reservoir studies. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o access PDVSA engineering and geoscience databases and identify information that is relevant to t he field under study. classify information according t o discipline and what reservoir parameters it helps to define. Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will establish general data acquisition requirement s for an integrated reservoir study of the Sucre field. You will consider both existing and potent ial data sources, and determine what information you need to start building a reservoir model. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine information needs, identify and access interdisciplinary data resources, and compile reservoir information based on the parameters to be defined. In this Learning Module assignment, the reservoir is in the early appraisal stage of its life. Its st at us at the time of t his assignment is as follows: A structure contour map has been generated from seismic data and int erpret at ions of regional geological dat a. Well 4E1-NE, t he discovery well, is currently on an extended production test. Well 5C1-SW tested all water, and was subsequent ly suspended. Drilling is in progress on Well 2A5-NE. A conventional coring program has been authorized, and should be getting underway soon. The reservoir management team is already at work compiling a database of reservoir information. Your job in t his assignment is t o provide some ideas of what t his database can contribute t o the task of reservoir management, and what information should be added to it.

Wireline Well Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_a122)
Description: Competency Statement: Select and apply the appropriate well logging tools for a part icular set of well conditions and reservoir st udy parameters. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o select the appropriate logging tool(s) for evaluating a given reservoir prameter, taking into account operating conditions and limit at ions. specify procedures, surface equipment , and auxiliary tools to be employed on a logging job. Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will select and apply t he appropriate tools for conducting open hole logging surveys at Well 2A5-NE, based on well conditions and formation evaluation objectives. By the time you complete this module, you should understand the basic operating principles of commonly used logging t ools and be able to determine t heir areas of applicat ion. Conductor casing has been set at Well 2A5-NE, and the surface hole is currently being drilled. Your tasks in t his assignment are t o review the surface logging program, and then to select t he appropriate tools for logging from Target Depth to the shoe of t he surface casing.

Well Log Quality Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a123)
Description: Competency Statement: Validate the quality of information supplied by the logging service company to ensure that t he data can be used in generating a pet rophysical reservoir model. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o monitor the quality control of logging procedures, including calibration, correct ion and choice of scales) Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will be in charge of well log quality control at Well 2A5-NE. By the time you complete this module, you should be able to define basic survey parameters, establish log scales, monitor tool responses, and confirm the validity of the data acquired from commonly used logging devices. You are approaching target depth on Well 2A5-NE, and you will shortly be calling out the service company crew to log the 8 1/2 inch hole interval. Your job in this assignment is to establish some general guidelines for conducting logging operations, review tool calibrat ions and monit or survey progress.

Well Log Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a124)
Description: Competency Statement: Determine reservoir rock properties using well log analysis. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o Use log analysis to identify reservoir rock propert ies (fluid sat uration, porosity, fluid contacts, permeabilit ies, bulk shale cont ent, net oil sand, fractures) Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will use basic well log interpretation techniques to identify potential pay zones, define basic reservoir properties and estimate t he hydrocarbons in place in terms of reservoir volume per unit area. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to apply log analysis met hods t o the task of generating a petrophysical reservoir model. The open hole formation evaluation program at Well 2A5-NE is in progress, and field copies of t he lithology, resistivity and porosity logs are now available. Your job in this assignment is t o review these logs and make an initial evaluat ion of the well's hydrocarbon pot ential. Your evaluation is an import ant first step in deciding whether to complete the well, so be sure to carefully examine the log data.

Subsurface Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_a125)
Description: Competency Statement: Develop geological, pet rophysical and sedimentological maps for use in generating a reservoir model. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o generate geologic cross sections from well logs. draw subsurface contours and construct geologic and geophysical maps. Assignment Instruction: The original st ructure contour map for the Upper/Middle Sand reservoir was derived from seismic data acquired from an independent operator. Since then, three wells have been drilled, and the seismic data have undergone reprocessing and extensive additional int erpret at ion. As a result, you now have a new base map, which shows the locat ions of t he new wells and depth markers to the top of the Upper Sand. In this assignment, you will revise the Upper Sand st ructure map t o reflect these new data (be careful--t he updated map may or may not be similar t o the original map!) To complete t he assignment, you will consider several additional formation parameters that may be conducive to subsurface cont our mapping, and consider how they could be used to describe this reservoir.

Reserves Definitions, Reporting and Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_a126)
Description: Competency Statement: Elaborate and update from the maps generat ed during the modeling of the reservoir, the maps required by the Ministry of Energy and Mines in offical format, for the administration and control of the reserves. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o access the applications used to generate MEM maps in official formatt generate a map using the applciations. Assignment Instruction: The Ministry of Natural Resources is a depart ment of t he Nat ional Executive of the Republic of Sucre. Its responsibilities include establishing norms and regulations for business operations in the hydrocarbon sector, in accordance with laws est ablished by the National Legislat ure. The Ministry's organization and objectives are basically the same as t hose of t he Ministry of Energy and Mines (MEM) in t he neighboring Republic of Venezuela, and the norms t hat it has established for oil and gas operations are identical to MEM st andards. For this reason, the questions that you are asked in this assignment use MEM standards as primary reference sources. In this Assignment, you will review the present status of the Upper/Middle sand reservoir, determine what reports you need to submit to the Ministry, and decide how t o classify well locations and estimated hydrocarbon reserves in keeping with established norms. You will also ensure that t he symbols and conventions used in t he official maps t hat are submit ted with t hese reports are consist ent with Ministry standards. By the time you complete t he Assignment, you should be able to comply with MEM standards for report ing reserves and generating subsurface maps using accepted symbols, conventions and nomenclature. The current status of the Upper/Middle sand reservoir is as follows: Well 4E1-NE, t he discovery well, is on an extended production test. Permanent completion is pending. Well 5C1-SW was suspended after well logs and a formation test indicated that it exposed the Upper Sand below the water-oil cont act. Well 2A5-NE has been drilled and t ested, and a successful open hole format ion test has been carried out.
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Characterization and Modeling

Compaction and Subsidence (IHRDC_IPIMS_a127)
Description: Competency Statement: Analyze, calculate and validate compaction, subsidence and settling parameters t o predict their influence on the behavior of the project and their impact on recovery, using t he results of this analysis to optimize exploitation projects. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o measure compact ion, subsidence paramet ers. determine the significanc of these parrmeters with re determining drive mechanisms, etc. Assignment Instruction: A sedimentary formation is the product of rock part icle deposition, an ongoing process in which an underlying layer of particles is buried and forced downward by succeeding layers. As deposition and burial proceed, the underlying layer is subjected to a progressively increasing overburden pressure. This increased overburden results in compact ion--a reduction in t he thickness and bulk volume of t he underlying layer. Compaction also t akes place when fluids are withdrawn from a subsurface format ion. Fluid withdrawal causes a decrease in pore pressure, which in turn increases the grain-t o-grain, or mat rix pressure of the rock particles and causes t hem to compact. The amount of compaction that occurs in a given formation depends only upon the difference between t he vertically applied overburden pressure and the fluid, or pore pressure. Thus, the uniaxial compaction of a rock sample of thickness h can be expressed as DVb / Vb = Dh/h Depending on geological condit ions, subsurface compaction may be associated wit h varying degrees of subsidence, or sinking of the ground at the surface. Compaction and its associated effect of surface subsidence can, in cert ain situat ions, have significant effects on reservoir management st rategies and field operations. In this Assignment, you will build your general understanding of these phenomena and see how they can influence reservoir engineering decisions. You will also look at a system that has been developed by PDVSA to describe and predict compaction and subsidence in areas where they are of particular concern. By the time you complete this assignment, you should be able t o identify situations where compaction and subsidence may be important considerations in a reservoir management strategy, and you should be able t o begin using computer-based tools for predicting compaction and subsidence under various conditions.

Pressure/Production Data Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a128)
Description: Competency Statement: Analyze and int erpret pressure and production data for incorporat ion into the reservoir model. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to review and acquire well test information validate pressure test information prepare well test data for analysis diagnose and interpret the pressure t est design and interpret production records; analyze production behavior Assignment Instruction: Well 4E1-NE is the first well drilled in the Upper/Middle Sand reservoir. The well was complet ed with 7-inch casing, selectively perforated and placed on an extended production test. Testing was conducted in several stages. The first st age, which is the subject of t his assignment, involved t esting 16 feet of interval in the upper portion of the identified pay intervals. This test was designed to gather information on reservoir flow charact eristics, and in particular, to determine the nature of a nearby fault that had been identified on the struct ure map. Your job in this assignment is to review the dat a from t his initial test and evaluate the reservoir permeability, near-wellbore effects and boundary effects. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 52 of 87

Flow Unit Determination (IHRDC_IPIMS_a129)
Description: Competency Statement: Establish flow units wit hin the reservoir. Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the participant should be able t o Establish the areal and vertical dist ribut ion of zones with similar behavior in agreement with the reservoir model. Ident ify and delineate the rock volumes with sedimentological, petrophysical and reservoir properties that enable hydraulic communication. Assignment Instruction: Most reservoirs are not homogeneous. Rather, they exhibit complex variations in continuity, thickness patterns and other properties, including porosity, permeability and capillary pressure. A reservoir is typically subdivided into zones or areas based upon differences in rock properties. The complexity of reservoir rock imposes a challenge to geoscientist s and engineers in applying available technologies and their experience to improving oil and gas recovery. The purpose of geological mapping is to ident ify flow units t hat contain oil and gas, and once t hey are found, to apply geologic evidence and concepts t oward achieving t he most efficient development and production of these prospects. However, it is important to remember that t hese geologic maps are never finished. When new wells are drilled or old wells are re-examined, new information becomes available, and t he extent and geometry of flow units must be updat ed. Original maps may be based upon a few scatt ered control points. This means that in the early stages of geological work, a careful st udy of the local area should be made. Lithofacies maps are quite helpful in defining various reservoir rock types. The correlat ion of a number of reservoir properties, including porosit y and permeability, becomes much more meaningful when applied to a specific rock type. During the production phase of a reservoir, more informat ion about flow units is obtained by t ransient well testing and careful monitoring of individual well performance. Reservoir pressure maps are particularly useful for evaluating reservoir continuity. The areal distribution of reservoir pressure in different zones as a function of t ime can help us t o identify pay discontinuities and flow barriers. Vert ical pressure profiles are also useful in defining the effect of vertical permeability within a given reservoir section. History matching of field performance, using a numerical reservoir simulator, can provide great insight into the cont inuity of flow units and reservoir properties in inter-well areas where there is no measurements. In t his process, t he geological properties such porosity, permeabilit y and pay continuity are changed in order to match the observed field performance. Different steps in gathering data for flow unit determination are: In the geological phase: General reservoir configurat ion Fluids distribution Continuit y and thickness Rock t ype, porosity and permeability cutoffs Fluid contacts Vertical stratificat ion During the production phase: Logging Well performance Well testing Relative permeabilit y, capillary pressure and wettabilit y test s Inter-well tracers In this assignment, you will be taking a short break from your work in the Sucre field, while the geologists on t he reservoir management t eam prepare an analysis of some of the information t hat has been gathered so far from the upper/middle sands. During this time you will work on identifying the flow units within another reservoir where your company is actively involved in the Nuri formation.

Reservoir Simulation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a130)
Description: Competency Statement: Apply analytical and numerical simulation techniques t o the development, testing and refining of a reservoir model, and the generation of an opt imal reservoir exploit at ion plan. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to define reservoir simulation objectives define simulator geometry and dimensions, and assign flow equations t o the proposed model define simulator grid and boundary conditions compile reservoir model input parameters develop finit e-difference approximations to solve t he flow equations plan numerical simulat ion comput er runs and interpret the result s use simulat ion results to determine the optimum exploit at ion scheme Assignment Instruction: A typical reservoir simulation st udy is conduct ed in four stages: 1. 2. 3. 4. Gather all relevant reservoir data. Init ialize t he developed model. Validate the model using a history matching process. Forecast the reservoir's future behavior.
Once t he structure, thickness, porosity and permeability maps are obt ained, t he data need t o be discretized according to the gridding system used. Fluid properties are entered into the model either using a dat a table or in the form of a correlation. For multi-phase flow problems, relative permeability relationships and capillary pressure curves also need to be obt ained. Models are typically initialized with respect to t he water/oil or gas/oil contact depths and a reference datum-level pressure value. For the initialization, the simulator is run unt il the hydrostatic equilibrium of the existing phases is established. Validation of the model requires a detailed production history of all wells in the reservoir. The production data should contain information about open int ervals, well stimulations and product ion rate of each phase (oil, gas, water). Aft er the model is history matched against the existing production data, it can be used to predict future reservoir behavior for different development scenarios. Keep in mind that these predict ions are only as good as the basic input that was ent ered int o the model. Your assignment here is to gat her all the iso-surface maps and fit a body-centered grid on top of the reservoir structure. You also need t o collect all the PVT data that will be used during the simulation.
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Surveillance

Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a161)
Description: Competency Statement: Acquire and analyze the necessary data for optimizing reservoir surveillance. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to acquire and analyze pressure data, PVT reports, production records, injection records, production t ests, fluid sampling, injectivity tests, and other information for the purpose of monitoring reservoir behavior. Assignment Instruction: Reservoir surveillance is a process of identifying, gathering and interpreting the information needed t o effectively manage the reservoir and maximize economic hydrocarbon recovery. This process become more and more crit ical as a field passes t hrough the various phases of primary, secondary and enhanced recovery. In this assignment, you will plan a data acquisition program for the Upper/Middle Sands that includes t he following element s: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Present and future object ives Data requirements Data sources Acquisition methods Interpretation of collect ed dat a
By the time you complete this assignment, you should be able t o acquire and analyze pressure data, PVT reports, production records, injection records, production tests, fluid sampling, injectivity tests, and other information for the purpose of monitoring reservoir behavior. The explorat ion/appraisal program for this reservoir is currently in its third year. So far, four wells have been drilled: 4E1-NE, 5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE and 5A1-SW.

Geologic/Seismic Integration (IHRDC_IPIMS_a162)
Description: Competency Statement: Integrate multidimensional seismic information and geological data to optimize the processes of reservoir monitoring and exploitation. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to establish a basis for integrating geophysical and geological data and incorporating them int o the reservoir surveillance program. Assignment Instruction: Reservoir surveillance is a process of gathering and analyzing the information necessary to cont rol operations and maximize the economic recovery of hydrocarbons. Geologists and geophysicist s play a key role in this process, from early explorat ion and appraisal to the mature stages of production. In this assignment, you will consider how various geological and geophysical tools can be used for reservoir monitoring, and determine their applicabilit y to the surveillance program for the Upper/Middle Sands. By the time you complete this assignment, you should be able t o establish a basis for integrating geophysical and geological data and incorporating them into t he reservoir surveillance program. The explorat ion/appraisal program for this reservoir is currently in its third year. So far, four wells have been drilled: 4E1-NE, 5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE and 5A1-SW.

Geological Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a163)
Description: Competency Statement: Update the geological model of the reservoir. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to apply informat ion from newly acquired well logs, core samples and other data sources to refine t he geological model of the reservoir, including its structure, stratigrapy, dimensions and boundaries. Assignment Instruction: The geological model is a basic element of any reservoir description. It characterizes such parameters as reservoir structure, stratigraphy and dimensions based on logs, core analyses and other dat a. These parameters are essential to estimating hydrocarbon-in-place and reserves potential. In this assignment, you will review available information from the Upper/Middle Sands and compare it with the present geological model. You will then revise t he geological model as necessary. Based on your interpretations, you will develop important insight s int o the reservoir cont inuity and depositional environment, and establish or confirm the reservoir limit s. By the time you complete this module, you should be able t o apply information from well logs, core samples and other data sources to refine the geological model of t he reservoir, including its st ructure, st ratigrapy, dimensions and boundaries. The explorat ion/appraisal program for the Upper/Middle Sands has been completed, and the reservoir is currently entering its first development year. Wells drilled and evaluated to date are 4E1-NE, 5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.

Petrophysical Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a164)
Description: Competency Statement: Update the petrophysical model of t he reservoir. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to use well logs, cores, correlations and other tools to establish the distribution of petrophysical properties in the reservoir. Assignment Instruction: Reservoir quality is det ermined primarily by the distribution of petrophysical properties such as porosity and permeability, pore size distribution and pore geometry, and the presence of pore-filling mat erials that may have an effect on productivity or hydrocarbon recovery efficiency. Other important factors, such as relative permeability and capillary pressure relat ionships, are related to rock wettability and capillary pressure effects. Thus, in order t o fully describe reservoir quality, it is necessary t o have a knowledge of the composition and charact eristics of the reservoir fluids, as swell as the rock pore syst em. In this assignment, you will determine reservoir properties for input int o the Upper/Middle Sands petrophysical model. By the t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to use well logs, cores, correlat ions and other tools t o establish the distribution of petorphysical propert ies in the reservoir. The explorat ion/appraisal program for the Upper/Middle Sands has been completed, and the reservoir is currently entering its first development year. Wells drilled and evaluated to date are 4E1-NE, 5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.

Reservoir Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a165)
Description: Competency Statement: Update the reservoir model. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Incorporate new production data (selective & different ial) into the reservoir model, along with new information from well/core analyses. Refine the reservoir model based on differences between predicted and actual pressure and product ion data. Assignment Instruction: A preliminary reservoir model of the Upper/Middle Sands was generat ed during the exploration/appraisal period. In this assignment , you will review the most current available data and history-match the reservoirs actual performance with that predicted by the original model. Based on the results of the hist ory mat ch, you may choose t o modify one or more of the following paramet ers: Data summary Grid data Thickness data Porosity dat a Permeability data Saturation dat a Wit h this updated reservoir model, you can t est different exploitation scenarios t o det ermine which one results in the optimal economic recovery. The field is presently under development, during which time it has been placed on limited production. Active wells include 4E1-NE, 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Development Strategies

Economic Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a201)
Description: Competency Statement: Use economic evaluation methods to select the most profitable project and/or exploitation strategy, and formulate a project budget. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to apply economic evaluat ion techniques t hat are necessary for analyzing proposed long-range exploitation st rategies and/or projects in the areas of reservoir, drilling and production. Assignment Instruction: Based on reservoir model and well performance predict ions that were generated during the exploration/appraisal period, the reservoir management team is current ly looking at 3 potential development scenarios for t he primary recovery stage:
Case 1a
Case 2a
Case 3a
MDR (Maximum Design Rate)
7500 STB/D [1193 m3/D]
15000 STB/D [2385 m3/D]
22500 STB/D [3578 m3/D]
Exploration/appraisal wells to be completed
Addit ional wells to be drilled and completed
11
Total number of wells
10
15
The simulator runs used to generate these cases were based on the following assumptions:
Volumetric (closed pressure boundary) reservoir. Production begins in the first production year at the MDR, even though the reservoir actually produced at low rates under test conditions during t he exploration/appraisal stage. Average init ial production per well = 1500 STB/D [apx. 240 m3/D]under t he assumed reservoir parameters, this appears to be the maximum natural flow rate that is sustainable for a significant time period. In this assignment, you will compile the available informat ion and generate net discounted cash flow predictions for each of t hese cases. You will then evaluate each case in terms of its primary economic indicators, taking into account the sensitivity of t he evaluation t o uncert ainties in t he input parameters. NOTE: An MS Excel spreadsheet, Proj_Template, has been included as a reference for this assignment . You may use this spreadsheet to enter input paramet ers and run economics for each Case. If you do so, be sure to save each case as a separat e file, because you will be referring back t o it as you progress t hrough the assignment .

Permitting for Well Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a202)
Description: Competency Statement: Prepare the required permission requests for drilling, workover/recompletion, st imulation, abandonment and well servicing operations to satisfy t he established legal requirements of governmental regulat ory organizations. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to follow proper procedures for obtaining permission to conduct drilling, workover/recompletion, stimulations, abandonment proposals and well servicing operations, in accordance t he established legal requirements of the MEM, MARNR and other official organizat ions. Assignment Instruction: The Ministry of Natural Resources is a depart ment of t he Nat ional Executive of the Republic of Sucre. Its responsibilities include establishing norms and regulations for business operations in the hydrocarbon sector, in accordance with laws est ablished by the National Legislat ure. As is t rue for similar regulatory agencies in other count ries, the Ministry of Natural Resources oversees the permitting of oil and gas operations, including t hose that pertain to well drilling, complet ion workover and abandonment. The Ministry's permitting requirements are basically the same as t hose of t he Ministry of Energy and Mines (MEM) in t he neighboring Republic of Venezuela, and the norms t hat it has established for oil and gas operations are identical to MEM st andards. For this reason, the questions that you are asked in this assignment use MEM standards as primary reference sources. In this learning module assignment, you will apply the permitting requirements of the Ministry in the following areas: Drilling of a new well Workover and abandonment operations Project management as it relates to improved recovery operations, well spacing critieria and gas utilization requirements.
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Reservoir Development Strategies

Health, Safety and Environment (IHRDC_IPIMS_a203)
Description: Competency Statement: Apply the laws, regulations and norms relating to personal, environmental and industrial safety as t hey apply t o oil and gas operat ions. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to apply t he laws, regulations and norms in matters of personal, industrial and environmental safety, with t he objective of protecting the int egrit y of persons, installations, equipment and the environment. identify instances in which safe practices are not being followed, and take steps to correct the situation Assignment Instruction: The reservoir is currently in its development and early production stages. Drilling, construct ion and production activities are fully underway. In each of these activities, it is imperative to maintain safe operations, protect the health and well-being of personnel, and preserve t he environment. In this module assignment, you will be observing drilling rig operations with an eye toward your own personal safet y and that of others at the wellsit e. You will review incident descriptions from various field locations and try to determine what went wrong in each case and how the incident could have been prevented. And you will look at several issues related to fire prot ection at an upstream production facility.

Reservoir Management and Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a204)
Description: Competency Statement: Opt imize reservoir management and control decisions using surveillance techniques, information systems, t echnical indicat ors and financial guidelines. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to do the following: Manage available resources (e.g., reserves, asset s, personnel, budget) in order to maximize hydrocarbon reserves and minimize recovery cost . Make appropriat e reservoir management and control decisions with the aid of surveillance techniques, information systems and technology applications to generate pressure and production histories, maps and other key reservoir data. Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle Sands have been on production for about 11 months. Fifteen wells are currently active, and the information that you have available includes both detailed and summary reports of pressure and production behavior. In this assignment, you will use this informat ion to refine t he reservoir description, improve well performance and work t oward developing an optimal exploitation strategy. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 63 of 87

Improved Recovery (IHRDC_IPIMS_a205)
Description: Competency Statement: Evaluate the improved recovery potential of the reservoir. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Apply basic screening crit eria and determine a reservoirs suitability for various improved recovery processes, including waterflooding and enhanced oil recovery. Observe waterflood performance and perform basic recovery calculations, based on a front al advance model and analysis of fractional flow curves. Determine the displacement efficiency of a pilot waterflood. Assignment Instruction: Improved recovery, in the context of t his assignment, refers to processes that supplement natural reservoir drive mechanisms. These processes are generally grouped into t wo main categories: secondary recovery, which includes waterflooding and immiscible gas injection enhanced oil recovery (EOR), which includes miscible, chemical and thermal methods. Although individual processes vary widely in type and applicability to particular conditions, they have one objective in common: t o improve the displacement efficiency of hydrocarbons from the reservoir. In this assignment, you will review the performance of the Upper/Middle Sands under primary depletion and conduct a preliminary waterflood screening, including a pilot flood t o serve as a field t rial of the process. The reservoir has been on production for just over one year. There are currently 15 active wells.
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Management Practices

Implementation of Reservoir Development Strategies (IHRDC_IPIMS_a206)
Description: Competency Statement: Develop a st rategic scenario and budget for implementing a reservoir development scheme and producing actual reserves. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Use reservoir studies t o develop a resource base (drilling plans, future improved recovery, information acquisition, applicat ion of new technologies, facilit ies and infrastruct ure). Evaluat e reservoir exploitation schemes through t he use of corporate management indicators Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle sands project is about to complet e it s ninth year (fourth production year). You have recently concluded a twenty-month pilot waterflood in the fault block occupied by Wells 4E2-SE and 4D2-SW. In this assignment, you will evaluate the results of this pilot project in preparation for implementing a field-wide waterflood. You will t hen address the practical aspects of implement ing the full-scale project, generate a development scenario based on the data that you have gathered during the primary production stage, and formulate a project budget . Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 65 of 87

Reservoir Surveillance and Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a208)
Description: Competency Statement: Understand and apply reservoir surveillance and cont rol techniques t o confirm the materialization of t he proposed strat egies in the reservoir exploitation scheme Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to compare actual reservoir behavior to various performance predict ion tools and account for differences evaluate the effectiveness of the exploitation st rategy explain reasons why actual reservoir performance deviated from initial predictions Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle Sands have been on production for more than 20 years, 15 of t hem under waterflood. On the basis of daily average product ion, this reservoir has already passed its economic limit, with water cuts routinely exceeding 90 percent. But t hanks to the efforts of field personnel in applying good product ion practices and bringing operating cost s down t o a minimum, the field is still making a small profit. It remains to be seen whether this field has additional potent ial through a realignment of t he waterflood or implementation of enhanced oil recovery methods.

Contracts (IHRDC_IPIMS_a209)
Description: Competency Statement: Analyze scenarios, make suitable contract models and st udy special projects in areas of the exploitation macro process, assuring business profit ability and respecting t he prevailing laws and norms of contract s. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to analyze field projects and generate contract models evaluate contracts in terms of project profitability Assignment Instruction: As a reservoir manager, you are certain to spend much of your time dealing with companies that provide products, mat erials or services ranging from downhole t ools to simulation software to engineering expertise. You may also work with research institutions, government agencies, other operating companies, and even wit h private individuals. All of t hese working relationships are governed by legal agreements, or contracts. A contract defines t he right s that each party has in a business relationship, the obligations that each party has t oward the other, and the legal, fiscal and operat ing terms under which these rights and obligations are maintained. When properly drafted and negotiat ed in good fait h, a contract works to the mutual benefit and protection of both parties. It is important, t herefore, that you understand and be able to apply key contract provisions. In this Learning Module, you will focus on two types of contracts: a term sheet for a Turnkey Drilling Contract wit h Daywork Provisions, pat terned after the International Association of Drilling Contractors model (IADC--1998), and a Master Agreement for Contract Services, patterned after models developed by the IADC and the International Association of Geophysical Contract ors (IAGC).
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling and Well Completion Practices

Initial Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_a241)
Description: Competency Statement: Define basic drilling and well completion requirements based on reservoir management objectives. Ident ify critical logistical issues and HSE considerations. Generate budget cost estimate. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Review an init ial well proposal and identify key drilling and complet ion object ives. Gather and evaluate offset data and other information pertinent t o the well objectives. Document and evaluate indicators of potential drilling hazards and/or HSE risks. Ident ify appropriate methods for predicting pore pressures, fract ure pressures, and subsurface temperat ures, and plot predicted pressures and temperatures versus depth. Determine format ion fluids to be encountered and potential contaminant s. Out line critical issues relating to surface locat ion, including those related to logistics, safety and environmental protection. Generat e a budget-level estimate of dry-hole and total well costs. Assignment Instruction: The Asset Management Team responsible for PETROS Corporations portion of the Tremont onshore field has recently completed an appraisal of the 6th Zone reservoir, and is now preparing a development program. The team has given you a proposed bottomhole location for the first development well, Adams 8. The target location is in Block D-4, approximately 0.5 km [1640 ft] from the propert y boundary bet ween PETROS Corporation and Apex Oil & Gas Company. The discovery well for the 6th Zone anticline was Apex's Copley 1. Four additional wells (Copley 3, Adams 4, Adams 6 and Adams 7) have either tested or are currently producing commercial quantities of oil; Three others (Copley 2, Stuart 1 and Adams 5) were drilled outside of the structure boundaries and subsequently abandoned. Your tasks in this assignment are to establish the drilling objectives for this well in keeping with the overall reservoir management strategy, and to ident ify some of the key issues t o be addressed in the well planning process. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 68 of 87

Well Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a242)
Description: Competency Statement: Define basic well design parameters, including well profile, casing points and casing/hole diameters. Design casing strings and outline cementing requirements. Select surface equipment components. Generate preliminary cost estimates for inclusion in AFE. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Select a surface locat ion for a new well and establish an optimal target radius Pick casing points and specify casing and hole diameters for each drilled sect ion Establish a well trajectory in keeping wit h overall drilling object ives Select casing weights, grades and connect ions based on consideration of maximum load conditions Determine general requirements for primary cementing operations. Specify wellhead equipment component s and their working pressure rat ings. Assignment Instruction: An initial review of t he Adams 8 well proposal served to clarify the drilling objectives, identify critical well planning issues and provide some knowledge of the surface and subsurface environments. It is now time to start t he designing t he well. The starting point will be to finalize the surface and bottomhole locations so that you can est ablish a well profile. At t he same time, you will pick your casing points, decide on the casing and hole diamet ers for each int erval and recommend t he working pressure ratings for the wellhead components. You will then specify the weight s, grades and connections to be used for each casing string, and outline the primary cementing requirements for the surface casing. Finally, you will provide a cost estimate to be used in preparing t he AFE for this well. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 69 of 87

Drilling Program Planning and Implementation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a243)
Description: Competency Statement: Design mud program for each hole section. Establish well control precautions and procedures. Design drill string and bot tomhole assembly. Plan bit and hydraulics programs. Evaluate rig specificat ions and capabilities. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to: Out line mud system specifications for individual hole sect ions based on well conditions and drilling objectives. Establish basic well control requirements. Specify circulating system requirements and evaluate hydraulics practices based on offset well performance. Review offset bit performance as a basis for developing bit selection criteria for a new well. Provide general recommendations for the drill string configuration and design of the bottomhole assembly. Review rig specifications and capabilities in the context of drilling program requirements. Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will address various aspects of planning and carrying out the drilling program for Adams 8, a new development well in the Tremont field. Your work will include designing the mud and hydraulics programs, reviewing basic well control precautions, establishing guidelines for bit selection, and designing the drill string. Although you will not be directly involved in reviewing bids and selecting the drilling contractor, you will be providing input regarding power requirements, hoisting capabilities and circulating system capacities that will be valuable in the rig selection process. Your goal in this assignment is to develop a program t hat ensures safe well operations, minimizes drilling cost and meet s the design requirements of the well. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 70 of 87

Drilling Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a244)
Description: Competency Statement: Monitor drilling parameters and well progress. Take steps t o opt imize bit runs, mud system performance and directional control. Ensure HSE compliance. Ant icipate drilling problems and work to minimize their impact. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to: Optimize drilling performance through careful monit oring and analysis of well paramet ers. Select bottomhole assembly configurations for various hole intervals and operating conditions. Oversee routine cementing operations in shallow hole intervals. Diagnose a stuck pipe incident and out line fishing procedures. Monitor drilling paramet ers for indications of abnormal pore pressure and take t he approriate initial actions in response t o a potent ial kick situation. Assignment Instruction: The drilling crew is ready to spud Adams 8, and you are in charge of day-t o-day operations. To begin this assignment, you will approve t he bottomhole assembly configuration for the surface hole interval and supervise the running and cementing of a 13 3/8 inch [339.7 mm] casing string. Next, you will monitor the progress of the intermediate hole section and t ake steps t o opt imize drilling performance. Finally, you will begin drilling below the intermediate casing, paying particular att ention to detecting a pressure transition zone that has already been ident ified at other 6t h Zone wells. By way of caution, note that drilling operat ions do not always proceed smoothly. Although this assignment is fairly straightforward, be prepared t o address problems that may occur. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 71 of 87

Well Completion Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a245)
Description: Competency Statement: Prepare well for format ion evaluation. Ensure that logging and test ing operations proceed smoot hly. Run and cement production casing. Evaluate primary cement job and need for remedial cementing operations. Prepare well for final completion. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to: Prepare the well for open-hole logging operations and take steps to ensure that such operations proceed smoothly. Alert t he wellsite geologist and service company logging engineer of hole conditions that may require modifications or special precautions in the logging program. Assist in planning and carrying out a drill stem test . Determine safe operating parameters for running a production casing string. Plan and carry out a simple single-stage primary cementing operat ion. Use temperature surveys to determine the top of cement in the casing/hole annulus. Out line the steps involved in preparing the well for final completion and releasing the drilling rig. Assignment Instruction: As you approach target depth at Adams 8, your concern now shifts from opt imizing the drilling process t o preparing t he well for logging, t esting and completion operat ions. Alt hough you are not directly involved in planning the formation evaluation program, you are responsible for monitoring hole conditions, get ting t ools safely to bottom and in general ensuring that operations proceed according to plan. Once these operations are completed, you will focus on the crucial task of running and cementing the 7-inch [178 mm] production casing. At the conclusion of this assignment, t he well should be ready for a workover rig to perforate the production casing, run tubing and t urn t he well over to the Production Depart ment . Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 72 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling, Workover and Well Servicing

Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_a41)
Description: Competency Statement: Identify, monitor and evaluate drilling, workover, stimulation and well servicing proposals and act ivities in the cont ext of optimizing the overall reservoir exploitation scheme. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to cont ribut e to t he well planning process by understanding t he reservoir engineering aspects of the proposed work and having a knowledge of drilling, workover and well servicing fundamentals work with the geologist and the drilling engineer t o select well locations, target dept hs and casing points Assignment Instruction: Long-term exploitation strategies for this reservoir are currently being considered for the Upper/ Middle Sand reservoir. Management has appropriated funds for continued drilling, and has already approved a new well proposal for Block 5A1-SW. In this assignment, you will recommend the target dept h and radius for well 5A1-SW. You will determine what mud weights to use during drilling, specify casing points, and decide on formation evaluation requirements. This reservoir has been on product ion for just over two years. A total of six wells have been drilled, one of which was abandoned. Production is currently averaging about 2000 barrels of oil per day under solution gas drive at well over its bubble point pressure. These wells, although initially designated as "Upper Sand" producers, expose both the Upper and Middle sand reservoirs. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 73 of 87

Well Completion Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a42)
Description: Competency Statement: Select the appropriate tubing and accessories for completing wells in keeping with the product ion method required for the reservoir, and to facilitate future workover, servicing and stimulation work. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to select the proper sizes and grades of tubulars to maintain the int egrit y of the wellbore and handle anticipat ed production select the downhole casing and tubing accessories needed to optimize production and future well work Assignment Instruction: Well 5A1-SW is currently in t he planning stage. The well specifications est ablished so far include target depth and radius, well profile, mud weight requirement s, approximate casing point s and formation evaluation needs. In this assignment, you will work on t he well's completion design. You will select the completion t ype and tubing configuration, specify the casing and tubing diameters to be used, and design the surface and product ion casing strings. The success of your design will depend on how well it handles t he anticipated product ion, compatibility of the various hole, casing and tubing sizes, adequacy of the casing design loads, and cost.

Drilling and Workover Fluids (IHRDC_IPIMS_a43)
Description: Competency Statement: Select the appropriate drilling/workover fluid for meet ing well objectives and, minimizing formation damage wit h no impact on the environment. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to evaluate the features, benefit s and limitations of various mud systems and additives, and select the one most appropriat e for a given well specify controls on fluid propert ies in order to optimize drilling and workover operations Assignment Instruction: Drilling and completion fluids are essential to safe and successful well operations. In this assignment, you will select the appropriat e fluids for drilling and completing Well 5A1-SW, monitor their properties, and recommend changes as needed. By the time you complet e this module, you should be able to evaluate the features, benefits and limit at ions of various mud syst ems and addit ives, and specify controls on fluid properties for optimizing drilling and workover operations. The AFE for drilling Well 5A1-SW has been approved, and operations are getting underway. Once drilling begins, your job will be t o closely monitor the propert ies of the mud system you have selected, and to make changes in t he mud system as operating conditions may require.

Drilling and Workover Hydraulics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a44)
Description: Competency Statement: Maximize penetration rates, minimize format ion damage and ensure hole stability through the proper applicat ion of drilling hydraulics principles. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to determine the pressure losses t hat occur in the rig circulating system use basic calculation met hods t o det ermine optimal bit nozzle size, annular velocit y and other rig hydraulics parameters diagnose drilling problems resulting from poor hydraulics practices Assignment Instruction: The objective of a drilling hydraulics program is to maximize bit life and penetration rate by efficiently removing drilled cuttings and by cleaning, cooling and lubricating t he bit and drill string. The key to a sucessful hydraulic program is to deliver an optimal amount of energy to the bit. The easiest way t o control and optimize drilling hydraulics is to select the appropriate bit nozzle diamet ers for delivering the maximum amount of hydraulic energy t o the bottom of the hole. In assignment, you will learn to use drilling hydraulics principles to maximize penetration rat es, ensure hole stability, optimize hole cleaning characteristics and minimize format ion damage. By the time you complete this module, you should be able t o det ermine pressure losses in the rig circulating syst em and select t he appropriate bit nozzle diameters for optimizing hydraulic energy.

Cementing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a45)
Description: Competency Statement: Determine the most appropriate procedures, equipment, tools and cementing materials for assuring a high-quality cement job. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to determine the volume, displacement and density requirements for cementing a casing st ring select the cement additives appropriate to a given job specify the casing accessories t o be use on a primary cement job outline the steps involved in cementing a string of casing evaluate the results of a primary or squeeze cement ing operation calculate the volumes and displacements required to set a cement plug Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will determine t he appropriate procedures, mat erials and equipment for assuring a high-quality cement job on Well 5A1-SW. By the time you complete t his module, you should be able to determine cement volume, density and displacement requirements, select cement addit ives, specify casing accessories, outline cementing procedures, evaluate job result s, and make basic cement plug calculations. Well 5A1-SW has been drilled to T.D., and the openhole formation evaluation program has been completed. It is now time to run and cement the production string. The purpose of this primary cement job, in which cement slurry is pumped down through t he casing and up the casing-hole annulus, is to form a seal between the casing and formation, and to support t he weight of t he casing string. In this module, you will determine how much cement you need for the production casing, what materials and addit ives you should use, what casing accessories and equipment you need, and what procedures you should follow. You will then evaluate t he success of the primary cement job and, if necessary, recommend remedial work.

Directional, Horizontal and Multilateral Wells (IHRDC_IPIMS_a46)
Description: Competency Statement: Contribute to the planning and design of non-conventional well completions. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to identify reservoirs that are suitable candidat es for horizontal or multilateral wells apply knowledge of the reservoir to a selection of the well t rajectory select the best general completion design for a horizontal or multilateral well in a given reservoir Assignment Instruction: Without directional drilling much of the world's oil and gas would be unrecoverable. Horizontal and multilateral wells, which are special applications of directional drilling t echnology, are a proven means of improving productivity and reducing overall development cost s in certain types of reservoirs. In this assignment, you will define basic direct ional drilling parameters and establish the trajectory for a possible re-drill of an existing well. You will look at the feasibility of horizontal and multilateral wells from a reservoir management perspective, and consider some of the issues involved in planning and designing these wells. By the time you complete this module, you should be able to calculate a simple well t rajectory, identify candidate reservoirs for horizontal wells and select the best general completion design for a given reservoir. Well 5C1-SW was the second well drilled in the Upper/Middle sands. Detailed log analysis and an open hole formation test indicat ed that the t op of the Upper Sand at 14800 ft [4511 m] was below the oil-water contact. The well was subsequently plugged back wit h cement to t he surface casing and suspended Several members of t he reservoir management team have suggested re-drilling this well upstructure to Block 5B1-NE. The drilling depart ment will evaluate t he feasibility and costs of re-drilling from below the surface casing. Your job will be to establish some of the basic directional parameters and calculating a trajectory for this well, which will be designated 5C1-SW R/D.
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Production Fundamentals

Production Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a81)
Description: Competency Statement: Apply basic production engineering principles to optimizing the reservoir exploitation scheme. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to select the opt imal complet ion design and the proper surface and subsurface equipment for producing a flowing oil well efficiently and economically optimize flowing well performance based on knowledge of inflow performance, vertical lift performance and surface choke performance determine when artificial lift will be necessary in order t o maint ain oil production at desired levels, and select the most appropriat e lift method for a given well specify design and equipment requirements for placing a well on artificial lift Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will specify the completion design for Well 5A1-SW and evaluate its performance potential. By the time you complete this module, you should be able t o opt imize flowing well performance using nodal analysis principles, determine when artificial lift will be necessary in order to maintain oil production, and select the best lift method for a given set of operating condit ions. Well 5A1-SW has been recently drilled to t he Upper/Middle sands. It is to be completed by selectively perforating the 7-inch casing, which has been cemented at a dept h of 14400 ft. In this module assignment, you will review actual and estimated field data, select the general well configuration, and specify requirement s for subsurface producing equipment . You will define the well's inflow performance relationship (IPR), determine its vertical lift performance for various producing rates, and establish surface flow parameters. You will t hen combine t hese analyses to define and predict the flowing well's performance. You will also review various artificial lift methods to determine how this well will be produced once it can no longer flow.

Production Optimization (IHRDC_IPIMS_a82)
Description: Competency Statement: Opt imize the perfomance of individual producing wells. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to analyze well behavior, using nodal analysis and interpreting historical production trends diagnose equipment problems and/or detect production deviations identify production problems relating to pressure decline, water, gas or sand production, low productivit y, formation damage or equipment failure recommend actions required for optimizing production, identify candidate wells for well servicing, st imulation and/or sand cont rol and indicate the best met hod t o use Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will review t he actual performance of Well 5A1-SW, as well as t hat of several other wells in offsetting fields, in an effort to optimize their production rat es. By the time you complete t his module, you should be able to analyze well behavior using nodal analysis and historical production trends, diagnose equipment problems and/or detect production deviations, and recommend the appropriate action for optimizing production. Well 5A1-SW has been completed in t he Upper/Middle sands, and a production and buildup tests have been completed. You now need to see if the well's actual performance mat ches what was predicted before its completion. You will be looking for ways to optimize this well's product ion under both current and future reservoir conditions. You will also look at other wells, including two that are currently producing using electric submersible pumps and one that is planned as a rod pump completion, and make recommendat ions regarding their performance.

Production Facilities (IHRDC_IPIMS_a83)
Description: Competency Statement: Determine surface facility requirements for handling the gas and liquid production volumes established for t he reservoir. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to determine fluid handling and transport requirements for surface facilities and equipment identify the surface facility components needed to handle t he field's production, specifying t heir capacities and pressure ratings generate a general surface facilities layout showing the path of the produced fluids from the wellhead t o the t ransportation point (pipeline or loading rack) Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will make preliminary recommendations regarding the surface production facility design for the Sucre field. By the time you complete this module, you should be able to determine basic requirements for handling produced oil, wat er and gas, and develop a general surface facilit y layout showing the path of the produced fluids from the wellhead to the sales point. A production forecast has been generated for the Upper/Middle sands based on extended production test s and currently available rock and fluid data. You will decide how to use t his forecast in sizing the surface facilities, and you will determine what t ypes of fluid handling, separation and treating equipment will be needed. You will also specify the path t hat the produced fluids will follow through the production facilit y. Although your work will be of a very preliminary and general nature, it will be instrumental in future cost analyses, budget planning, and, ultimately, selection of an optimal reservoir development scenario.

Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a84)
Description: Competency Statement: Design and execute a well test. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to select candidate wells for testing and specify test objectives design a pressure transient t est and select equipment in keeping wit h the stated objectives monitor the test and interpret the results Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will establish basic objectives and procedures for testing new wells in the Upper/Middle sands of the Sucre field. You will also review tests that were run in other reservoirs, and use the results of a drill st em t est (DST) t o det ermine well deliverability parameters. By the time you complete this module, you should be able plan, execut e, monitor and int erpret a simple pressure transient test. Formation evaluat ion of the Upper/Middle sands--including successful product ion tests of Wells 4E1-NE and 5A1-SW--has established this reservoir's commercial hydrocarbon potential. The reservoir management team has generated estimates of oil in place and recovery factors; it has even predicted a production schedule and outlined basic surface facility specifications. These estimates are, however, very preliminary, and based on assumptions which may or may not prove valid over time. There is st ill a good deal of appraisal and planning t o be done before the reservoir moves into the development stage of its life. Your assignment in t his Learning Module is to assist in t he reservoir appraisal by developing general guidelines for a well testing program, based on your understanding of formation evaluation objectives and test procedures. You will also be looking at DST results from wells in other fields so that you may become familiar with basic methods of test monitoring and int erpret at ion. In later assignments, you will become more involved in the analysis of pressure transient tests, particularly with respect to modern interpretation met hods.
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Production and Operating Practices

Flowing Well Performance and Production System Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a281)
Description: Competency Statement: Establish Inflow Performance Relat ionship (IPR) and determine flowing well potential. Use syst ems analysis approach to predict and optimize product ion. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Use production dat a to define a well's IPR and flow potential under current operating conditions. Predict changes in well potential resulting from declining reservoir pressures. Evaluat e the effects of various operat ing parameters on flowing well performance. Design a single-well product ion syst em based on analysis of individual system components. Select the appropriate tubing and flowline diameters for optimizing well performance. Predict future production rates based on changing operating conditions. Assignment Instruction: Well TR-34 is a recently completed development well in t he Main Body sands of the Firest one Field. You have just completed an extended production test of this flowing well in preparation for tying it into the field's main production facilities. In this assignment, you will treat t his well as a single product ion syst em ext ending from the reservoir t o the first-stage production separator. You will analyze the test results to determine the well's pot ential and the effect of various operating parameters on its performance. You will then use your analysis to establish an optimal production rate and size the tubing and surface flowline. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 83 of 87

Artificial Lift Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a282)
Description: Competency Statement: Determine need for artificial lift. Evaluate and design system. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Distinguish among the common met hods of artificial lift and understand their advantages and limit at ions. Select the most appropriate art ificial lift met hod for a given set of well and economic conditions. Perform basic surface and subsurface design calculations for gas lift and pump-assisted syst ems. Monitor artificial lift performance . Assignment Instruction: Artificial lift is a means of reducing t he backpressure on a well so that it can be produced at some desired rate. This may be accomplished by reducing the density of the wellbore fluid column, as is done in gas lift, or by using a pump to physically displace the fluids to t he surface. In this Assignment, you will consider both t ypes of artificial lift as you evaluate three scenarios: (1) a flowing well that has experienced a significant decline in production rate as reservoir pressure has decreased, (2) a well that is to be incorporated into an existing gas lift system, and (3) the installation of an Electrical Submersible Pump (ESP) at a water source well. Alt hough these scenarios do not cover all of the artificial lift systems and combinations of methods that are currently available, they will give you a good idea of the issues that you must consider in designing such a system. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 84 of 87

Well Stimulation and Sand Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a283)
Description: Competency Statement: Diagnose production problems related to formation damage and recommend appropriate solutions. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Diagnose various types of formation damage and identify stimulation candidates. Design a matrix acid stimulation t reatment based on specific well conditions and reservoir charact eristics. Specify the materials, equipment and pumping schedule for a hydraulic fracturing procedure. Apply traditional and modern sand control methods to optimize well productivity Assignment Instruction: Well stimulation treatments, which are designed to restore or enhance well productivity, are of two basic types. Mat rix t reatments are performed at pressures that are below the formation fracture pressure; they are primarily designed to remove near-wellbore damage. Fract ure treatments, on the other hand, are performed at pressures above the formation fracture pressure; they are designed to open up highly conduct ive flow paths between the reservoir and t he wellbore, thereby bypassing near-wellbore damage and changing the flow patterns around the well. Sand cont rol technolgy is built around preventing loose sand and ot her unconsolidated formation solids from plugging the formation or entering the wellbore. As you will see in this assignment, stimulation and sand control t echnologies are in some ways closely relat ed, and under certain circumstances, may even overlap. In this assignment, you will carry out preliminary design work both for a mat rix acid st imulation and a hydraulic fract ure t reatment, and will also select the appropriate sand control measures for a flowing production well. In each case, you will evaluate the nature and extent of the near-wellbore damage that has made stimulat ion and/or sand control necessary.

Workover Planning and Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a284)
Description: Competency Statement: Identify workover candidates and out line procedures for accomplishing well object ives. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to Evaluat e well performance and identify workover or abandonment candidat es. Plan safe workovers using the tools and methods appropriate to individual wells. Apply procedures and standards in accordance wit h recognized safe practices and regulatory requirements. Assignment Instruction: A review of t he producing wells in the Adams portion of the Tremont Field has indicated that several wells need at tention and may be workover candidates. In t his assignment, you will evaluate condit ions at these wells, take st eps to troubleshoot t hese conditions, and recommend remedial action. You will also be getting ready to perforate the production casing in Adams 8, a newly drilled Sixth Zone producer. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 86 of 87

Surface Production Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a285)
Description: Competency Statement: Generate production facilities requirements. Promote safe practices in production operat ions. Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to: Review surface flowing well conditions with the goal of optimizing production. Describe the basic layout of an upstream producing facility and t he funct ions of its major components. Out line the general requirements for separating and treat ing produced oil as a basis for a detailed facility design. Plan and oversee routine field maintenance work, and maintain a safe operation through proper application of good work pract ices and the careful control of sit e act ivities. Assignment Instruction: The Sucre field's existing upstream surface facilities are designed for primary recovery, but that is about t o change as preparations begin for a full-scale water injection project in The Upper/Middle Sands. As part of t hese preparations, you will address some of the general issues involved in modifying these facilities. You will also be involved in ongoing field operations; specifically, you will be responsible for safely completing repair and maintenance work on one of the field's main production separators. Duration: 8:00:00 hrs Module 87 of 87
Petroleum Online
Course Catalog
All Sectors
Oil and Gas Industry Overview (IHRDC_PO_I1)
Description: A comprehensive overview of the industry; learn what petroleum is, where it comes from and how it affect s all of our lives on a daily basis. Become familiar with the various phases of the Oil and Gas Value Chain upstream, midst ream and downstream t he key industry players, the basics of oil and gas supply, demand and pricing and the challenges that t he industry faces as demand for t hese important form of energy grows by 50% in the next 25 years. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Crude Oil and Natural Gas: From Source to Final Products Chemistry of Hydrocarbons Origins of Crude Oil and Natural Gas Petroleum Migration and Accumulation Petroleum Reservoirs Separation and Treatment of Produced Oil and Gas Gas Handling and Processing Crude Oil Refining Petrochemicals Measurement Units and Conversion Factors Crude Oil Measurement Oil Quality: API Gravit y Natural Gas Measurement Gas Liquids and Petroleum Product Measurement Energy Cont ent and Equivalency Thermal Energy Equivalency: Hydrocarbon Price Equivalency: Conversion Table and Electronic Calculator Oil and Gas Value Chain Upstream Sect or Negotiation of Upstream Agreements Exploration Field Development Long-term Production Wholesale Hydrocarbon Markets Midstream Sector Crude Transportation Refining of Crude Oil Midstream Natural Gas Value Chain Gas Processing Natural Gas Pipeline Transportation and Storage Downstream Sect or Downstream Natural Gas Value Chain Main Global Players in the International Petroleum Industry OPEC Vertically Int egrated Global Companies World Primary Energy Markets and the Role of Hydrocarbons Energy Supply and Demand Fundament als Energy Demand Energy Supply Crude Oil Supply, Demand and Cross-border Trade Natural Gas Reserves Natural Gas Supply, Demand and Cross-border Trade Natural Gas Prices Emerging Commodity Price Final Thoughts Important Oil and Gas Statistical References Websites of Importance Acknowledgments Module 1 of 14
Upstream Sector
Upstream Oil and Gas Agreements (IHRDC_PO_I2)
Description: A comprehensive overview of the industry; learn what petroleum is, where it comes from and how it affect s all of our lives on a daily basis. Become familiar with the various phases of the Oil and Gas Value Chain upstream, midst ream and downstream t he key industry players, the basics of oil and gas supply, demand and pricing and the challenges that t he industry faces as demand for t hese important form of energy grows by 50% in the next 25 years. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Historical Perspective Methods for Obtaining a Host Government Agreement Four Types of Exploration Agreements The Concession Agreement US Offshore License Agreement West Africa Concession Agreement Additional Oil Entitlement Participation of National Oil Company: Working Interest Options Training Commitment and Other Forms of Sustainable Development The Production Sharing Cont ract Fiscal Terms Risk Service Agreements Natural Gas Discoveries: Post -Discovery Negotiations Joint Operating Agreements Nicola Case Study Agreement Stages Costs During Exploration Work Program and Relinquishment of Blocks Field Production and Development Costs Concession Agreement Sandland Business Game Summary Glossary of Terms Model Form for International Joint Operating Agreement Module 2 of 14
Upstream Sector
Petroleum Geology and The Exploration Process (IHRDC_PO_I3)
Description: Upstream agreement s define the legal, business and working relationships that exist between companies that explore for and produce oil and gas and the government agencies or privat e part ies t hat own the mineral right s. Learn how an oil and gas lease is negotiated wit h a landowner in the U.S. and then analyze the two major forms of agreements used by host count ries t he Concession Agreement and the Production Sharing Contract. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology Building of Sediment ary Basins Sedimentary Environments Sedimentary Rock Properties: Porosity and Permeability Formation of Crude Oil and Natural Gas Petroleum Migration and Accumulation Petroleum Reservoirs and Reservoir Traps Reservoir Seals Summary The Exploration Process Broad Surveying Techniques Existing Well Data Geophysical Surveying and the Seismic Reflection Method Conducting a 2D Seismic Survey Seismic Survey of the Pam Basin 3D and 4D Seismic Surveys Economics of the Pam Basin Prospect Summary References Module 3 of 14
Upstream Sector
Drilling and Well Completions (IHRDC_PO_I4)
Description: Examine the geological conditions that make for a good petroleum prospect, and learn why oil and gas are found in some places and not ot hers. Also learn the st ep-by-step process that exploration t eams follow t o identify projects, from the initial surface reconnaissance to the drilling of exploratory wells. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Drilling Objectives Surface and Subsurface Environments Rig Counts Drilling Technology Phases of Well Construction Well Planning Init ial St eps Authorization for Expenditure (AFE) Environmental and Regulatory Considerations Support and Logistics Drilling Rig Procurement Drilling Contract s Well Design Subsurface Pressure and Temperature Hole Sect ions Well Trajectory Deviation Control Directional Drilling Horizontal Drilling Geosteering Multilateral Wells Drilling Operations Rig Systems and Equipment Hoist ing and Rotating Systems Circulating System Well Control System Power Generation and Transmission System Types of Drilling Rigs Onshore (Land) Rigs Offshore Rigs Subsurface Drilling Equipment Drill String Components Drill Bit s Drilling Procedures Drilling Problems Remote Monitoring and Operations Support Formation Evaluation and Testing Well Completion Completion Design Well Stimulation Production Tubing Wellhead and Surface Flow Control Equipment Summary References Additional Resources Acknowledgments Module 4 of 14
Upstream Sector
Field Development and Production (IHRDC_PO_I5)
Description: The development and production of an oil or gas field is among the most involved and challenging business undertakings. Learn the st eps involved in field development, from its initial planning stages, through reservoir analysis, subsurface design and const ruction of surface facilities. This module also covers components of long-term production, reservoir management and facilities maintenance. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Reservoir Management Objectives Hydrocarbons in Place Recovery Factor Oil and Gas Reserves Primary Recovery Improved Recovery Production Schedule Optimal Design Rate Reservoir Description and Characterization Reservoir Parameters Geology and St ructure Rock and Fluid Properties Pressure and Temperature Data Acquisition, Interpretation and Analysis Geological and Seismic Interpretations Well Logs and Core Dat a Well Tests Production Data Integrated Reservoir Characterization Reservoir Mapping and Reserves Evaluation Subsurface Maps and What They Tell Us Reserves Definit ons and Classificat ions Reserves Evaluation Methods Uncertainties in Reserves Evaluation Monte Carlo Analysis / Probablist ic Represent at ion of Reserves Reservoir Modeling Object ives Elements of a Simulation Study Subsurface Development Plan Reservoir Performance Natural Drive Mechanisms Improved Recovery Processes Well Product ivity Production System Overview Flowing Well Performance Art ificial Lift Completion and Production Planning Estimating Field Performance Field Development Studies Surface Development Plan Surface Facilities General Considerations Onshore Facilities Offshore Facilities Economic Evaluation and Field Management Cash Flow Analysis Field Management Example Cost Estimating and Scheduling Field Management Example Operating Cost and Financial Assumptions Field Management Example Health, Safety and Environmental Considerations Health and Safet y Hazards in Field Operations
Upstream Sector
Field Development and Production (IHRDC_PO_I5)
Safety in Day-to-Day Operations Emergency Preparedness Environment Issues in Field Development and Product ion Regulatory Considerat ions Summary References Appendix Module 5 of 14
Upstream Sector
Upstream Gas: From Exploration to Wholesale Markets (IHRDC_PO_I13)
Description: Devot ed to the upstream gas value chain, this module begins with an overview of the significant gas properties and shows how a gas prospect is discovered and then developed into a viable producing entity. Import ant topics include the est imat ion of resources and reserves, field design process and surface facilit ies required to satisfy gas market specifications. It ends with a summary of the nature of the wholesale gas and gas liquids markets in various countries and typical wholesale agreement s. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Basic Gas and Gas Liquid Properties and Terminology Gas and gas liquids composition and properties Definition of industry terms: LNG, LPG, NGLs, CNG Gas Industry Value Chain with Emphasis on the Upstream Sector Upstream Petroleum Project Management Stages and Workflow Background on two gas exploration prospects Location Landowner or Host Count ry Exploration Agreements Technical Support for the Prospect Potential Gas Markets Demand, Timing, Sale Point, Prices and Contract Terms Project Planning and Economics Exploration and Field Development Plan and Schedule Reserves, Production, Rates, CAPEX, OPEX, IRR Permit s and Authorizations Required. HSE Issues Risk Analysis:Exploration, Development, Production, Market, Government Partner Issues Exploration of gas prospects Gas Exploration Basics Exploration Plan: Costs and Schedule Exploration well plan, evaluation and expect ed costs Results of Explorat ion Review of Reserves Wholesale Gas Markets and Project Market Options Project Economics Authorization to Move t o Next Stage Planning Gas Field Development Review of Alt ernative Subsurface Development Plans Optimization of Subsurface Development Plan Preparing Surface Facilit ies Plan Environmental and Social Impact Report Sources of Project Capital: Debt and Equity Project Partner Agreements Finalizing Gas Sales Contract Obtaining Government and Other Permits Project Management Plans Authorization to Move t o Development Development of New Discoveries Implementing t he Development Plan Project Management Issues: Scope, Schedule, Cost, Quality, Communications, Risks and Procurement Engineering, Procurement and Construct ion Agreement Final Costs and Timing Managing the Production Cycle Managing the Field Production Life Cycle Operations and Maintenance of Facilities Monitoring Well and Reservoir Performance Adding Wells and Compression Reservoir Management Managing Sales and Customer Relations Financial and Partner Report ing Summary of the Out come of the Two Prospects Summary of Case Studies and Drivers of Upstream Gas Success References
Upstream Sector
Upstream Gas: From Exploration to Wholesale Markets (IHRDC_PO_I13)
Module 6 of 14
Midstream Sector
Marketing and Trading of Crude Oil (IHRDC_PO_I6)
Description: Geological studies and seismic surveys can indicate an oil or gas prospect, but the only way to know if that prospect contains oil or gas is t o drill wells. Get an introduction to the basics of the rotary drilling process and learn the dramatic advances in drilling technology that have taken place in recent years. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Changing Nature of the Crude Oil Market Control of the Market by the "Majors" Shared Control The Opec Transition Price Shock of 1973 World Recession Nationalization, Market Transformation and New Discoveries Price Shock of 1979 Falling Demand Market-Related Crude Pricing Advent of Spot Markets Crude Oil Pricing Today Marker Crudes Crude Oil Assay Price Reporting Pricing of Other Crudes Use of the Futures Markets for Price Formation The Role of OPEC in Price Formation Fundamentals of a Physical Crude Oil Contract Seller / Buyer Relationship Title Transfer Arrangements / Point of Sale Other Contract Terms Typical Price Setting Negotiation of Physical Contracts Stages in the Negotiation of a Crude Contract Contract Examples Colombia Crude Sale to Unspecified End User Sale of Crude t o a Refiner in the Caribbean Nigerian Crude Sale to Trader Fundamentals of Financial Derivatives Forward and Future Contracts Crude Contracts Offered by Financial Exchanges How a Fut ures Contract Works General Feat ures of the Oil Futures Market Use of Derivatives in Price Risk Management Hedges: Buy or Sell Crude Oil SWAPS: Convert Variable Price t o a Fixed Price Options: Setting a Floor or Ceiling Price Typical Players In The Petroleum Derivatives Markets Trading of Crude Oil: Using Both Physical and Financial Contracts Summary References Exhibits Module 7 of 14
Midstream Sector
Crude Oil Transportation and Storage (IHRDC_PO_I7)
Description: Like ot her commodities, t he market determines the value of crude oil. Examine how crude oil markets and pricing are established based on global and regional supply and demand, how organizations such as OPEC affect t hese market s on a wholesale level. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Crude Oil Pipelines System Components Examples of International Pipelines Phases of Pipeline Development Pipeline Operat ions Pipeline Tariffs Batching Pipeline Maint enance Pigging Pipeline Inspection Corrosion Prevention Pipeline Safety Crude Oil Storage Temporary Storage of Crude Oil Strategic St orage of Crude Oil Nicola Case study: Pipeline and Storage Decisions Oil Tankers Tanker Sizes Tanker Classifications Trade Routes Chokepoints Demand and Supply Development of the World Tanker Trade Ownership and Hiring of Tankers Tanker Rates Worldscale Calculation Tanker Safet y Nicola case study: Shipping Decision Other Forms of Crude Oil Transportation References Acknowledgments Module 8 of 14
Midstream Sector
Midstream Gas: Gas Processing, Transportation and Load Balancing (IHRDC_PO_I14)
Description: The module covers t he midst ream gas value chain; essentially, the t ransportation of gas in pipelines and LNG ships and the balancing of market swings through the use of gas st orage facilities. The pipeline section focuses on design, operations and t ariffs, the LNG sect ion centers around the design and economics of the LNG value chain from liquefaction to receiving t erminals and the load balancing section summarizes the various options available to manage the pipeline swings between gas supply and market demand and their typical costs. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Gas Processing Gas Processing Terminology Properties of Natural Gas & Natural Gas Liquids Surface Facilities Key Products of Natural Gas Processing Ethane Propane Iso-Butane Normal Butane Natural Gasoline Gas Processing Opt ions Gas Processing Systems Markets for Gas Liquids Global Supply and Demand Natural Gas Pipelines Gas Pipeline History and Milestones Global Pipeline Infrastructure North America South America Europe Former Soviet Union Asia Australia Pipeline Design Wall Thickness Composite Reinforcement Capacity vs. Diameter Capacity vs. Operating Capacity Transmission System Design Pipeline Economics Development Process Onshore Offshore Pipeline Tariff Struct ure Regulated Market Deregulat ed Market History of the United St at es History of the United Kingdom Liquified Natural Gas LNG Value Chain LNG History and Milestones LNG Process Liquifact ion LNG Trains Transporation Regasification LNG Economics LNG Markets & Trade Load Balancing & Underground Gas Storage Load Balancing Applications Load Duration Curve Winter Flow Patt ern Underground Storage Options
Midstream Sector
Midstream Gas: Gas Processing, Transportation and Load Balancing (IHRDC_PO_I14)
Underground Storage Capacity & Trends Thomas Corners Gas Storage Case Study Surface Storage Options LNG Peakshaving Interruptible Customers Pore Storage Withdrawal Summary References Module 9 of 14
Midstream Sector
Refining and Product Specifications (IHRDC_PO_I8)
Description: Every day, some 85 million barrels of crude oil are transported from producing fields to major refining centers, many of which are located hundreds or t housands of miles apart. Learn how, and at what cost, crude oil is transported in pipelines and tankers t he two most practical and economical methods for moving large volumes of crude oil over long distances. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Crude Oil Characteristics Crude Oil Chemistry Paraffins (Alkanes) Olefins and Aromatics Naphthenes Heating Value of Hydrocarbons Boiling Points of Hydrocarbons Volume Changes during Refining Crude Quality: API Gravity and Sulfur Cont ent API Gravity Sulfur Cont ent Marker Crudes and Pricing Benchmarks Crude Quality: Yield of Petroleum Fractions The Refining Process Crude Yields and Product Demand Functions of a Refinery Hydroskimming Refinery Cracking Refinery Deep Conversion Coking Refinery Refinery Complexit y Non-Refined Petroleum Supply/Blend Streams Ethanol Bio-Diesel Gas-t o-Liquids Refining Economics Cost of Crude Oil and Value of Petroleum Product s Impact of Refining Complexity on Refining Margins Impact of Refining Capacity on Refining Margins Refinery Case Study: Addition 100,000 b/d Delayed Coker Fut ure Trends Health, Safety and Environmental Considerations Health and Safet y Environment Summary References Module 10 of 14
Downstream Sector
Marketing & Distribution of Petroleum Products (IHRDC_PO_I9)
Description: Once crude oil has been refined into transportation fuels, heating oil, lubricants and other products, it must be marketed and distributed to commercial and retail customers. In t his module you will learn how refined product s make their way to pipelines, t erminals, service stations and ot her outlets where the profits are being made in this downst ream sect or of the industry and the economics of the modern gasoline super-st at ion. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Petroleum Products and Services Fuels for Transportation and Heating Gasoline and Diesel Composition Performance Characteristics Kerosene (Aviation) Fuel Oils (Marine) Heating Fuels Liquefied Petroleum Gases (LPGs) Developments in Fuels, Bio-Fuels and Fuel Cells Non-fuel Specialty Products and Streams Lubricants and Greases Engine Lubricants Transmission Lubricants Indust rial Oils Greases Bit umens Chemicals and Solvents Other Products The Marketplace for Petroleum Products Retail Customers Commercial Customers Basics of Marketing Petroleum Products Marketing Segmentation and Customer Focus Retail Sector Commercial Sector Mobil Case Study Synopsis Worldwide Demand and Pricing for Petroleum Products Products Markets in Europe Product Markets in North America Products Markets in Asia Pacific The Downstream Value Chain: From Refinery to Final Sale Manufact uring of Petroleum Products Product Transport at ion, Storage and Distribution Importing Products Using Product Carriers Intermediate Bulk St orage Regional Transport at ion, Additives and Branding Product Pipelines Barges Rail Transportation Truck Transportation Market Out lets:Wholesale, Commercial and Retail Downstream Petroleum Examples Spain and New England CLH Distribution System Globals Value Chain Pricing Along the Downstream Value Chain Product Market Complexity and Competition Petroleum Distribution Costs and Margins Profit Margins at the Retail Service Station The Modern Gasoline Station Health, Safety and Environmental Considerations Summary References
Downstream Sector
Marketing & Distribution of Petroleum Products (IHRDC_PO_I9)
Module 11 of 14
Downstream Sector
Downstream Gas: Gas Distribution, Marketing & Trading (IHRDC_PO_I10)
Description: This module covers the downstream gas value chain including gas distribution, t he key gas market sectors and the manner in which gas supply is managed and sold into t he retail market. Emphasis is also placed on the nat ure of the gas markets in different regions of the world. The gas distribution coverage includes the design of a typical gas distribution system, the services it provides, typical distribution tariffs and billing structure. Gas markets discussed include residential, commercial, industrial, power generation, vehicle fuel and petrochemicals. Gas marketing and trading is introduced through the strategy t hat a "typical" gas distribution company follows in managing its gas supply in an "open access" gas industry environment. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview Gas Distribution LDC Distribution System Regulation Deregulat ion LDC Supply System Model Distribution Operations Gas Service Functions Technologies in Gas Distribution LNG Receiving & Vaporization Facility LNG Truck Local LNG St orage Gas Distribution Markets Ident ification of Markets Major Classes of Gas Market s Assessing Market Demand Sources of Market Information Gas Supply Economics Natural Gas Pricing Direct Markets Power Generation Indust rial Retail Markets Resident ial Commercial Vehicle Fuel Petrochemicals Power Generation Indust rial Gas Trading Regulation Deregulat ion Convergence "Open Access" Henry Hub Gas Daily Index Basic Deal Types Physical Gas and Measure Exposure Hedging Fixed-Price Risk Hedging Basis Risk Exchange and OTC Trading Summary References Module 12 of 14
Downstream Sector
Overview of Petrochemicals (IHRDC_PO_I11)
Description: Crude oil, like other raw materials, has few practical uses in and of itself. It s value lies in t he products that can be ext racted from it . Learn how crude oil is processed into commercial products through various refining processes. Also explore why some refineries are more complex t han others and what business decisions go into each days refinery run. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Outline: Overview: What are Petrochemicals? Characteristics of the Petrochemical Industry Global Nature of the Industry Common Specifications for most Products Readily Available Technology Large Scale, Capital Intensive Key to Success The Seven Basic Petrochemical Building Blocks Product Families and End-Uses Methane Ammonia Methanol Gas-t o-Liquids (GTL) Olefins Ethylene Propylene Butadiene The Aromatics Benzene Toluene Xylenes Petrochemical Plant Economics Components of Capital Investment Owners Project Cost s Tot al Fixed Investment Components of Product ion Costs Variable costs Fixed Costs Cash Cost of Production Depreciat ion Tot al Cost of Production Return on Capital Investment Required Plant Gate Price Economics of a Mega-Met hanol Project Why Invest in Petrochemical? Price Sett ing Mechanisms Demand Limited Scenario Production Limited Scenario Profitability Cycles Major Indust ry Issues Feedstock Costs Globalization and International Competit iveness Environmental Regulations Case Studies and Project Decriptions References Books Associations Selected Petrochemical Consulting Companies Selected Internet Sites with Petrochemical Industry Information Acknowledgments Module 13 of 14
All Sectors
Oil and Gas Business Game (IHRDC_PO_I12)
Description: Nicola, a dynamic Business Simulat ion Game, is used to int egrate the subject matter of each "Cont ent Module" to recreate the challenge of discovering, producing, and market ing oil and gas to learn where value, in the form of financial performance, is creat ed along the value chain. Duration: 2:00:00 hrs Module 14 of 14
Business Essentials
Course Catalog
Finance
Overview of Finance (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0101)
Description: Provides background on the financial environment by familiarizing you wit h it s major characteristics, definitions, and functions. You will learn how financial decisions fit int o the world of business decision-making and how these choices pose problems, challenges, and opportunities for organizations and individuals. Duration: 4:00:00 hrs Courses: Types of Business Organizations Wealth and Profit Maximization Business Ethics and Social Responsibility Where Does t he Finance Function Fit In and What Are It s Typical Responsibilities? Agency Relationships: Stockholders and Managers Motivating Managers The Five Key Principles of Financial Management Financial Markets and Institutions Financing and Operations Growth The Stock Market The Cost of Money: Interest Rates and Required Rates of Return Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Re-Test For Further Reference Module 1 of 35
Finance
Accounting Concepts and Financial Statement Analysis (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0201)
Description: Develops an understanding of account ing concept s and the ability to int erpret major financial accounting statements and financial management tasks. Finance is essentially a type of applied economics that makes extensive use of accounting concepts and definit ions. Duration: 4:00:00 hrs Courses: Annual Reports and Financial Statements The Balance Sheet The Income Statement Retained Earnings and Statement of Cash Flows Financial Analysis: Using Ratios Financial Ratios and Benchmarking Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Re-Test For Further Reference Module 2 of 35
Finance
Time Value of Money Principles (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0301)
Description: Learn the basic techniques (compounding, discounting, present and future value) used in evaluating all financial decisions, and t heir cash flow implications. Duration: 4:00:00 hrs Courses: Understanding Time Lines Calculating Fut ure and Present Values Annuities and Perpetuities Cash Flow Possibilities Interest Rates and the Power of Compound Interest Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Re-Test For Further Reference Module 3 of 35
Finance
Risk and Return (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0401)
Description: Reviews the many different ways to measure risk when considering a decision, each of which will produce different results. In this module you will learn about the relationship between risk and return and explore the benefit s of diversification. Duration: 4:00:00 hrs Courses: Fundamentals Different Types of Risk Investments and Variability of Retur Risk and Invest ment Decisions Calculating risk and rat es of return Diversificat ion and Risk Other Concept s: CAPM, APT, VaR Self Assessment Self Assessment Re-Test Module 4 of 35
Finance
Budgeting (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0501)
Description: Learn the basics of budgeting, including the varying t ypes of budgets, and explore the benefits of budgeting. Duration: 4:00:00 hrs Courses: Budget Basics Strategic Budgeting The Master Budget Operating Budgets Managing the budget process Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment For Further Reference Module 5 of 35
Finance
Practical Tools for Planning and Control (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0601)
Description: Considers t he practical tools of finance and accounting for decisionmaking by organizat ions. You will learn about cost benefit analysis, return on invest ment (ROI), fixed and variable costs, breakeven and CVP (cost-volume-profit) analysis, tracking and performance measures, as well as the Balanced Scorecard and its uses. Duration: 4:00:00 hrs Courses: Cost-Benefit Analysis Return on Investment and Payback Period Fixed and Variable Costs Breakeven analysis and Cost Volume Profit (CVP) analysis Breakeven analysis- An Example Tracking and Performance Balanced Scorecard Measurements Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Re-Test For Further Reference Module 6 of 35
Finance
Valuing Real Assets (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0701)
Description: Addresses the use of t he basic principles of finance t o det ermine the desirability of acquiring an asset that is expected to produce a future cash flow stream. The term capit al budget ing is t he name given to t his process. You will also learn to conduct a financial analysis of an asset or project under consideration. Duration: 4:00:00 hrs Courses: What is Capital Budget ing? Estimating Cash Flows Assessing Project Risk Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Useful Tools for Capital Budget ing Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Re-Test For Further Reference Course Feedback Module 7 of 35
Communications
Effective Communication (IHRDC_BEES_COM0101)
Description: Focuses on improving business writ ing. You will learn how to write clearly and directly for your audience. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Why Effective Communication Matters How We Communicate The Problem with Jargon Factors for Effective Communication Knowing Your Audience Ethical Communication Self-Assessment Module 8 of 35
Communications
Organizing and Structuring (IHRDC_BEES_COM0201)
Description: Reviews purposeful writ ing, as well as organizing and structuring your writing. You will learn how to brainstorm, conduct research, and deal with writ er's block. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Writing and Communicating with Purpose Who is your audience? What is your message? Out lining: Formal and Informal Brainstorming Techniques Research Overcoming Writer's Block Self-Assessment Module 9 of 35
Communications
Writing Effectively (IHRDC_BEES_COM0301)
Description: You will learn how to be a better writer and how to revise your writing to make it purposeful and effective. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Writing Concisely Writing Quickly Writing Quickly: Struct ure Revising Your Writing Revising: Jargon Email Additional Resources: Business Writ ing Self-Assessment Module 10 of 35
Communications
Presentations Basics (IHRDC_BEES_COM0401)
Description: Teaches you the basics of how t o organize, st ructure and create presentations. Since many organizations use PowerPoint as a way of communicat ing information, t his module offers advice and guidance on the most effect ive and persuasive uses of PowerPoint. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Why Effective Communication Matters Understanding How We Communicate Presentations: Visual Aids PowerPoint Presentations: Graphic Rules of Thumb PowerPoint Presentations: Creating Summary Slides PowerPoint Presentations: Creating Summary Slides II Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment Module 11 of 35
Communications
Purposeful Presentations (IHRDC_BEES_COM0501)
Description: Builds on Present at ion Basics and helps learners organize, structure and create presentations Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Organizing your Communication Organizing your Presentation: Forecast, Present and Echo PowerPoint Presentations: Other Visual Considerations PowerPoint Presentations: Creating a Present at ion Revising PowerPoint PowerPoint Presentations: Creating a Present at ion II Tips on Face-to-Face Presentations Additional Resources: Presentations Self-Assessment Module 12 of 35
Human Resources Management

Introduction to Human Resource Management (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0101)
Description: Explains Human Resource Management and discusses it s role and value in an organization. You will learn the key HRM funct ions and concepts, its st rategic contribution t o the organizat ion and understand the role of HRM planning. Ethical, cultural, political and logistical HRM issues are also addressed. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Fundamentals Attit udes about Human Resource Management The Strategic Importance of HRM HRM Vocabulary Game Key HRM Functions and Concepts Reading Centralized and Decentralized HRM HRM Planning HRM and Ethics Global HRM Issues RIGS: Making the Case for HRM (mini-case) Web Research: HR Associat ion Resources Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment For Further Exploration Module 13 of 35

Planning and Recruiting (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0201)
Description: Details the role of HRM in developing an organizations strat egic plan. You will learn the benefits of HRM planning, including effective recruitment strategies. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: HRM Planning Mini-case: Why plan? Effective Recruitment Ads Avoiding Recruitment Mistakes Mini-case: Looking for Candidates Practice Self Assessment Self Assessment Module 14 of 35

Employee Selection (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0301)
Description: Reviews how to conduct an effective job interview, reference checks and how to select appropriate pre-employment tests. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Finding t he Right Person Mini-case: Int erviewing for Pacific Machine Tools Employee Fit Test ing Prospect ive Employees Individual Exercise: Evaluat ing an Integrity Test Mini-case: A Hiring Dilemma HR Vocabulary Game Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 15 of 35

Training and Development (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0401)
Description: Introduces the various types of training programs used t o keep employees skills current , with an eye toward an organizations st rategic goals, and through personnel development shaping the fut ure of the organization itself. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Training Issues Designing an Orientation Program Diversity Training Mini-case: Team Building Developing Employees Mini-case: Const ructing a Development Plan Web Resources Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 16 of 35

Employment Benefits (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0501)
Description: Focuses on the benefit s that a company is legally required to offer employees. You will learn about t he range of benefit s available and what role they play in a competitive compensation package. Issues involved in the selection and administ ration of employee benefits are discussed. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Introduction t o Benefits Mini-case: Benefits Cost s Health Care Issues Vacations and Holidays Mini-Case: Unused Vacation Days HR Vocabulary Game Web Resources: Benefits Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 17 of 35

Performance Management (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0601)
Description: Explains the value of a performance management system and discusses various types of systems. You will learn to conduct a performance management interview and how to design a performance improvement plan. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Performance Evaluation Charact eristics Performance Management Syst ems Fair Measurements The Appraisal Process Handling Appraisal Results Performance Management Solutions Vocabulary Game Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 18 of 35

Compensation (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0701)
Description: Addresses the role of and the key issues in compensation systems in an organizat ion. You will learn the linkages between compensation and motivation and the pros and cons for pay-for-performance syst ems. Competitive pay and pay equity is also discussed. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Compensation Compensation and Motivation Video: Compensation Systems Compensation Considerations Pay for Performance Case Study: Commissions Vocabulary Game Pay Surveys and Market Compensation Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 19 of 35

Talent Management and Career Development (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0801)
Description: Considers t he critical value of a career development program to an organization. You will learn the five stages in the career lifecycle and t he needs of an employee at each stage. Key tools for career development are discussed and compared. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Why Career Development? Career Life-cycle Tools for Career Development Generat ional Issues Career Development Issues Career Questions Summary and Addit ional Reading Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 20 of 35

Equal Employment Opportunity (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0901)
Description: Reviews the major employment and ant i-discrimination laws as well as t he basic steps t o take in dealing with discrimination complaints. You will learn ways to develop and maintain a diverse workforce Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Equal Opportunity and Employment Issues Mini-case: Discrimination at Pacific Machine Tools? Mini-quiz: Discrimination Mini-case: Making a Choice on Promotion at Pacific Machine Tools Alternate Work Arrangement s at Pacific Machine Tools Web Research and Essay: Diversity in the Workforce Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 21 of 35

Ethics, Employee Rights, and Discipline (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1001)
Description: Reviews the major employment and ant i-discrimination laws as well as t he basic steps t o take in dealing with discrimination complaints. You will learn ways to develop and maintain a diverse workforce Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: HR and Ethics Introducing An Et hics Code Progressive Discipline Staying out of Legal Trouble Mini-case: Handling A Proposed Termination Mini-case: Progressive Discipline HR Vocabulary Game Labor Relations Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 22 of 35

Employee Health and Safety (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1101)
Description: In particular, the oil and gas industry must pay special att ention to the health and safety of its employees. This module discusses how a company is legally responsible for protecting it s employees, as well as methods to handle substance abuse, mental illness, and other stress-relat ed issues employees may face on the job. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: Safety and Health Issues OSHA Mini-case: When Employees Don't Follow the Rules Substance Abuse Stress Management Mini-case: Unhappy or Dangerous? Web Resources: Finding Help Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 23 of 35

Other HRM Issues: Work/Life Balance and Global HRM (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1201)
Description: Introduces the issues involved wit h work/life balance and the role of HRM in a global environment. Both topics involve the changing dynamics of the business world. Duration: 2:30:00 hrs Courses: The Import ance of Work/Life Balance Key Work/Life Balance Issues Assessing Attitudes Toward Work, Career, and Life Work/Life Balance Approaches Reading Key Terms in Global HRM Global HRM Issues Global Career Development Practice Self-Assessment Self-Assessment Module 24 of 35
Project Management
Introduction to Project Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0101)
Description: This 1-module course was designed as a supplement al study guide for t he major content areas of Chapt ers 1 and 2 of A Guide t o the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider some of the organizational issues surrounding project management. You will review how different organizations handle the responsibilities of project management and will focus on t he entity known as a project management office, or PMO. You will also learn how organizational structure can play a key role in the success or failure of project management. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Projects in Context: Understanding the Bigger Pict ure Presentation: St akeholders Presentation: Project Management Office (PMO), Resources, and Influences Presentation: Organizational St ructures Presentation: Project Life Cycle: Understanding Phases and Project Tendencies Best Practices: Select ing a Project Manager Best Practices: Project Manager Candidate Profile Review Interactive: PM Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 1 and 2 Quiz Module 25 of 35
Project Management
Project Processes and Project Integration Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0102)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapters 3 and 4 of A Guide to t he Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourt h Edition. In this course, you will be introduced to the five project management process groups and nine project management knowledge areas into which PMI sorts all project activities. You will also learn how processes in the Project Integrat ion Management knowledge area encourage relationships between project processes that keep the project's activities co-ordinated and on track for success. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Project Processes: An Integrat ed Flow Presentation: Project Management Processes, Project Management Process Groups, and Project Management Knowledge Areas Exercise: Process Groups And Their Const ituent Processes Presentation: Project Integration Management Presentation: Project Charter and Major Project Documents Presentation: Executing, Monitoring, and Closing Project Integration Management Processes Presentation: Handling t he Kick-Off Meeting Interactive: Vocabulary Game Self Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 3 Quiz PMBOK Guide Chapter 4 Quiz Module 26 of 35
Project Management
Project Scope Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0103)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 5 of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edition. In this course, you will consider many of the key issues surrounding Project Scope Management. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Collect Requirements [ ] and Define Scope [ 2] Presentation: Create Work Breakdown Structure [ 3] Presentation: Verify Scope [ 4] and Control Scope [ 5] Best Practices: Project Review Reports and Meetings Best Practices: Updating Stakeholders Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 5 Quiz Module 27 of 35
Project Management
Project Time Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0104)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 6 of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edition. In this course, you will consider how to best plan and schedule activities. You will familiarize yourself wit h the various techniques used to calculate and analyze activity time estimates, including ways to estimate the duration of activities. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Defining Activities Presentation: Sequencing Activities Presentation: Estimating Activity Resources and Durations Exercise: Est imat ion Using PERT and Z-Score Presentation: Develop Schedule and t he Critical Path Met hod Exercise: Identifying t he Critical Path Best Practices: Crashing Best Practices: Scheduling Pract ice Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 6 Quiz Module 28 of 35
Project Management
Project Cost Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0105)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 7 of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edition. In this course, you will consider the general approaches to cost management, such as t he methods that are used to estimate and budget for project costs. You will also learn about the interrelationship of various cost control concepts and possible responses a project management team might make if a project is falling behind schedule or overrunning its budget. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Estimate Costs Presentation: Determine Budget and the Cost Performance Baseline Presentation: Cost Analysis and Cost Control Exercise: Evaluating Project Status Best Practices: Cost Estimating and Budgeting Interactive: PM Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 7 Quiz Module 29 of 35
Project Management
Project Quality Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0106)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 8 of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edition. In this course, you will learn how the project management t eam ensures t hat a project is complet ed at t he level of quality required by all the stakeholders. From customers to the performing organization, there are many inputs to the process. This course will explain how the project management team can plan for, execute, and monitor and cont rol quality. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Project Quality Management Overview and Plan Quality Presentation: Planning Tools and Techniques Presentation: Flowcharts Presentation: Perform Qualit y Assurance and Perform Quality Control Exercise: Choosing the Correct Tool Best Practices Mini-Case: Improving Public Improvements Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 8 Quiz Module 30 of 35
Project Management
Project Human Resource Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0107)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 9 of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edition. In this course, you will learn how to acquire and negotiate t he best staff, how to define roles and responsibilit ies in project documentation, and how to employ the essent ials of good people management . Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Project Human Resource Management Presentation: Acquire Project Team Presentation: Develop Project Team Presentation: Manage Project Team Presentation: Conflict Management Best Practices Mini-Case: The Cycle Time Improvement Project Best Practices: Gathering Input for Decision-Making Best Practices: Web Resources on Group Dynamics Best Practices Mini-Case: Selecting a Decision-Making Approach Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 9 Quiz Module 31 of 35
Project Management
Project Communications Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0108)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 10 of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edition. In this course, you will learn about how project management t eams can effectively communicate with the project's various stakeholders. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Project Communications Management and Communications Basics online Ident ify Stakeholders online Plan Communications and Distribute Information online Manage Stakeholder Expectations online Report Performance online Best Practices: Mini-case: Confronting Communication Challenges online Vocabulary Game online Self-Assessment test PMBOK Guide Chapter 10 Quiz Module 32 of 35
Project Management
Project Risk Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0109)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 11 of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edition. In this course, you will define the core element s of risk management, including the risk register. You will also understand how risks are identified, prioritized, quantified and used in decision-making. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Plan Risk Management Presentation: Identify Risks Presentation: Perform Qualit at ive Risk Management Presentation: Perform Quantitative Risk Analysis Exercise: Perform Quantitative Risk Analysis Presentation: Plan Risk Responses and Monitor and Cont rol Risks Best Practices: Web Research Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 11 Quiz Module 33 of 35
Project Management
Project Procurement Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0110)
Description: This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 12 of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), Fourth Edition. In this course, you will consider the various aspects of the Project Procurement Management knowledge area. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Presentation: Plan Procurements Presentation: Conduct Procurements Presentation: Administer Procurements and Close Procurement s Exercise: Pinpointing the Procurement Process Presentation: Contract Negotiation Interactive: PM Vocabulary Game Self-Assessment PMBOK Guide Chapter 12 Quiz Module 34 of 35
Project Management
Project Management Practice Examination and Examination Strategies (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0201)
Description: This Pract ice Exam covers the Project Management Inst itute's standard, A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide). The practice exam contains multiple-choice questions that provide a comprehensive review of t he PMBOK Guide. Duration: 3:30:00 hrs Courses: Practice Examination 1: PMBOK Guide Knowledge Practice Examination 2: PMBOK Guide Knowledge Project Management Professional (PMP) Exam Strategies Introduction t o the PMP Exam PMI's PMP Code of Professional Conduct Tips for PMP Exam Test Taking Key PMBOK Guide Content to Memorize Test Center Logistics Ending the Test Exam Strat egy Self-Assessment Module 35 of 35
Operations & Maintenance e-Learning

Course Catalog
International Human Resources Development Corporation
PROCESS OPERATIONS CURRICULUM

For Th e Oil An d Gas In dustr y
Process Operations
BOILERS: Basic Principles and Types (IHRDC_OM_AOBBP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to fundamental concepts related to industrial plant boilers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic requirements for steam production and combustion and explain how a boiler produces steam. They should also be able to ident ify three types of heat t ransfer and explain how heat t ransfer occurs in a t ypical boiler. In addit ion, trainees should be able t o describe how water, combust ion gases, and steam flow t hrough fire tube and water tube boilers. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Principles of Operation State the basic requirements for steam production. State the basic requirements for combustion. Explain in general terms how a boiler produces steam. Heat Transfer Describe heat transfer. State three ways in which heat t ransfer can occur in a typical boiler. Ident ify problems t hat can interfere with proper heat transfer and t he effect of each on boiler operation. Boiler Types Name two basic t ypes of boilers. Describe the basic differences between fire tube and water t ube boilers. Describe how water, combustion gases, and st eam flow through fire tube and water t ube boilers.
Subjects: Principles of Operation Steam Production and Combustion Basic Boiler Operat ing Principles Heat Transfer Types of Heat Transfer Heat Transfer Problems Heat Transfer in a Boiler Boiler Types Fire Tube Boilers Water Tube Boilers Course 1 of 245
Process Operations
BOILERS: Combustion, Water and Steam (IHRDC_OM_AOBOW)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles associated with combustion in a boiler and t he flow of air and combustion gases during boiler operation. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify t he elements needed for combust ion in a boiler, explain how fuel is delivered t o the burners, and describe the parts and operation of various types of burners. They should also be able to describe the air and gas flow path through a boiler and describe methods used to remove particulates and harmful gases from combustion gases. In addit ion, trainees should be able t o explain when and why vents, drains, blowdown valves, and soot blowers are used. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Combustion Equipment Describe the parts and operation of t ypical gas burners, oil burners, and stokers. Air Flow Ident ify some devices used to improve the efficiency of boiler operations. Explain how air flow is produced in a typical boiler. Explain why changes in boiler load require fuel and air adjustments. State why it is necessary to maintain a proper fuel-to-air rat io in a boiler. Describe the parts and basic operation of a t ypical rot ary air heater. Explain how rotary air heaters improve efficiency of boiler operations. Water and Steam Flow Explain how natural circulat ion occurs in a typical water tube boiler. Explain how controlled circulation occurs in a typical water tube boiler. Describe an economizer, why it is used, and how it improves efficiency. Name some devices commonly used to remove moisture from steam and how they operate.
Subjects: Combustion Equipment Gas Burners Oil Burners Stokers Air Flow Draft Fuel-t o-Air Ratio Air Heaters Water and Steam Flow Boiler Water Circulation Economizers Moisture Separat ors Course 2 of 245
Process Operations
CHEMISTRY: Basic Principles 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOCB1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the composition of matter and t he general characteristics of compounds, mixtures, and solutions. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the particles t hat make up an atom and describe two ways in which atoms form chemical bonds. They should also be able to explain what compounds and mixtures are, and how they differ from one another. In addit ion, trainees should be able t o describe what a solution is, calculate the weight s of materials in a percent-by-weight solution, and explain what a pH measurement represent s. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Chemistry Define: mat erial, matter, mass, element, at om, prot on, neutron, and elect ron. Ident ify the particles that make up an at om. Define: valence electron and ion. Describe two ways in which at oms form chemical bonds. Compounds and Mixtures Define: compound and chemical reaction. Define mixture. Explain how compounds and mixtures differ from one another. Solutions Define: solution, solute, solvent , homogeneous, and concentration. Calculate the weights of the materials in a percent-by-weight solution, given the weight of the solution and t he percentage of solute. Explain what a pH measurement represents.
Subjects: Introduction to Chemistry Composition of Matter Valence Electrons and Chemical Bonds Compounds and Mixtures Compounds Mixtures Solutions Charact eristics Percent -by-Weight pH Measurements Course 3 of 245
Process Operations
CHEMISTRY: Basic Principles 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOCB2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the principles of chemical reactions, material balancing, and organic chemistry. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to use a chemical equat ion to explain what occurs during a chemical reaction, and how combustion reactions, replacement reactions, and neutralizat ion occur. Trainees should also be able to define material balancing, and describe the basic steps involved in balancing the materials represented in a simple equat ion. In addition, trainees should be able to explain what organic chemistry is and how some organic chemicals are named. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Chemical Reactions Ident ify three common types of chemical react ions. Define: chemical equation and chemical reaction. Use a chemical equation t o explain what occurs during a simple chemical reaction. Define endothermic and exothermic in terms of their application to chemical react ions. Explain how a combust ion reaction, replacement reaction, and neut ralization reaction occur. Explain how the acidity or alkalinity of a liquid is measured. Material Balancing Explain the meaning of material balancing. Ident ify the steps involved in balancing the materials represented in a simple equation. Given the actual weight of one mat erial in a reaction, use the relative weights of the atoms in the reaction to determine the actual weights of the other materials involved. Organic Chemistry Define organic chemistry. Explain how some organic chemicals are named.
Subjects: Chemical Reactions Chemical Equat ions Combustion Reactions Replacement and Neutralization Reactions Material Balancing Steps in Material Balancing Relative and Actual Weights Organic Chemistry Basis of Organic Chemistry Naming Organic Chemicals Course 4 of 245
Process Operations
CHEMISTRY: Material Balancing (IHRDC_OM_AOCMB)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with using balanced chemical equat ions to calculate the amounts of reactants and products in process reactions. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to explain what material balancing is, verify that a chemical equation is balanced, and use a balanced equation t o calculate the amounts of reactants and products in a reaction when the weight of one reactant is given. They should also be able to identify two basic factors that can limit the product ion of a process syst em, perform material balancing for a process system when reactant supply is the limit ing factor, and perform material balancing for a system in which a specific amount of product is to be produced. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Chemical Equations Explain the meaning of material balancing. Verify that a chemical equation is balanced. Define molecular weight and explain how to calculate the weight of a molecule. Calculate the amounts of reactants and products in a reaction when given t he weight of one reactant. Limiting Factors Ident ify two basic factors that can limit the production of a process system. Convert reactant supplies expressed as total amount s int o supply rat es. Determine the limiting factor of a process system that is being operat ed to produce as much product as possible. Perform material balancing for a process system when reactant supply is the limiting fact or. Perform material balancing for a system in which a specific amount of product is to be produced.
Subjects: Chemical Equations Equations Molecular Weights Actual Weights Limiting Factors Determining the Limiting Factor Determining Reactant Amounts Course 5 of 245
Process Operations
CHEMISTRY: Reaction Rates (IHRDC_OM_AOCRR)
Overview: This interactive unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated wit h the rates at which chemical react ions occur. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe two factors that determine the rates of react ions, and the effects of temperature, pressure, concentrat ion, and surface area on reaction rates. They should also be able to describe how catalysts affect reaction rates and how t emperature and pressure affect equilibrium react ions. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Reaction Rate Factors Define react ion rate. Explain how chemical reactions occur and describe two factors that determine the rates of react ions. Describe the effects of temperature, pressure, concentration, and surface area on reaction rates. Catalysts Define catalyst. Describe how adsorption catalysts work. Explain how some catalyst s can become poisoned. Describe how catalysts work by forming an intermediate product during a reaction. Equilibrium Reactions Define equilibrium and equilibrium point . Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on an equilibrium reaction. Describe one way that products can be stabilized.
Subjects: Reaction Rate Factors Chemical React ions Effects of Variables Catalysts Adsorption-Type Cat alysts Intermediate-Type Cat alysts Equilibrium Reactions Equilibrium Temperature and Pressure Stabilizing Products Course 6 of 245
Process Operations
COMPRESSORS: Centrifugal and Axial (IHRDC_OM_AOCCA)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the parts and operation of cent rifugal and axial compressors. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the main parts and the general operation of single-stage centrifugal compressors, mult istage centrifugal compressors, and axial compressors. They should also be able to describe the functions of compressor lubrication systems, seals, bearings, and common auxiliary devices. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Compressor Types Describe the basic operation of a centrifugal compressor. Describe the basic operation of an axial compressor. Describe the components and operat ion of a single-stage centrifugal compressor. Describe the components and operat ion of a mult istage centrifugal compressor. Describe the components and operat ion of an axial compressor. System Components Describe the function of a compressor lubrication system. Describe the functions of compressor seals and a seal oil system. Describe the function of bearings. Describe how drivers and couplings are used with compressors. Describe the function of an aftercooler. Describe the function of safet y valves and receivers in compressor systems.
Subjects: Compressor Types Introduction Centrifugal Compressors Axial Compressors System Components Lubrication, Seals, and Bearings Auxiliary Devices Course 7 of 245
Process Operations
COMPRESSORS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOCIN)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the operation of compressors and compressed gas systems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe two general types of compressors and the components and operation of a typical compressed air system. They should also be able to explain the hazards and safety precautions of compressors and compressed gas systems. In addition, trainees should be able to describe the functions of systems and devices t hat are commonly used with compressors and compressed gas systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Compressors and Systems Describe two general types of compressors. Describe some characterist ics t hat all compressors share. Ident ify the component s of a typical compressed air system. Describe the operation of a typical compressed air system. Describe hazards and safet y precautions associated wit h compressors. Describe hazards and safet y precautions associated wit h compressed gas systems. System Components Describe the function of a filt er. Describe the function of an air cooling system and a water cooling system. Describe the function of a lubricat ion syst em. Describe the function of an oil separator. Describe the function of a demister. Describe the function of a dryer. Describe the function of a receiver. Describe the function of an unloader. Describe the function of safet y valves.
Subjects: Compressors and Systems Compressors Compressed Air Systems Compressor Hazards System Components Filtering, Cooling, and Lubrication System Auxiliaries Course 8 of 245
Process Operations
COMPRESSORS: Operation of Centrifugal and Axial Types (IHRDC_OM_AOCOC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the startup, operat ion, and shutdown of centrifugal and axial compressors. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the general functions of instrumentation and cont rol devices used with centrifugal and axial compressors. They should also be able to identify operat or responsibilities associated with st arting up, operating, and shutting down centrifugal and axial compressors. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Instrumentation and Control State the general feat ures of instrumentation and control devices used with centrifugal and axial compressors. Describe how instrumentation and control devices can maintain the values of a compressor's process variables. Describe how instrumentation and control devices can keep a compressor operating within a stable operat ing range. Operation Describe the general steps involved in preparing a compressor for st artup. Describe the general steps involved in warming up a compressor. Describe the general steps in starting gas flow to a compressor and bringing a compressor up to operating speed. Describe typical compressor operating checks. Describe some of the general steps involved in a compressor shutdown.
Subjects: Instrumentation and Control Functions Surge Control Operation Startup Operation and Shutdown Course 9 of 245
Process Operations
COMPRESSORS: Positive Displacement (IHRDC_OM_AOCPD)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the operation of posit ive displacement compressors. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to identify the main part s and describe the general operation of various types of reciprocating and rotary compressors. They should also be able to identify operator responsibilities associat ed with starting up, operat ing, and shutt ing down compressors. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Compressor Types Ident ify the main parts of a reciprocating compressor. Describe the general operation of a reciprocating compressor. Ident ify different types of reciprocating compressors and describe their operation. Ident ify the main parts of a typical rotary compressor. Describe the general operation of different t ypes of rotary compressors. Compressor Operations Describe general checks that should be made before a compressor is started. Describe general procedures for starting up a compressor. Describe general checks that should be made while a compressor is running. Describe general procedures for shutting down a compressor. Describe general procedures for putting a portable compressor in operation.
Subjects: Compressor Types Reciprocating Compressors Reciprocating Compressor Variations Rotary Compressors Compressor Operations Pre-Start up Checks Startup, Operation, and Shutdown Port able Compressors Course 10 of 245
Process Operations
DIAGRAMS: Basic Diagrams and Symbols 1 (IHRDC_OM_AODB1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to plant system diagrams and diagram symbols. After completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify and describe the purpose of several kinds of system diagrams, and be able to describe the information found on each type. Trainees should also be able t o identify symbols commonly used on flow diagrams, and how to use a flow diagram to trace the flow paths of a system. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types of Diagrams Ident ify and describe the purpose of equipment arrangement diagrams, elevation drawings, piping system (flow) diagrams, piping and instrument at ion diagrams (P&IDs), electrical diagrams, and legends. In general terms, describe t he informat ion found on each type of diagram. Flow Diagram Symbols Ident ify some basic symbols associated with flow diagrams. Ident ify symbols commonly used t o represent components in flow diagrams. Describe the basic operation of the components typically found in a fluid system. Reading Diagram Symbols Ident ify the four basic parts of a system. Ident ify the component s of a typical fluid system and relate them to their symbols and functions.
Subjects: Types of Diagrams Equipment Location Diagrams System Diagrams Flow Diagram Symbols Tanks, Pumps, and Valves Actuators Heat Exchangers Reading Diagram Symbols Block Diagrams Flow Diagrams Course 11 of 245
Process Operations
DIAGRAMS: Basic Diagrams and Symbols 2 (IHRDC_OM_AODB2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h symbols commonly used on piping and inst rumentation diagrams (P&IDs) and electrical one-line diagrams. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to ident ify instrument symbols and line symbols used in P&IDs, describe t he types of information typically found on a legend, and use a P&ID to locate t he components of a system. They should also be able t o identify symbols used on electrical one-line diagrams. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams Ident ify instruments using an identification chart. Ident ify line and instrument symbols used in piping and instrumentation diagrams. Using a System Diagram Describe the t ypes of information typically found on a legend. Locate the components in a boiler fuel oil system by identifying the symbols used to represent them. Electrical Diagrams Ident ify symbols commonly found on one-line electrical diagrams. Trace out a typical one-line diagram and briefly describe its connect ions.
Subjects: Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams Instrument Symbols Reading a P&ID Using a System Diagram Legends Using a System Diagram Electrical Diagrams Main Transformer Section Load Center Section Course 12 of 245
Process Operations
DIAGRAMS: Flow and Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AODUF)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the use of flow diagrams and electrical one-line diagrams. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o use a flow diagram to trace the flow of materials t hrough a syst em, and use a flow diagram and a valve lineup checklist to line up valves in a system. They should also be able to use an electrical one-line diagram to learn the components and layout of an electrical system, and to determine how to isolate a piece of equipment for maintenance or repair. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Using Flow Diagrams Describe how flow diagrams can be used to become familiar with a system. Describe how flow diagrams can be used to line up valves. Describe the relationship bet ween flow diagrams and valve lineup checklists. Using Electrical Diagrams Describe how electrical one-line diagrams can be used to learn t he components and layouts of electrical systems. Describe how electrical one-line diagrams can be used to determine how to isolate equipment for maintenance and repairs.
Subjects: Using Flow Diagrams Learning a Plant System Lining Up Valves Using Electrical Diagrams Learning an Electrical System Isolating Equipment Course 13 of 245
Process Operations
DIAGRAMS: Piping and Instrumentation (IHRDC_OM_AODUI)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to make trainees familiar with the use of piping and instrument at ion diagrams (P&IDs). Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the kinds of information t hat can be found on a P&ID and explain why t his information is useful. They should also be able to explain how to use P&IDs to troubleshoot system problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Describe the t ypes of information provided by P&IDs and explain why this information is useful. Describe how a P&ID can be used to become familiar with t he instrumentation associat ed with a system. Troubleshooting Describe how P&IDs can be useful in t roubleshooting problems.
Subjects: Introduction Information on P&IDs Learning a Syst em Troubleshooting Water Treatment System Problem De-Aerat or Syst em Problem Course 14 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AODBP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles of t he distillat ion process. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how changes in the state of matter relate to the distillation process and how these changes are affect ed by temperature and pressure. They should also be able to explain how a liquid mixture can be separat ed into lighter and heavier components by distillation, and be able to describe the basic operation of single-batch distillation systems, successive-batch dist illation systems, and continuous distillat ion syst ems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Principles of Distillation Explain how changes in t emperature and pressure affect the boiling point of a substance. Define distillation. Explain how changes in t he state of matter relate t o the dist illation process. Define: sensible heat, initial boiling point , boiling range, final boiling point, and latent heat . Define: vapor pressure, ext ernal pressure, partial pressure, and relat ive volatilit y. Explain the relationship bet ween vapor pressure and the following: boiling point, temperature, and external pressure. Distillation Processes Explain how a liquid mixture can be separated int o light er and heavier components by distillation. Describe the characteristics of liquid mixtures that make distillat ion possible. Describe the basic operation of single-batch, successive-batch, and continuous distillation systems.
Subjects: Principles of Distillation States of Matter Heat Pressure Distillation Processes Separation of Liquid Mixtures Batch Continuous Course 15 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Basic System Components and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AODBS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic components and operation of a typical distillation system. Aft er completing t he unit , trainees should be able to describe the functions of the major components of a distillat ion system and describe how the distillation process occurs in a distillation tower. They should also be able to explain how refluxing and reboiling affect product purity and how bubble caps and packing affect t he distillat ion process in distillation towers. In addit ion, trainees should be able t o explain why it is important to monitor and cont rol distillation tower temperatures and pressures. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Distillation System List and explain major equipment functions in a typical distillation system. Define overhead product , bot toms product, and boil-up. Describe the basic operation of a dist illation tower. Explain how a typical sieve-type distillat ion tower operates. List and explain the purpose of t he three sections of a distillation t ower. Define fractionat ion. Explain how refluxing and reboiling help minimize overlap. Define ext ernal reflux and int ernal reflux. Explain how packed t owers differ from distillation towers using bubble caps. Compare and contrast the operation of bubble caps and packing grids. Temperature and Pressure Describe adjustments made when product purity is unacceptable. Ident ify critical temperature point s in a distillat ion tower. Describe the effects of incorrect t emperatures at various points in a distillation tower. Explain what a t emperature gradient is and how it is measured. Explain how temperatures can be controlled in a basic system. Ident ify critical pressure points in a basic system. Describe the effects of incorrect pressures in a system.
Subjects: Basic Distillation System Introduction t o Dist illation Systems Tower Operat ion Refluxing and Reboiling Bubble Caps and Packing Temperature and Pressure Temperature Pressure Course 16 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Control Systems (IHRDC_OM_AODCS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles of operation of syst ems t hat control distillation processes. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to describe typical material balance and energy balance control loops and explain how these cont rol loops respond to process disturbances. They should also be able to describe how a distillation t ower is operated to maintain product specifications. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Balances Explain what is meant by material balance and identify typical variables. Explain what is meant by energy balance and ident ify typical variables. Describe typical material balance and energy balance control loops. Define st eady state operation and process disturbance. Describe how a typical distillat ion tower cont rol system responds to a process dist urbance (change in feed composition). Process Temperatures Describe how a typical distillat ion tower cont rol system responds to an increase in bott om t emperature. Explain how the following conditions affect the composition of a distillation system's overhead and bott om products: increase in bott om t emperature, decrease in bottom temperat ure, and change in external reflux. Product Composition Explain the difference between direct and indirect composition measurements. Explain what is meant by product giveaway. Describe how a typical distillat ion tower is operat ed to maintain product specificat ions. Explain what is meant by process lag.
Subjects: Balances Material Balance Energy Balance Process Disturbances Process Temperatures Bottom Temperat ure External Reflux Product Composition Product Specifications Maintaining Specifications Course 17 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Operating Problems (IHRDC_OM_AODOP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h some of the problems that can occur during the operation of distillation systems. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe problems that can occur when the amount of reflux going back t o the column is incorrect, and when the reboiler in a distillation system is operated improperly. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Feed Problems Explain the role of the feed rat e in maintaining column equilibrium. Ident ify problems t hat can occur when the feed rat e is incorrect. Describe conditions that can lead to three operating problems: overloading, flooding, and puking. Describe some mechanical causes of overloading. Explain how to identify a flooded condition in a distillation tower. Explain how a liquid flood can be broken. Explain how flooding can be prevented or controlled. Ident ify process disturbances that can result from changes in the feed to a distillat ion tower. Ident ify problems t hat can show up during startup. Reflux Problems Define reflux. Describe what can happen if the amount of reflux going back t o the column is not correct. Ident ify typical disturbances that can occur in shell and tube condensers and fin-fan condensers. Reboiler Problems Describe sources of heat input for a distillat ion tower. Explain the role of reboiler operation in maintaining column equilibrium. Ident ify problems t hat can occur when the reboiler is operated incorrectly. Ident ify typical disturbances that can occur in shell and tube reboilers and fired reboilers. Define overfract ionation.
Subjects: Feed Problems Feed Control Overloading Other Problems Reflux Problems Improper Reflux Condenser Problems Reboiler Problems Reboiler Purpose Improper Operation Overfractionation Course 18 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: System Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AODSS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic procedures for starting up and shutting down a distillation system. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe pre-startup checks that are commonly made on a vacuum distillat ion syst em and describe what takes place during a typical start up procedure. They should also be able to describe general procedures for short-term, emergency, and long-t erm shutdowns. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Startup Briefly describe the dist illation process. State the purpose of pre-startup checks. List pre-startup checks commonly made on a vacuum distillation system. Describe what takes place during a distillation startup procedure. Shutdown Describe a typical short -t erm shutdown procedure. Describe a typical emergency shutdown procedure. Describe a typical long-term shutdown procedure.
Subjects: Startup System Overview Pre-Start up Checks Startup Procedures Shutdown Short-Term Shutdown Long-Term Shutdown Course 19 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Towers, Reboilers and Condensers (IHRDC_OM_AODTR)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles of operation of dist illation towers, reboilers, and condensers. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to describe t he difference between a binary tower and a multidraw tower and explain why the physical dimensions of a tower can vary. They should also be able to explain why vacuum dist illation and azeotropic distillation are used, and how various t ypes of reboilers and condensers are used in distillation systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Towers and Processes Describe the major difference between a binary tower and a multidraw tower. Describe the basic operation of a side-draw t ower. Describe three factors that affect the physical dimensions of a distillation tower. Given the name of a dist illation tower, describe the t ower's main function. Give three basic reasons why vacuum distillation is used. Explain what an azeot ropic mixture is and identify t wo met hods of azeotropic distillation. Reboilers and Condensers Explain the difference between the following types of reboilers: forced versus natural circulat ion and external versus internal. Describe two ways that condensers can be categorized in overhead systems.
Subjects: Towers and Processes Multidraw Towers Tower Variations Vacuum Towers Azeotropic Distillat ion Reboilers and Condensers Reboilers Condensers Course 20 of 245
Process Operations
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: AC and DC Motors (IHRDC_OM_AOEAC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the operation of electric motors. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to explain the basic principles of motor operation and describe the basic operation of a simple AC motor and a simple DC mot or. They should also be able t o identify and describe the function of each part of a typical AC motor and a t ypical DC motor. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Motor Fundamentals Explain the purpose of a mot or. Explain what is meant by motor act ion. Explain the basic principles of motor operation. Define t he following terms: alternating current, rotor, and stator. Describe how a simple AC motor operates. Describe how a simple DC motor operates. Motor Parts Ident ify the parts of a typical AC motor and describe the function of each part. Ident ify the parts of a typical DC motor and describe the function of each part .
Subjects: Motor Fundamentals Basic Motor Theory AC Motor Fundamentals DC Mot or Fundamentals Motor Parts AC Motors DC Mot ors Course 21 of 245
Process Operations
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Electrical Production and Distribution (IHRDC_OM_AOEEP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the production and distribution of electric power for use by process syst ems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and explain t he funct ions of the major components in an electrical distribution system. In addit ion, trainees should be able t o describe general hazards associated with these systems and how to minimize t he possible effects of the hazards. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Power Generation In general terms, explain how power comes int o an industrial facility from an off-site source. List three sources of on-site power generation. Power Distribution Ident ify and explain the function of the major components in a t ypical elect rical power distribution system. Ident ify general hazards associated with electrical distribution systems. Describe, in general t erms, how to aid a victim of elect rical shock. Describe, in general t erms, how to extinguish an electrical fire.
Subjects: Power Generation Off-Site Power Generation On-Site Power Generation Power Distribution System Components Safety Course 22 of 245
Process Operations
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Motor Controllers and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOEMC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with what mot or controllers do and how they do it. Typical steps for st arting up, checking, and shutting down motors are also covered. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able t o explain how mot or controllers control and protect motors. They should also be able to describe how to start up a motor, perform operat ing checks on a motor, and shut down a motor. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Motor Controllers Explain the purpose of a mot or controller. Describe the features of a t ypical AC motor cont roller contactor. Describe how a motor controller can protect a motor. Using an electrical diagram, identify t he parts of a typical AC motor controller and describe the function of each part . State the purpose of overload devices. Explain the difference between thermal and magnetic overload devices. Ident ify the parts of typical overload devices and describe their operation. Motor Operation List typical st eps for starting up a motor. Describe normal operating checks associated with motor operation. List typical st eps for shutting down a motor.
Subjects: Motor Controllers Fundamentals AC Controllers Overload Devices Motor Operation Startup Operations Switches Course 23 of 245
Process Operations
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Transformers, Breakers and Switches (IHRDC_OM_AOEBS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the operation of transformers, circuit breakers, and various t ypes of switches. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to explain the principles of transformer operat ion, ident ify some of the basic components of a transformer, and describe checks that are generally made during a transformer inspection. They should also be able t o describe the general operation of a circuit breaker, explain how to reset a tripped circuit breaker and rack out a circuit breaker, and describe the basic operation of pushbotton switches and rotary switches. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Transformers Explain the function of a transformer. Describe, in general t erms, how a transformer works. Ident ify and describe some of the basic components of transformers. Describe checks that should be made when a transformer is inspected. Breakers and Switches Describe the general operation of a circuit breaker. List general steps associat ed with resett ing a circuit breaker that has tripped. List general steps associat ed with racking out a circuit breaker. Describe the general function of a switch. Explain how different types of pushbotton switches and rotary switches operate.
Subjects: Transformers Operating Principles Transformer Components Transformer Inspection Breakers and Switches Circuit Breaker Operat ion Reset ting and Racking Out Switches Course 24 of 245
Process Operations
EQUIPMENT DRIVE COMPONENTS: Couplings (IHRDC_OM_AOEBP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the general operation of equipment drive components, in particular, couplings and clutches. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the general function of equipment drive components and some general operator checks and safet y concerns related t o equipment drive components. They should also be able to identify and describe various types of couplings and a typical clutch, as well as describe common operator checks and concerns that apply to these part icular equipment drive components. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Explain what equipment drive components are and st at e some of their functions. Describe general operator checks and safety concerns related to drive components. Explain why different types of drive components may be used t ogether in some instances. Describe basic operating characteristics that affect the operation of rotating equipment and define t he following terms: endplay, torque, torque surge, and shock load. Couplings Explain what a coupling is and describe its general function. Ident ify and describe some commonly used fixed speed couplings. Describe common operat or checks and concerns that apply t o fixed speed couplings. Explain what a variable speed coupling is, and describe it s general function. Define slip. Ident ify and describe some commonly used variable speed couplings. Describe common operat or checks and concerns that apply t o variable speed couplings. Clutches Explain what a clutch is, and its general function. Describe one type of disc clutch. Describe some general operator checks and concerns that apply to a typical clutch.
Subjects: Introduction Drive Components Charact eristics Couplings Fixed Speed Couplings Variable Speed Couplings Clutches Clutch Fundamentals Operator Checks Course 25 of 245
Process Operations
EQUIPMENT DRIVE COMPONENTS: Gear, Belt and Chain Drives (IHRDC_OM_AOEGB)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the operation of gear drives, belt drives, and chain drives. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the general function of gear drives, belt drives, and chain drives, and explain how each of these equipment drive component s operates to transfer power from a driver t o a piece of driven equipment. They should also be able to describe operator checks that are commonly performed on gear drives, belt drives, and chain drives. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Gears Explain what a gear drive is, and its general function. Ident ify the major component s of a typical gearbox. Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to gear drives. Belts and Chains Explain what a belt is and describe its general function. Describe typical single and multiple V-belt drives. Explain what a chain drive is and its general function. Describe a typical chain drive and some common ways t hat chain drives are lubricated. Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to belt drives. Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to chain drives.
Subjects: Gears Function Operator Checks Belts and Chains Belt Drives Chain Drives Operator Checks Course 26 of 245
Process Operations
EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION: Lubricants and Bearings (IHRDC_OM_AOELB)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the types of lubricant s and bearings used in indust rial facilities. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to explain how lubricants reduce friction, describe the characteristics of oil and grease, and describe applicat ions in which oils and greases are used as lubricants. Trainees should also be able to name several solid lubricant s, and give an example of a synthetic lubricant. In addition, trainees should be able to describe sleeve bearings, rolling element bearings, and radial loads and thrust loads on shafts and bearings. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Oils and Greases Define friction and explain how lubricants reduce it. Define viscosit y and describe the effect of temperature on it. Define oil and explain when it is a bett er lubricant than grease. Define grease and describe its consist ency and how it is indicat ed. Describe when grease is a better lubricant than oil. Solids, Additives, and Synthetics List three solid lubricants. Explain how extreme-pressure lubricants protect gears. Explain why lubricant oxidation is harmful. Name two harmful substances formed from lubricant oxidation. State a function of detergents and dispersants in lubricants. Name a synthetic lubricant. Bearings Describe lubricant action in sleeve bearings. Describe how rolling element s help reduce frict ion. Describe thrust loads and radial loads on shafts and bearings.
Subjects: Oils and Greases Friction Oil Grease Solids, Additives, and Synthetics Solid Lubricants Additives and Synthetics Bearings Sleeve Bearings Rolling Element Bearings Course 27 of 245
Process Operations
EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION: Using Lubricants (IHRDC_OM_AOEUL)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h some of the methods and devices used t o lubricate equipment components such as bearings. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the use of hand grease guns, pneumatic grease guns, grease cups, and centralized lubricators. They should also be able to explain the basic operation of drip-feed oilers, oil baths, bottle oilers, ring oilers, and circulating oil systems. In addit ion, trainees should be able t o describe the use of cont act seals, labyrinth seals, and mechanical seals, and to describe how valve packing is lubricated. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Lubricating with Grease Describe two ways in which hand grease guns can be filled. Explain why bearing housings should be checked for overheating before greasing. Describe how to grease a bearing with a drain hole. Describe a pneumatic grease gun. Name two types of automat ic grease lubricators. Lubricating with Oil List four items on a typical lubrication schedule or chart. Name two ways that oil is dispensed from large drums. Describe the operation of a drip-feed oiler. Explain how an oil bath lubricates bearings and gears. Name three ways to check oil level. Explain how a bottle oiler maintains constant oil level. Explain how a ring oiler works. Describe a typical circulating oil syst em. List three things to check in a circulating oil system. Seals and Packing State two reasons for using seals. Define: contact seals, labyrint h seals, and mechanical seals. Explain why a noticeable amount of leakage from a seal can be harmful. Explain how valve packing prevents leakage. Explain why grease guns and lubricat ors are used on valves.
Subjects: Lubricating with Grease Grease Guns Automat ic Grease Lubricators Lubricating with Oil Lubrication Schedules Lubricating Devices Circulating Oil Systems Seals and Packing Seals Packing Lubrication Course 28 of 245
Process Operations
FURNACES: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOFIN)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic concepts associated wit h furnace operation. After completing the unit, trainees should be able to ident ify the major parts of a furnace and describe, in general terms, how a furnace produces heat. They should also be able to explain how heat transfer occurs in a furnace, and how air, combustion gases, and process fluid moves through different t ypes of furnaces. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Fundamentals Ident ify the major parts of a furnace. Ident ify the major furnace systems. Explain how a furnace produces heat. Combustion State the requirements for combust ion. Ident ify three types of heat t ransfer and how they occur in a furnace. Furnace Flow Paths Define draft. Describe the basic operating principles of natural draft furnaces, forced draft furnaces, and balanced draft furnaces. Explain how draft is controlled in a natural draft furnace. Explain how process fluid circulates in a furnace. Ident ify problems associated with improper process fluid flow.
Subjects: Fundamentals Components Operation Combustion Fundamentals Heat Transfer Furnace Flow Paths Draft Process Fluid Course 29 of 245
Process Operations
FURNACES: Operating Conditions (IHRDC_OM_AOFOC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h general operat or responsibilities associated with operating a furnace. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to identify instrumentation used to monitor furnace temperature cont rol systems and process fluid control systems. They should also be able to identify conditions t hat should be checked during furnace operations, and explain how to detect and respond to abnormal condit ions. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Instrumentation and Control Ident ify the instrumentation used to monitor furnace operating conditions. Describe the basic operating principles of furnace temperature control systems and process fluid control systems. Inspection and Adjustments Ident ify conditions that should be inspected during furnace operation. Explain how to detect burner problems and make the appropriate burner adjustments. Abnormal Conditions Explain how to detect and respond to these furnace air flow problems: air leaks, insufficient air flow, and afterburning. Explain how to operate a furnace at reduced firing rates. Explain how to detect and respond to freeze-ups in the fuel supply system and process fluid system.
Subjects: Instrumentation and Control Instrument at ion and Process Variables Control Syst ems Inspection and Adjustments Furnace Inspect ion Burner Adjust ment s Abnormal Conditions Air Flow Problems Fuel System Problems Process Fluid Problems Course 30 of 245
Process Operations
FURNACES: Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AOFSS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic procedures for starting up and shutting down a furnace. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe basic procedures for preparing a furnace for startup, establishing the flow of process fluid, and lighting the burners. They should also be able to describe general considerat ions and basic procedures associated with planned furnace shutdowns and unplanned, or emergency, furnace shutdowns. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Startup Describe the major operator responsibilities involved in preparing furnace startup. Explain how and why a furnace is purged. Describe how to establish the flow of process fluid in a furnace. Describe how to light gas burners, oil burners, and combinat ion burners. Describe a typical startup procedure for natural draft and balanced draft furnaces. Shutdown Describe a typical planned shutdown procedure. Ident ify furnace conditions that may require an emergency, or unplanned shutdown. Ident ify typical emergency shutdown systems and equipment.
Subjects: Startup Preparations Establishing Flow Lighting Burners Shutdown Planned Shut down Emergency Shut down Course 31 of 245
Process Operations
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Condensers and Reboilers (IHRDC_OM_AOHCR)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic operation of condensers and reboilers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the function and operation of a typical condenser, basic procedures for st arting up and shutting down a condenser, and some operator checks that are typically performed during condenser operation. They should also be able to explain the operation of kettle-type and thermosiphon reboilers, and identify some operator responsibilities associated with reboiler operation. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Condensers Describe the function of condensers. Describe the operation of a typical condenser. Describe the st artup procedure for a t ypical condenser. Describe a general condenser shutdown procedure. Describe some checks made during the operation of a condenser. Reboilers Describe how a kettle-t ype reboiler operates. Describe how a thermosiphon reboiler operates. Describe some operator responsibilit ies associated with reboiler operation.
Subjects: Condensers Condenser Operation Condenser Start ups and Shut downs Operator Checks Reboilers Kettle-Type Reboilers Thermosiphon Reboilers Operator Responsibilities Course 32 of 245
Process Operations
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Cooling Towers (IHRDC_OM_AOHCT)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic operation of a cooling water system and various t ypes of cooling t owers. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o explain how cooling occurs in a cooling tower, and describe the general design and operation of natural-draft and mechanical-draft cooling towers. They should also be able t o describe general procedures for shutting down and starting up one cell of a multicell cooling tower. In addition, trainees should be able to describe operator checks that are typically performed on cooling t owers, t he effects of contaminant s on cooling water, and how chemicals can be safely added to cooling water systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Describe the operation of a basic cooling wat er system. Describe what occurs in the tower during t he cooling process. Describe the general operation of a natural-draft cooling tower and the t wo types of mechanical-draft cooling t owers: induced-draft towers and forced-draft towers. Operation Describe a typical shutdown and startup procedure for one cell of a mult icell cooling tower. Describe typical operator checks for cooling towers. Chemistry Explain what suspended and dissolved solids are and how they affect a cooling water system. Explain how problems caused by suspended and dissolved solids can be minimized. Explain what dissolved gases and micro-organisms are, how they affect cooling water systems, and how their effects can be minimized. Describe ways chemicals are added to cooling water systems. Describe precautions when working with hazardous chemicals.
Subjects: Introduction Cooling Systems Cooling Tower Design Operation Cell Shutdown and Startup Operator Checks Chemistry Cooling Wat er Contamination Chemical Addition Course 33 of 245
Process Operations
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOHIN)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to basic principles of heat t ransfer and the component s and operating principles of shell and tube, and plate heat exchangers. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to explain what heat is, and describe three ways t hat heat transfer can occur in a heat exchanger. They should also be able to describe t he basic operation and components of a shell and t ube heat exchanger, and identify auxiliary equipment that is commonly used with heat exchangers. Finally, trainees should be able to explain how a plate heat exchanger operat es and identify its components. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Principles Define heat. Explain heat transfer by conduction, convection, and radiation. Explain how heat is transferred in a typical heat exchanger. Explain how various factors can affect heat transfer. Shell and Tube Describe the operation of typical shell and tube heat exchangers. Explain how heat exchangers are used as coolers and heaters. Describe the functions of the auxiliary components used with heat exchangers. Describe the different flow paths fluids take in shell and tube heat exchangers. Plate Describe the basic operation of a plate heat exchanger. Ident ify the component s of a typical plate heat exchanger.
Subjects: Principles Heat and Heat Transfer Heat Transfer Factors Shell and Tube Basic Operation Auxiliary Equipment Flow Paths Plate Operation Components Course 34 of 245
Process Operations
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Operation of Shell and Tube Types (IHRDC_OM_AOHOS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the startup, operation, and shut down of shell and tube heat exchangers. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe general procedures for the startup and shutdown of a shell and tube heat exchanger and ident ify some of the operator responsibilit ies associated with their operation. Trainees should also be able to identify basic operating problems that may be associated with shell and tube heat exchangers, and explain how they can be corrected. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Startup and Shutdown Describe a general procedure for starting up a shell and tube heat exchanger. Describe a general procedure for shutting down a shell and tube heat exchanger. Describe general operator responsibilities associated with the operation of a shell and tube heat exchanger. Heat Exchanger Problems Explain what fouling is and how it can be correct ed. Explain what leakage is and how it can be correct ed. Explain what air or vapor binding is and how it can be corrected.
Subjects: Startup and Shutdown Startup Shutdown Operator Responsibilities Heat Exchanger Problems Fouling Tube Leaks Air and Vapor Binding Course 35 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Automatic Process Control 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOIA1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with automatic control of process systems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the functions of t he four basic element s of an automatic process control system and explain how a process dist urbance can affect a process control system. They should also be able to explain how feedback control and feedforward control can be used in process control systems. In addition, trainees should be able to explain how resistance, capacit ance, dead time, and lag time can affect a process cont rol system. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Control Methods State the function of a process control system. Describe the functions of the four basic elements of an automated process control system. Explain what a process disturbance is and how it can affect a process control syst em. Describe feedback and feedforward cont rol and explain how they can be used in a process control system. Process Dynamics Define resist ance and capacit ance. Define dead time and lag time. Explain how resistance, capacitance, dead t ime, and lag t ime can affect a process control syst em.
Subjects: Control Methods Automat ic Control Syst ems Feedback Control Feedforward Control Process Dynamics Process Charact eristics System Responses Course 36 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Automatic Process Control 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOIA2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h control modes used with automatic process control syst ems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe two-position control, proport ional cont rol, reset control, rate cont rol, and PID control and explain how each of these control modes works in a control system. They should also be able to explain how proport ional band applies to a control system. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Two-Position and Proportional Describe two-position control and explain how it works in a control system. Describe proportional control and explain how it works in a control system. Explain how proportional band applies to a control system. Reset, Rate, and PID Describe reset control and explain how it works in a control system. Describe rate cont rol and explain how it works in a control system. Describe PID control and explain how it works in a control system.
Subjects: Two-Position and Proportional Two-Position Cont rol Proportional Control Proportional Band Reset, Rate, and PID Reset Control Rate Control PID Control Course 37 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Measurement of Concentration (IHRDC_OM_AOIMC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some informat ion about analytical variables and to some methods for measuring concentration in liquids and gases. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to define five analytical variables that are commonly measured in plants, and explain how and why analytical variables are measured. They should also be able to describe the basic operat ion of several different types of analyzers that can be used t o measure liquid and gas concentrations. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Analytical Measurement State the general purpose of analytical measurements. Define: concentration, density, clarity, humidity, moisture, and analyzer. Liquid Concentration Analysis Explain what pH measurements represent. Explain how a pH scale is structured and how t o interpret pH values. Describe the basic operation of a typical pH analyzer and a typical electrical conductivity measuring device. Gas Concentration Analysis Describe the basic operation of a paramagnetic oxygen analyzer, a thermal conductivity gas analyzer, and a chromatograph.
Subjects: Introduction to Analytical Measurement Analytical Variables Measuring Analytical Variables Liquid Concentration Analysis What is Concentration? pH Measurements pH Analyzer Operation Conductivity Measurements Gas Concentration Analysis Oxygen Concentration Measurement Non-Oxygen Gas Concentration Measurement Complex Gas Concentration Measurement Course 38 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Measurement of Density, Clarity and Moisture (IHRDC_OM_AOIDC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some devices that can be used to measure density, clarity, and moisture. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to define various terms associated wit h density, clarity, and moisture, and describe t he basic operation of devices used to measure density, clarit y, humidity, and moist ure. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Density Measurement Define density. Explain the difference between density and specific gravity. Describe the basic operation of a hydrometer. Describe the use of a bubbler system to measure density. Describe the operation of a radioactive density analyzer. Clarity Measurement Define clarity. Describe the basic operation of a colorimeter, a turbidity meter, and an opacity meter. Moisture Measurement Define humidity and moisture. Describe the basic operation of a sling psychromet er. Describe the basic operation of a wet and dry bulb recording psychromet er. Describe the basic operation of a hygrometer. Describe the basic operation of an infrared moisture analyzer.
Subjects: Density Measurement Density and Specific Gravity Hydrometers Density Bubbler System Radioact ive Density Analyzer Clarity Measurement Principles of Clarity Analysis Colorimeter Turbidity Meter Opacity Meter Moisture Measurement Humidity and Moisture Measuring Humidit y Measuring Moisture Course 39 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Measurement of Level and Flow (IHRDC_OM_AOIML)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to instruments that measure level and flow. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able t o explain what level is and describe the basic operation of various direct and indirect level measurement devices. They should also be able to explain what fluid flow, flow rate, and total flow are and describe some common examples of direct and indirect flow measurements. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Level Measurement Define: level, cont inuous level measurement, and single-point level detection. Describe basic operation of t he following level measurement devices: plumb bob, gauge glass, float and tape, and conductivit y probes. Describe the basic operation of these level measurement devices: pressure gauge, bubbler system, and D/P cell. Flow Measurement Define fluid flow, flow rate, and total flow. List basic units of measurement for flow rate. Describe common examples of direct flow measurement. Describe common examples of indirect flow measurement.
Subjects: Level Measurement Principles of Level Measurement Direct Level Measurement Devices Indirect Level Measurement Devices Flow Measurement Principles of Flow Measurement Direct Flow Measurement Devices Indirect Flow Measurement Devices Course 40 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Measurement of Pressure and Temperature (IHRDC_OM_AOIMP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the fundamental aspects of process variable measurement and to some of t he basic instruments used for pressure and temperature measurement. After completing this unit, trainees should be able t o describe the function of process instrument at ion and how t o obt ain accurate readings from instruments such as gauges, indicators, and recorders. They should also be able to explain what pressure and temperat ure are and how they are expressed, and t he operat ion of several pressure and temperature measuring devices. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Measuring Process Variables State the general function of process instrumentation. List four process variables monitored by process instrumentation. Explain how parallax can affect an instrument reading. Explain how to use a multiplication factor when reading an instrument. Describe how to read gauges, indicators, recorders, and digital met ers. Pressure Measurement Define pressure in t erms of solids, liquids, and gases. Describe three types of scales used to indicat e pressure. List basic units of measurement for pressure. Describe three types of manometers. Describe the basic operation of Bourdon tube, bellows, and diaphragm pressure elements. Describe the basic operation of a pressure transmitter. Temperature Measurement Explain the general relationship between heat and temperature. List basic units of measurement for temperature. Describe the basic operation of a fluid thermometer, bimetallic thermometer, thermocouple, and Resist ance Temperature Detector (RTD).
Subjects: Measuring Process Variables Process Variables and Inst rumentation Reading Instruments Pressure Measurement Pressure and Pressure Scales Manometers Pressure Elements and Transmitt ers Temperature Measurement Temperature and Temperature Scales Thermometers Thermocouples and RTDs Measurement of Level and Flow Course 41 of 245
Process Operations
INDUSTRIAL MATH: Algebra (IHRDC_OM_AOIAL)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic concepts of algebra. Aft er completing t his unit, t rainees should be able to define t erms commonly associated with the use of algebra, isolate an unknown in an equat ion, and use t he processes of distribution and factoring. They should also be able to explain what ratios and proportions are, and the difference between a direct proport ion and an inverse proportion. Finally, trainees should be able to use a calculator to solve math problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Algebra State the difference between arithmetic and algebraic operations. Define t he terms: constant, unknown, variable, and equation. Describe how equations are used to solve an arithmetic or algebraic problem. Explain how to maintain an equation's balance. Describe how the unknown in an equat ion can be isolated. Describe the operation of dist ribut ion. Describe the operation of fact oring. Ratios and Proportions Explain what a ratio is and how ratios can be expressed. Explain the difference between a direct proport ion and an inverse proportion. Calculators Explain how to use a calculator.
Subjects: Introduction to Algebra Basic Principles Isolating an Unknown Distribution Factoring Ratios and Proportions Calculators Parts of a Calculator Types of Logic Course 42 of 245
Process Operations
INDUSTRIAL MATH: Basic Operation 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOIB1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic principles of addition, subt raction, multiplication, and division. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to add, subt ract, and multiply numbers in vertical columns, and how to do short and long division. They should also be able t o explain powers of numbers and roots of numbers, as well as shortcuts for multiplying and dividing with multiples of ten. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Addition and Subtraction Define number line. Describe the basic principles of addition and subtract ion. Describe the base 10 number system. Describe how to add and subtract numbers in vertical columns. Multiplication Describe the basic principles of mult iplicat ion. Explain how to use a multiplication table. Describe how to multiply numbers in vertical columns. Describe a shortcut for multiplying with multiples of t en. Explain powers of numbers. Explain root s of numbers. Division Describe the basic principles of division. Explain how short division is done. Explain how long division is done. Describe a shortcut for dividing with multiples of ten. Describe a shortcut for dividing with powers of numbers.
Subjects: Addition and Subtraction Number Line Addition in Vertical Columns Subtraction in Vertical Columns Multiplication Principles of Multiplication Multiplication in Vertical Columns Powers and Roots Division Principles of Division Long Division Course 43 of 245
Process Operations
INDUSTRIAL MATH: Basic Operation 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOIB2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic mathematical operations involving signed numbers, averaging, rates, fract ions, decimals, and conversions. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to perform basic mathematical operations with signed numbers, perform combined operations in the proper order, find the average of a group of numbers, and calculate rates. They should also be able to add, subtract , multiply, and divide with fract ions and decimals. Finally, t rainees should be able to convert between fract ions, decimals, and percents; write numbers using scientific notation; and use conversion tables. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Math Operations Explain how to do basic math operat ions with signed numbers. Define grouping symbols. Explain the order in which combined operations are performed. Explain how to calculate averages and rates. Fractions Explain what a fraction is, and how t o add and subtract them. Describe how to get common denominators, and what a lowest common denominator is. Explain how to multiply and divide fractions. Explain how to express a fraction in simplest terms. Explain what a mixed number is, and how to convert whole and mixed numbers to fractions. Decimals and Conversions Define decimal. Describe basic math operat ions involving decimals. Describe how to convert between fractions and decimals. Describe how to write numbers using scientific notation. Explain what percents are. List how to convert between fractions, decimals, and percents. Describe conversion tables: factor-type and equivalents-type.
Subjects: Math Operations Signed Numbers Combined Operat ions Averaging Rates Fractions Add and Subtract Multiply and Divide Mixed Numbers Decimals and Conversions Decimals Number Conversions Conversion Tables Course 44 of 245
Process Operations
INDUSTRIAL MATH: Formulas, Graphs and Trends (IHRDC_OM_AOIFC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles associated with using formulas, reading and interpreting graphs, and detecting and analyzing trends. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what a formula is and how to use formulas to find areas, volumes, and volumetric flow rates. They should also be able t o describe how graphs and charts can provide information about process variables. In addition, trainees should be able to describe basic procedures for det ecting and analyzing trends. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Formulas Define formula. Describe how formulas can be used to find areas. Describe how formulas can be used to find volumes. Define flow rate. Describe how to use volumetric flow rate formulas. Graphs, Charts, and Trends Describe how graphs can provide information about process variables. Describe how charts can provide information about process variables. Describe what a t rend is and explain t he difference between expected trends and unexpected trends. Describe some basic procedures for detecting a trend. Describe some basic procedures for analyzing a trend.
Subjects: Formulas Area Volume Volumetric Flow Rate Graphs, Charts, and Trends Graphs Charts Trends Course 45 of 245
Process Operations
ON-THE-JOB-TRAINING: Implementation and Evaluation (IHRDC_OM_AOOIE)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with on-the-job training (OJT) of plant operators. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to identify qualities that an effective OJT instructor should possess, and describe considerations associat ed with scheduling, planning for, and conduct ing OJT. They should also be able to describe how t he trainee, the instructor, and the overall OJT program can be evaluated. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Implementation Ident ify qualities and characteristics of an effective OJT inst ructor. Ident ify some t raining strategies t hat an instructor can use during OJT. Describe considerations involved in scheduling OJT. Ident ify preparations that should be made before OJT is implemented. Describe met hods of conducting OJT. Describe coaching skills that an instructor can use during OJT. Evaluation Describe how a trainee's performance can be evaluat ed. Describe how on-the-job training instructors can evaluate themselves and the OJT program. Review the main steps and principles of a typical OJT program.
Subjects: Implementation The OJT Instructor Planning for OJT OJT Methods Evaluation Trainee Evaluation Program Evaluation OJT Review Course 46 of 245
Process Operations
ON-THE-JOB-TRAINING: Preparation (IHRDC_OM_AOOPR)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with on-the-job training (OJT) of plant operators. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to compare OJT and classroom training, and describe the basic steps in a formalized OJT program. They should also be able to explain how to determine specific training needs for a t rainee, and describe training materials that are commonly used for OJT. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: What is OJT? Compare OJT and classroom training. List advantages and disadvantages of OJT. Ident ify the basic steps included in a formal OJT program. Training Needs Ident ify sources of information for analyzing an operator's job. Explain what a job and task analysis is. Describe how to profile the trainee and tailor training according to individual needs. Describe how to determine training needs t hat are to be met specifically through OJT. Training Materials Explain what a performance object ive is. Describe the use of an OJT t raining checklist. Ident ify some t raining aids that can be used for OJT.
Subjects: What is OJT? OJT vs. Classroom Training Pros and Cons Basic Steps Training Needs Job and Task Analysis Trainee Profile Determining Training Methods Training Materials Object ives and Checklists Training Aids Course 47 of 245
Process Operations
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Communication (IHRDC_OM_AOOCO)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic operator responsibilities associated with int erpersonal relationships and data collection and use. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to describe t he components of a basic communication model and an operator's responsibilit ies for communicating with other plant personnel, customers, and members of the surrounding communit y. They should also be able to describe operator responsibilities associated with collecting and using written data and participating in effective shift changes. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Interpersonal Responsibilities Describe the components of a basic communicat ion model. Describe basic operator interpersonal responsibilities with the company, peers, supervisory personnel, personnel in other departments, and new operators. Ident ify the four steps in an on-the-job training program for new operators. Describe basic operator interpersonal responsibilities with customers and the communit y. Data Collection and Use Describe operator responsibilities associat ed with scheduled readings, statist ical process control (SPC) charts, sample and laboratory analysis reports and logs. Ident ify three characteristics of an effective relief.
Subjects: Interpersonal Responsibilities The Communication Model Inside the Plant Out side the Plant Data Collection and Use Writt en Dat a Oral Dat a Course 48 of 245
Process Operations
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOOTC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the general responsibilities of an operat or in an indust rial facility. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe operator responsibilities associat ed with process cont rol, safety, and communication. They should also be able to describe an outside operator's responsibilities during inspections and routine operations, and t he general responsibilities of a cont rol room operat or. They should also be able t o describe the effect s t hat changing weather condit ions have on system operation. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Overview Describe operator responsibilities associat ed with controlling a product ion process, safe operation of a facility, and fire and accident prevention. Explain why good communications are important in an industrial facility. Ident ify the types of information t hat an oncoming operator should find out during a shift change. Plant Operators Describe an outside operat or's responsibilities during inspections. Describe an outside operat or's responsibilities during routine operat ions. Describe the general responsibilities of a control room operator. Describe the effects of changing weather conditions on system operat ion.
Subjects: Overview The Operator's Role Plant Operators Out side Operators Control Room Operat ors Course 49 of 245
Process Operations
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Plant Production and Safety (IHRDC_OM_AOOPP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h operator responsibilities during routine plant production operations and for ensuring safety during all phases of plant operation. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe operator responsibilities associated wit h routine production dut ies, prevent ive maintenance, and troubleshooting. They should also be able t o describe operat or safety responsibilities for normal and abnormal operations and during scheduled st artups and shutdowns. In addition, t hey should be able to describe the operator's role with respect to permit procedures and government regulations. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Production Describe operator responsibilities associat ed with routine product ion duties, data interpretation, waste disposal, and vapor emissions monit oring. Describe operator responsibilities associat ed with prevent ive maintenance. Describe operator responsibilities associat ed with troubleshoot ing. Safety Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with normal plant conditions. Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with abnormal plant conditions. Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with scheduled plant st artups and shutdowns. Describe the operator's role in lockout/tagout procedures and confined space procedures. Explain, in simple t erms, the purposes of t he following regulations: HAZCOM, HAZWOPER, and SARA III.
Subjects: Production Operator Duties Prevent ive Maintenance and Troubleshooting Safety Normal and Abnormal Conditions Startups and Shutdowns Permit s and Regulat ions Course 50 of 245
Process Operations
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Trends, Maintenance and Emergencies (IHRDC_OM_AOOIM)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic operator responsibilities associated with trend analysis, equipment maintenance, and emergency situat ions. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe ways to detect and analyze trends, explain how work orders are used, and describe how to perform some minor maintenance tasks. They should also be able t o explain how operators can prepare for emergency sit uations and describe operator responsibilities during emergencies. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Trends Describe how trends can be detect ed. Describe a four-step approach to analyzing trends. Maintaining Equipment Explain the purpose of work orders. Describe how valve packing can be adjusted. Describe how to safely reset a t ripped circuit breaker. Describe how to change a strainer basket in a duplex strainer. Emergency Situations Explain how operat ors can prepare for emergency situat ions. Describe general operator responsibilities during emergency situations. Describe general operator responsibilities during fire emergency situations.
Subjects: Trends Trend Detection Trend Analysis Maintaining Equipment Work Orders Operator Tasks Emergency Situations Preparing for Emergencies Responding t o Emergencies Course 51 of 245
Process Operations
PIPING AND AUXILIARIES: Basic Components and Functions (IHRDC_OM_AOPAB)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h some of the basic components commonly found in piping systems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o state t he purpose of piping and pipe fittings, and be able to list some common types of pipe fittings. They should also be able to describe devices t hat are used to accommodat e the weight and movement of piping, and to explain how insulation and heat tracing help t o control temperatures in piping systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Pipes and Pipe Fittings State the purpose of piping. State the purpose of pipe fittings. Describe the following types of pipe fitt ings: nipple, coupling, union, flange, elbow, t ee, Y, bell reducer, bushing, plug, and cap. Pipe Weight and Movement Explain why piping moves and why this movement needs to be controlled. State the functions of pipe hangers and supports. State the functions of expansion joints and expansion loops. Insulation and Heat Tracing Explain why piping is insulat ed. Describe how steam and electrical heat tracing met hods work.
Subjects: Pipes and Pipe Fittings Pipes and Connections Types of Pipe Fit tings Pipe Weight and Movement Pipe Supports Expansion Devices Insulation and Heat Tracing Insulation Heat Tracing Course 52 of 245
Process Operations
PIPING AND AUXILIARIES: System Components and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOPAS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h some of the auxiliary components commonly found in piping systems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the function and operation of rupture discs, relief valves, safety valves, and some common t ypes of steam traps. They should also be able to describe basic procedures for draining liquid systems and some typical operator checks for fluid systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Protective Devices Describe the function and operation of a rupt ure disc. Describe the function and operation of a relief valve. Describe the function and operation of a safet y valve. Steam Traps Describe the function of a steam t rap. Describe the operation of the following t ypes of mechanical st eam traps: float traps and inverted bucket traps. Describe the operation of a thermostatic steam trap. Describe some typical operator checks for steam traps. System Operation Describe basic procedures for draining liquid systems. Describe basic procedures for filling liquid systems. Describe typical operator checks for fluid systems.
Subjects: Protective Devices Rupture Discs Relief Valves Safety Valves Steam Traps Mechanical Steam Traps Thermostatic St eam Traps Operator Checks System Operation Draining Liquid Systems Filling Liquid Systems Operator Checks Course 53 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Electrical Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AOPBC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic principles associated with the parts and operation of electrical circuits. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify the parts of a basic circuit, describe the relationships bet ween volt age, current, and resistance in a circuit, explain how current flows through series circuits and parallel circuits, describe t he basic operation of transformers, fuses, circuit breakers, and solenoids, and explain how volt meters and ammeters can help operators detect electrical problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Circuits List the parts of a basic circuit . Explain how Ohm's Law describes the relationships between current, voltage, and resistance in a circuit. Explain the basic difference between series circuits and parallel circuit s with respect to current flow. Describe the basic operation of a transformer. Explain the difference between a st ep-up transformer and a step-down transformer. Protection and Indicators State the general function of fuses and circuit breakers. Describe the basic operation of a fuse. Describe the basic operation of a circuit breaker. Describe the basic operation of a solenoid. Explain how volt meters and ammeters can help personnel spot electrical problems before equipment damage occurs.
Subjects: Basic Circuits Parts of a Circuit Ohm's Law Series and Parallel Circuits Transformers Protection and Indicators Prot ective Equipment Volt meters and Ammeters Course 54 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Electrical Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOPBE)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles of electricity and the basic operation of electric motors. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to explain what electricity is, and how it can be produced by chemical action, heat, light, and magnetic effects. They should also be able to describe t he basic operation of a DC motor, a single-phase AC motor, and a three-phase AC mot or. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Electricity Define t he following terms: electrical pot ential, current, and voltage. Describe three sources of electrical pot ential: chemical act ion, heat, and light. List the three element s necessary to create an electrical potent ial using magnetic effects. Recognize and describe a sine wave. Explain the basic differences between single-phase power and three-phase power. Electric Motors Describe basic motor action. Describe the principle of operation of a DC mot or. Describe the principle of operation of an AC motor.
Subjects: Electricity What is Electricit y? Chemical Act ion, Heat, and Light Electricit y, Magnetism, and Alternating Current Electric Motors Basic Motor Operation DC Mot or Operation AC Motor Operat ion Course 55 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOPBP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to scientific principles associated with units of measurement and with force and motion. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to identify fundamental units of measurement for length, time, and mass, and identify fundamental units of measurement for pressure, temperature, flow, and level. They should also be able to explain the relationship bet ween force and motion and describe t he three laws of force and motion. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Unit of Measurement Ident ify fundamental units of measurement for length, time, and mass. Ident ify fundamental units of measurement for t he process variables pressure, temperature, flow, and level. Force and Motion Explain the relationship bet ween force and motion. State the t hree laws of force and motion. Define inertia. Define acceleration.
Subjects: Units of Measurement Fundamental Dimensions Process Variable Measurements Force and Motion Introduction Laws of Force and Motion Course 56 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Fluid Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPFS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the characteristics, components, and operation of fluid systems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o explain, in general terms, what a plant system is, and what a fluid is. They should also be able to explain the basic layout of a liquid system and describe energy conversions in a liquid system. Trainees should also be able to describe the basic parts of a compressed air system and the basic operation of several gas and vapor system devices. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Liquid Systems Explain, in general t erms, what a plant system is. Explain what a fluid is. Describe the effects of pressure changes on a static fluid. Describe the four basic parts of a liquid syst em. Describe the effects of energy conversions on a fluid under steady-state conditions. Describe some of the energy conversions t hat take place in liquid syst ems. Gas and Vapor Systems Describe the basic part s of a typical compressed air system. Describe the operation of a jet pump. Describe the operation of a nozzle. Describe the operation of a condenser.
Subjects: Liquid Systems Systems and Fluids Basic System Layout Energy Conversions Gas and Vapor Systems Compressed Air System Gas and Vapor System Devices Course 57 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Forces and Machines (IHRDC_OM_AOPLM)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to scientific principles associated with applied forces and the operation of basic machines. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o define work, power, and efficiency, and explain t he mechanical advantage of the inclined plane and the lever. They should also be able to explain the hydraulic principle and the relationship between friction and the operation of machines. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Work, Power, and Efficiency Define work and explain its relat ionship to energy. Define power. Explain why efficiency is important to plant operation. Basic Machines Define mechanical advant age. Explain the mechanical advant age of the inclined plane. Explain the mechanical advant age of the lever. Explain the hydraulic principle and give examples of where it applies. Discuss some of the effect s of friction.
Subjects: Work, Power, and Efficiency Work Power Efficiency Basic Machines The Inclined Plane The Lever The Hydraulic Principle Friction Course 58 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Gases and Flowing Liquids (IHRDC_OM_AOPGF)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h general concepts associated with the properties of gases and flowing liquids. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to describe the major properties of gases and explain how these properties are related. They should also be able to explain how pressure can be measured and the effects of flow, velocity, and friction on t he head pressure of a liquid. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Gas Properties Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on gases. Explain how Boyle's Law and Charles' Law relate to the pressure and volume of gases. Explain how the General Gas Law relates to temperature, pressure and volume of a gas. Measuring Pressure Explain how at mospheric pressure can be measured. Describe the effects of pressure on a manometer. Explain how various scales can be used to measure pressure. Flowing Liquids Define: flow, flow rat e, steady-state conditions, st at ic conditions, head, and head pressure. Describe the effects of flow on pressure. Describe the effects of velocity on pressure. Describe the effects of friction on pressure.
Subjects: Gas Properties Temperature and Pressure Effect s Gas Laws Measuring Pressure Atmospheric Pressure Manometers Pressure Scales Flowing Liquids Flow and Flow Rate Effects of Flowing Liquids Course 59 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Heat (IHRDC_OM_AOPHE)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the basic principles associated with heat and heat t ransfer. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to describe some of t he effects of heat , the relationship between t emperature and thermal energy, and the Law of Energy Conservat ion. Trainees should also be able to define terms sensible heat and latent heat and to describe the effects of pressure on the t emperature at which a substance undergoes a phase change. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: What Is Heat? Describe some of the effects of heat. Describe the relationship bet ween temperature and thermal energy. Describe the Law of Energy Conservation. Phase Changes Define sensible heat and latent heat. Describe the effects of pressure on the t emperature at which a substance undergoes a phase change.
Subjects: What is Heat? Effects of Heat Temperature and Thermal Energy The Law of Energy Conservation Phase Changes Sensible Heat and Lat ent Heat Temperature and Pressure Course 60 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Heat Transfer (IHRDC_OM_AOPHT)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the fundamentals of heat transfer and the basic operation of a t ypical heat exchanger. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the effect s of a temperat ure difference on heat t ransfer and the three modes of heat transfer. They should also be able t o describe the basic operation of a shell and t ube heat exchanger and identify problems that can occur in a heat exchanger. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Heat Transfer Fundamentals Describe the effects of temperature difference on heat t ransfer. Define specific heat and give examples. Recognize the formula for heat transfer. Modes of Heat Transfer List and describe the three modes of heat transfer. Describe conduct ion heat transfer. Describe natural convect ion and forced convection. Describe how heat transfer takes place bet ween two fluids separat ed by a solid boundary. Describe what affects heat transfer between two fluids. Describe radiation heat transfer. Heat Exchanger Operation Describe the general operation of a shell and tube heat exchanger. Describe the operation of a lube oil cooler. Describe problems that can occur in heat exchangers and explain how these problems can be minimized. Describe the insulating effects of rust and scale buildup.
Subjects: Heat Transfer Fundamentals The Process of Heat Transfer Specific Heat Heat Transfer Formula Modes of Heat Transfer Conduction Convection Radiation Heat Exchanger Operation Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers Heat Exchanger Problems Course 61 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Process Dynamics and Measurement (IHRDC_OM_AOPPD)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the characteristics of dynamic process operation and with devices that are commonly used to measure process variables. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to explain what resistance and capacitance are in process systems and to describe factors that affect the response of a process system t o operating changes and process disturbances. Trainees should also be able t o describe devices that can be used to measure pressure, flow, level, and temperature. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Dynamic Operation Describe resistance and capacitance in process syst ems. Describe and give examples of system characteristics between periods of steady-state conditions when changes occur. Process Variable Measurement Describe ways t hat pressure can be measured. Describe ways t hat flow can be measured. Describe ways t hat level can be measured. Describe ways t hat temperat ure can be measured.
Subjects: Dynamic Operation Resistance and Capacitance System Response to Changes Process Variable Measurement Pressure Measurement Devices Flow Measurement Devices Level Measurement Devices Temperature Measurement Devices Course 62 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Solids and Liquids (IHRDC_OM_AOPSL)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic scientific principles that relate to solids and liquids. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the general molecular structure of solids, liquids, and gases. They should also be able to describe specific properties attributed to solids and liquids. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Forms of Matter Ident ify the three forms of matter and explain how they are struct ured. Give a general description of the molecular structure and the characterist ics of solids, liquids, and gases. Compare and contrast the molecular structures of different solids. Explain why liquids can flow. Solids Define mass, density, and stress. Ident ify five types of stress and t heir effects on solids. Define elast icity and t emperature. Describe the effects of temperature on solids. Liquids Describe how liquids seek t heir own level. Define viscosit y. Describe the property of wet ting and explain why it occurs. Describe buoyancy and explain why it occurs. Describe specific gravity and how it relates t o density. Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on liquids.
Subjects: Forms of Matter Solids Mass and Density Stress and Elasticity Temperature Effects Liquids Properties of Liquids Temperature and Pressure Effect s Course 63 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Abnormal Conditions and Emergencies (IHRDC_OM_AOBAC)
Overview: This is an interactive training module designed to familiarize trainees wit h some abnormal operating conditions t hat a boiler operator may encounter on the job. Specific att ention is directed to typical procedures used by plant s to handle these situations and to the methods and means available to the operator to anticipate problems and to minimize the chances of t heir occurring. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Common Problems Describe typical procedures for dealing wit h the loss of certain boiler auxiliaries. Describe basic procedures for dealing wit h leaks that occur inside and outside a boiler. Describe how safety valves are used to protect boilers against overpressure. Describe what boiler operat ors should do to deal with leaking safety valves. Describe basic procedures for dealing wit h fires in coal yards, bunkers, feeders, pulverizers, and air preheaters. Explain how equipment fires start and identify actions that operators should avoid when equipment fires occur. Boiler Explosions Describe some of the basic causes of boiler explosions. Explain what operators can do to help prevent boiler explosions. Describe some situations that can cause a loss of all boiler flame. Describe some basic procedures for preventing a loss of all boiler flame.
Subjects: Common Problems Loss of Auxiliaries Leaks Overpressure Equipment Fires Boiler Explosions Causes of Explosions Loss of Flame Course 64 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Combustion and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOBCO)
Overview: The requirements for combustion in a boiler are identified and described. This unit traces the air and gas flow path through a t ypical boiler and describes the functions of the components in the flow path. Principles of boiler operation from an operat or's point of view are identified and described. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Combustion List elements needed for combustion in a boiler. Describe the parts and function of a typical burner in a boiler furnace and howthe burner helps to satisfy the elements of combust ion in a boiler. Describe the fuel system for a typical coal-fired boiler. Describe a typical burner for an oil-fired boiler. Describe a typical burner for a gas-fired boiler. Define t he following terms: fuel/air ratio, excess air, and excess oxygen. Describe operator responsibilities associat ed with maintaining t he correct fuel/air ratio. Air and Gas Trace t he air and gas flow pat h through a boiler. Explain how hot combustion gases are used to increase boiler efficiency. Describe the basic operation of two t ypes of air preheaters. Describe some of the harmful effects that can be caused by combustion gas by-products. Describe equipment commonly used t o remove particulat es and harmful gases from combustion gases. Boiler Operation Describe the location and purpose of boiler vents. Describe the location and purpose of boiler drains. Explain what blowdown valves are. State the purpose of soot blowing. Describe the operation of a typical soot blower.
Subjects: Combustion Elements of Combustion Boiler Fuel Systems Fuel/Air Rat io Air and Gas Air and Gas Flow Path Pollution Cont rols Boiler Operation Vents, Drains, and Blowdown Valves Soot blowing Course 65 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Normal Operations (IHRDC_OM_AOBNO)
Overview: This is an interactive module designed to present an overview of the basic procedures for normal operations of a drum-type boiler. Trainees will learn what is meant by steady state conditions and efficiency, t he basic instrumentation used to monitor t he operation of a boiler, how steam temperature is controlled, and the basic procedures for ash handling. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Overview Explain what steady st at e conditions for a boiler are. Describe some of the syst ems and components that must be monitored during boiler operation under steady st at e conditions. Describe typical operator concerns associated with the energy losses that occur during normal operation of a boiler. Monitoring and Controlling Operations Describe basic operator responsibilit ies for monitoring a boiler's steam/water circuit . Describe typical control room instrumentation that is used to monitor a boiler's steam/water circuit. Describe basic operator responsibilit ies for monitoring combust ion and the air/gas circuit for a boiler. Describe typical control room instrumentation that is used to monitor combustion and the air/gas circuit for a boiler. Describe some of the basic systems and components checks that operators perform during normal boiler operation. Describe five methods that are used in power plants for controlling steam temperature. Ash Handling Describe the basic procedures for removing bottom ash. Describe the basic procedures for removing fly ash.
Subjects: Overview Steady State Conditions Energy Losses Monitoring and Controlling Operations The Steam/Water Circuit The Air/Gas Circuit Steam Temperature Ash Handling Bottom Ash Fly Ash Course 66 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AOBSS)
Overview: This is an interactive training module designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic t echniques for start ing up and shutting down drum-type boilers. After completing this module, the t rainees should be able to describe basic procedures for performing a cold st artup of a drum-type boiler, light ing off the furnace, warming up the boiler and establishing the boiler flame. They should also be able to describe basic procedures for shut ting down a typical drum-type boiler. In addit ion, the trainees should be able to compare and contrast the startup and shut down of a drum-type boiler with the startup and shut down of a once-through boiler. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Procedures Describe basic checks t hat boiler operat ors make during an initial pre-st artup walkthrough. Describe typical procedures for a cold startup of a controlled circulation, drumt ype boiler. Describe basic preparat ions for lighting off t he furnace, how light-off is initiated, and how a typical boiler is warmed up. Describe how pulverizers are start ed up and controlled. Describe how the main coal burners are ignited and controlled. Describe the basic procedures for shutting down a typical drum-t ype boiler. Once-Through Boilers Describe the basic differences and similarities bet ween the operation of a oncethrough boiler and a drum-type boiler. Describe how a steam/water separation system is used during the startup and the shutdown of a once-through boiler.
Subjects: Basic Procedures Cold Start up Light-off and Warmup Establishing a Boiler Flame Shutdown Once-Through Boilers Basic Operations Steam/Wat er Separation Course 67 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Water and Steam (IHRDC_OM_AOBWS)
Overview: This unit begins by explaining why wat er circulat es in a boiler, and describes the flow path of water through a typical drum-type boiler. Differences between natural circulation and controlled circulation are explained, and the components and functions of a typical boiler drum are examined. The unit goes on t o explain how the components found in a steam flow path affect the production and use of steam. The unit concludes with a look at what the critical point is, and why some boilers operate at or above critical conditions. Also covered is the operator's role in maintaining the correct st eam pressure in drum-type and once-through boilers. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Water State the purposes of water circulation in a boiler. Describe the water flow path through a typical drum-type boiler. Describe the basic principle of natural circulation and two fact ors that can affect it. Describe the differences between nat ural and controlled circulations. Describe the functions and components of a typical boiler drum. Steam Define: boiling, saturation, temperature, and superheat. Describe the st eam flow path from the boiler to the condenser in a typical generating unit. State the function of a superheater and describe how superheaters can be classified. State the function of a desuperheater. State the function of a reheater and describe how reheaters can be classified. Describe the basic operation of a condenser. Supercritical Boilers Define crit ical point . Explain why some boilers operate above the critical point. Describe the flow path of water in a once-through boiler. State the advantages and disadvantages of a once-through supercritical boiler. Explain how steam pressure is maintained in drum-type and once-through boilers.
Subjects: Water Water Flow Path Circulation Boiler Drum Steam Introduction Steam Flow Pat h Supercritical Boilers Critical Conditions Once-Through Boilers Boiler Operations Course 68 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT OPERATION: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOOBP)
Overview: At t he complet ion of this inst ructional unit, trainees will be able to describe how plant systems respond to changes in load on a unit, and list operat or responsibilities during load changes. In addition, trainees will be able to describe the functions of bearings, operation of sliding surface bearings and rolling contact bearings, operator responsibilit ies associated with bearings, and how bearings are lubricated. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Load Changes Describe how a plant responds to changes in load on a unit. Describe the basic responsibilit ies of an operator during a load change. Bearings and Lubrication Describe two major types of bearings. Describe the basic functions of all bearings. Describe the operation of a typical sliding surface bearing. Describe the operation of rolling contact bearings. Describe some of the basic bearing checks operators perform. Describe how grease is used as a lubricant. Describe how oil is used as a lubricant .
Subjects: Load Changes Plant Responses Operator Responses Bearings and Lubrication Bearings Lubrication Course 69 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT OPERATION: Safety and Pollution Control (IHRDC_OM_AOOSP)
Overview: Trainees are introduced to plant safety concepts t hrough a discussion of how a combination of plant procedures and common sense are used to protect operators on the job. They are also introduced to potential pollution problems in a power plant and t he equipment used to deal wit h these potential problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Plant Safety Describe some of the basic protect ive equipment that operators commonly use. Describe how a tagging system is used to provide protection t o personnel working on plant equipment. Pollution Control Ident ify a source of air pollution in a power plant. Describe some of the techniques used to control air pollut ion released by a plant. Ident ify a source of thermal pollution in a power plant. Describe operator responsibilities for monitoring thermal pollution leaving the plant. Ident ify a major source of water pollut ion in a power plant. Describe operator responsibilities for monitoring wastewater leaving t he plant . Describe some of the equipment that can be used to minimize the effects of noise pollution.
Subjects: Plant Safety Personal Protection Plant Safet y Pollution Control Air Pollut ion Thermal Pollution Water Pollution Noise Pollution Course 70 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Bearings and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOTBO)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic principles associated with turbine shaft bearing lubrication, turbine speed control, and turbine operation. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to identify and describe the functions of the component s of a typical t urbine lube oil syst em. They should also be able to describe the basic components and operat ion of a typical turbine speed control system. In addition, they should be able to describe operator responsibilities associat ed with turbine startup, operation, and shut down. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Bearing Lubrication State the functions of the following basic components typically found in a turbine lube oil system: reservoir, main lube oil pump, boost er pump, and lube oil coolers. State the functions of the following addit ional components typically found in a turbine lube oil system: AC auxiliary pump, DC emergency pump, AC turning gear pump, and vapor extractor. Explain why it is important to make sure that t he controllers for t he standby oil pumps are in the standby or automatic positions. Describe a situation in which increase in bearing oil t emperature could indicate a problem. Describe a situation in which an increase in bearing oil temperature is considered normal. Turbine Control Ident ify two major systems commonly used to control t urbine speed. Describe the basic components of a turbine speed cont rol system. Describe how turbine speed is cont rolled by a mechanical-hydraulic cont rol system wit h a flyweight governor. Describe what happens when a turbine trip occurs. Turbine Operation Explain why the warmup period is important. Explain why it is important to prevent wat er buildup and describe how this is done. Describe the st eps involved in a typical shutdown procedure.
Subjects: Bearing Lubrication Basic Component s Additional Components Operator Responsibilities Turbine Control Basics Example Turbine Operation Startup Normal Operation and Shutdown Course 71 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Boiler and Turbine Protection (IHRDC_OM_AOPPB)
Overview: This unit describes the basic operat ion and startup requirements of a balanced-draft, controlled circulation, drum-type boiler. It also identifies common problems that affect the combustion side of a boiler and the water and steam side of a boiler, and it describes automatic controls and operat or actions that address those problems. The unit goes on to describe common t urbine problems, including temperature- and pressure-related problems, overspeed, vibration and eccentricity. Automat ic protective devices and operator actions t hat address those problems are also described. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Boilers Describe the basic operation of a balanced-draft, controlled circulation, drumtype boiler. Ident ify and describe the basic requirements for starting up a boiler. Ident ify common boiler combustion problems. Describe automatic controls that regulate the combustion process. Describe actions t hat operators can take to address combustion problems. Ident ify aut omatic protect ive devices associated wit h the combust ion process. Ident ify common problems that occur on t he water and steam side of a boiler. Describe actions t hat operators can take to address water and steam problems. Ident ify aut omatic protect ive devices associated wit h the boiler steam/water cycle. Turbines Ident ify common temperature-related and pressure-related turbine problems. Describe actions t hat operators can take to address turbine problems related t o temperat ure and pressure. Ident ify aut omatic protect ive devices associated wit h temperat ure and pressure problems. Describe turbine problems associated wit h overspeed, vibration and eccentricit y. Describe actions t hat operators can take to address overspeed, vibration and eccentricity problems. Ident ify aut omatic protect ive devices associated wit h overspeed, vibration and eccentricit y problems.
Subjects: Boilers Basic Operation and Startup Combustion Problems Water and St eam Problems Turbines Temperature and Pressure Problems Overspeed, Vibration and Eccentricity Course 72 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Condensate and Feedwater Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOCFS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic layout of a typical condensate and feedwater system and the basic operation of the system's individual components. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the components in a condensate and feedwater system and describe the basic operation of each component . They should also be able to explain how the system normally operat es, describe operator responsibilities associat ed with normal operation, and identify some common operat ing problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: System Overview Describe the basic layout of a t ypical condensate and feedwater system. Describe the basic function and operation of the individual components in a typical condensat e and feedwater system. System Operation Describe the normal operation of a typical condensate and feedwat er system and identify typical operator responsibilities that are associated with normal operation. Ident ify and describe some common operating problems that may occur in a condensate and feedwater system and describe basic steps for dealing with these problems.
Subjects: System Overview System Layout System Components System Operation Normal Operation Operating Problems Course 73 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Condenser and Circulating Water (IHRDC_OM_AOPPC)
Overview: This training unit provides basic information about t he design and function of power plant condensers and circulating water systems. It describes the operation of a single-pass condenser and a two-pass condenser, as well as various air removal system components. The unit also covers the basic operation of a once-t hrough circulating water system, and it describes how mechanical draft cooling towers and natural draft cooling towers work. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Condensers Describe the basic function of a condenser. Describe the operation of a single-pass condenser and a two-pass condenser. Describe the basic function of an air removal system. Describe the operation of a reciprocating vacuum pump, a rotary vacuum pump and an air ejector. Ident ify and describe routine checks that operat ors should perform on a condenser. Circulating Water Systems Describe the basic operation of a once-through circulat ing wat er system. Describe how mechanical draft cooling towers and natural draft cooling towers function.
Subjects: Condensers Function and Design Air Removal Syst ems Condenser Operation Circulating Water Systems Once-Through Systems Cooling Towers Course 74 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AOPPF)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h various types of hazards t hat may exist in a power plant. Aft er completing t his unit, the trainees should be able to identify common types of mechanical and electrical hazards, t emperature and pressure hazards, and fire and chemical hazards. They should also be able to describe devices and t echniques that can be used to prevent or minimize t hese hazards. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Mechanical & Electrical Describe conditions that commonly lead t o material and equipment failure. Ident ify ways to detect equipment failure. Describe common electrical hazards in a power plant. Ident ify devices used t o prevent or minimize elect rical hazards. Temperature & Pressure Ident ify devices used t o prevent abnormal t emperature conditions. Ident ify devices used t o prevent abnormal pressure conditions. Chemical & Fire Ident ify common chemical hazards in a power plant Ident ify ways to prevent chemical hazards. Describe fire protection systems commonly found in power plants.
Subjects: Mechanical & Electrical Equipment Failure Electrical Hazards Temperature & Pressure Abnormal Temperature Abnormal Pressure Chemical & Fire Chemical Hazards Fire Prot ection Course 75 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Integrated Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPPI)
Overview: In this unit , trainees will learn what logic diagrams are and how they are used to represent the functions carried out by plant protection equipment. Common types of logic gates are identified and described, and interlock logic is examined. The unit also describes how logic diagrams can be used to represent conditions t hat cause boiler trips, turbine trips and generator trips, and it explains how the protection systems for boilers, t urbines and generators are int errelated. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Logic Diagrams Describe what logic diagrams are and how they can be used to represent functions carried out by plant protection equipment. Describe the functions of AND gates, OR gates, NOT gates and time delay (TD) gates in logic circuits. Describe what interlocks are and how the actions of interlocks associated with boiler operations are represented in logic diagrams. Trip Logic Describe how logic diagrams can be used to represent conditions that cause equipment trips. Ident ify conditions that can cause a boiler trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrat e t hose conditions. Ident ify conditions that can cause a turbine trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrate t hose conditions. Ident ify conditions that can cause a generator trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrate t hose conditions. Describe how the protection systems for boilers, turbines and generat ors are interrelat ed.
Subjects: Logic Diagrams Overview Logic Gates Interlock Logic Trip Logic Boiler Trips Turbine Trips Generat or Trips Integrated Protection Course 76 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Power and Energy (IHRDC_OM_AOPPE)
Overview: This unit will introduce trainees to basic component s of a power system and describe how these component s are arranged to deliver power to customers. It will also examine t he energy conversions that are necessary to produce power in a power plant and discuss basic principles of how an operat or responds to emergency conditions. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: The Power System State the function of a generator. Define t he following terms: unit, watt, and megawat t. Describe how power is typically dist ribut ed to customers. Define t he following terms: switchyard, substations, and power system. Define demand. Describe the function of the load dispatcher. Explain why there are variations in demand. Explain why supply must always equal demand. Energy Conversion Explain how energy is converted to produce electricit y in fossil fuel plants. State some of the advantages and disadvantages of fossil fuel plants. Explain how energy is converted to produce electricit y in gas turbine plants. State some of the advantages and disadvantages of gas turbine plants. Explain how energy is converted to produce electricit y in nuclear plants. State some of the advantages and disadvantages of nuclear plants.
Subjects: The Power System Generat ing Power Distributing Power Demand Energy Conversion Fossil Fuel Plant s Gas Turbine Plants Hydroelect ric Plants Nuclear Power Plant s Course 77 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Power Generation (IHRDC_OM_AOPGE)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion of an AC generator and auxiliary systems and components associated with it. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to explain how volt age is induced in an AC generator, how an AC generator produces current , and how an AC generator can be cooled. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Generating Electricity Name the basic parts of a generator and describe the function of each in inducing voltage. Describe the primary difference between a single-phase generator and a threephase generator. Name two factors that determine the frequency of t he current produced by a generator. Explain why the frequency of a generat or's output must be controlled. Explain the function of the excit er in a generator. Name the parts of a DC exciter and the parts of a brushless exciter and describe their functions. Generator Cooling Explain why a large generator is typically cooled with hydrogen instead of air. Explain the function of an oil seal in a hydrogen-cooled generator. Describe how hydrogen is supplied t o a generator cooling system. Explain the purpose of each of t he following components in a hydrogen generator cooling system: purity analyzer, core monit or, hydrogen dryer, liquid det ector. Explain how carbon dioxide and air are used t o purge a generat or cooling system. Describe the flow of water in a t ypical stator cooling system. Describe the function of each of the following component s in a typical stator cooling system: temperature cont rol valve, pressure control valve, demineralizer.
Subjects: Generating Electricity Principles of Induction Out put Frequency Generat or Excitation Generator Cooling Hydrogen Cooling Cooling Auxiliary Systems Gas Purging Stator Cooling Syst em Course 78 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Cycle (IHRDC_OM_AOPSC)
Overview: In this unit , main component s of t he steam cycle in a fossil fuel fired power plant will be identified. The unit will also trace the order in which steam and water flow through these components in order to show how the components are arranged. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Components Describe how a boiler works. Describe how fuel and air are supplied to a boiler. Describe how a turbine works. Describe how a condenser works. Describe the function of the condensate-feedwater system. Describe the function of the circulating water system. Describe the function of the makeup water system. Flow Describe how steam and water move through the st eam cycle. Describe how the flow of steam and the flow of water are controlled. Describe how the flow of fuel to the boiler can be controlled. Describe three general actions that must be t aken during any emergency. Describe the emergency act ions that must be taken if there is a loss of flame in the boiler.
Subjects: Components Boilers Turbines Condensers Flow Movement of Steam and Water Steam and Water Flow Control Fuel Flow Control Emergencies Course 79 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Flow (IHRDC_OM_AOTSF)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles associated with t he construction and operation of steam turbines. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to state the functions of t he main parts of a t ypical turbine and describe how steam causes impulse blades and reaction blades to t urn a turbine's wheels. They should also be able to describe the purpose and operat ion of a gland steam seal system, a gland st eam seal exhaust system, a carbon seal, and a wat er seal. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Construction and Rotation State the functions of the following t urbine parts: wheels, blades, diaphragms, steam chest , nozzle block, and rotor. State the functions of stop valves and cont rol valves. Describe how steam causes impulse blades to turn a turbine's wheels. Describe how steam causes reaction blades to t urn a turbine's wheels. State the functions of reheat stop valves and intercept valves. Define a turbine trip and describe how it protects a t urbine. Sealing Systems Describe the purpose for and operat ion of a gland steam seal system. Describe the purpose for and operat ion of a gland steam seal exhaust system. Describe the operation of a carbon seal. Describe the operation of a water seal.
Subjects: Construction and Rotation Construction Rotation Sealing Systems Steam Seals Carbon and Wat er Seals Course 80 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPPS)
Overview: This is an interactive training module designed to present basic information on the steam/wat er cycle in a power plant . Specific att ention is directed to the main st eam system, the reheat steam system, the extract ion steam system and the auxiliary st eam system. Basic procedures for a plant startup and several operator checks on steam systems and component s are also included. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Systems and Components Describe how steam flows t hrough the various steam systems that make up a typical power plant's st eam/water cycle. Ident ify the component s of a main steam system and describe their functions. Ident ify the component s of a reheat st eam system and describe their functions. Explain why steam piping contains expansion loops and bends. Ident ify the component s of an extraction steam system and describe their functions. Explain how an extraction steam system improves plant efficiency. Describe typical uses of auxiliary steam in a power plant. Ident ify some t ypical components of an auxiliary st eam system and describe their functions. Describe how the components that cont rol the pressure and temperature of auxiliary steam operate. Systems Operations Describe some basic procedures for removing accumulated condensate and gradually warming up steam systems components during a plant startup. Describe some basic checks that operators should make to ensure that steam systems and their components are operating properly.
Subjects: Systems and Components Steam/Wat er Cycle Main Steam Syst em Reheat Steam System Extraction Steam System Auxiliary Steam System Systems Operations Plant Startup Systems Inspections Course 81 of 245
Process Operations
PROCESS SAMPLING: Obtaining Samples (IHRDC_OM_AOPOS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic concepts associated with obtaining samples of process materials. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe hazards associat ed with sampling and t he precautions that may be required. They should also be able to take contaminant-free representative samples of process liquids, solids, and gases. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Explain why samples are taken in process systems. Describe some hazards associated with sampling mat erials. Describe protective clothing that should be worn when taking samples of hazardous and non-hazardous materials. Describe two types of respirat ors worn when sampling involves materials that produce harmful dust part icles or t oxic fumes. Liquids Describe how to keep liquid samples from being cont aminated when they are taken. Explain how to make sure that a representative sample of a liquid is obtained. Describe information typically included on a sample label. Solids and Gases Describe how to obtain cont aminant-free represent at ive samples of process solids. Describe how to obtain cont aminant-free represent at ive samples of process gases.
Subjects: Introduction Basic Principles Prot ective Clothing Respirators Liquids Preparing to Sample Obtaining a Sample Labeling a Sample Solids and Gases Sampling Solids Sampling Gases Course 82 of 245
Process Operations
PROCESS SAMPLING: Testing Samples (IHRDC_OM_AOPTS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic procedures for performing test s on samples of process materials and product s. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe how t o perform a pH test , a percent solids test , a specific gravit y test , and a t itration. They should also be able to describe t he operat ion of a gas chromatograph and how it is used to perform t ests on complex gas mixtures or solutions. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: pH and Percent Solids Describe how a pH t est is performed. Describe how a percent solids t est is performed. Specific Gravities and Titrations Describe how a specific gravity test is performed. Describe how a titration is performed. Gas Chromatographs Describe how a gas chromatograph operates. Describe how to perform a gas chromatograph t est.
Subjects: pH and Percent Solids pH Tests Percent Solids Tests Specific Gravities and Titrations Specific Gravity Test s Titrations Gas Chromatographs Operation Performing a Test Course 83 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Basic Types and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOPBT)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic components and operation of positive displacement pumps and centrifugal pumps. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to explain how pumps can be identified, identify the basic components of a pump, and describe the functions of various types of pump auxiliary equipment and systems. They should also be able t o describe the general operation of reciprocating and rotary positive displacement pumps, and single-st age and multistage centrifugal pumps. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Pump Fundamentals Given a simple syst em diagram, locate each pump, tell what it does, and ident ify it by one or more names. Ident ify the casing, the inlet , and the out let on a pump. Name two general categories of pumps. Explain the functions of the following t ypes of pump auxiliary equipment and systems drivers, couplings, strainers, lubricating syst ems, packing, and mechanical seals. Positive Displacement Pumps Describe the general operation of a reciprocating positive displacement pump. Describe the general operation of a rotary positive displacement pump. Centrifugal Pumps Describe the general operation of a single-stage cent rifugal pump. Describe the general operation of a multistage centrifugal pump.
Subjects: Pump Fundamentals Pump Identification Pump Component s Auxiliary Equipment Positive Displacement Pumps Reciprocating Pumps Rotary Pumps Centrifugal Pumps Single-Stage Pumps Multistage Pumps Course 84 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Fundamentals of Centrifugal Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPFC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the fundamental operating principles of single-stage and multistage centrifugal pumps. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the general operating principles of a centrifugal pump. Specifically, t hey should be able to describe the differences between radial, axial, and mixed flow pumps, and describe the basic operation of a vertically-mounted and multistage pump. Trainees should also be able t o describe the purpose and the basic operation of a mechanical seal flush system. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Centrifugal Pump Operation Describe general operating principles of a centrifugal pump. Explain differences between radial flow, axial flow, and mixed flow pumps. Explain the principles of operation of a vertically mounted centrifugal pump. Describe the basic operation of a typical multistage centrifugal pump. Describe two ways that mult istage centrifugal pumps can minimize axial thrust. Centrifugal Pump Components Explain the differences between an open impeller, a closed impeller, and a semi-open impeller. Compare and contrast a single-suction impeller and a double-suction impeller. Describe the general design and function of a diffuser. Describe the purpose and basic operation of a mechanical seal flush system.
Subjects: Centrifugal Pump Operation Principles of Operat ion Vertical Pumps Multistage Pumps Centrifugal Pump Components Impellers and Diffusers Mechanical Seal Systems Course 85 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Operation of Centrifugal Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPOC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion of centrifugal pumps. After complet ing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe techniques for priming a centrifugal pump and explain general procedures for st arting and shut ting down a pump. Trainees should also be able to describe some general checks that may be made on an operating pump and describe operator concerns related to air and vapor binding in a centrifugal pump. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Startup and Shutdown Describe techniques used to prime a centrifugal pump. Describe a procedure for starting up a cent rifugal pump. Describe a procedure for shut ting down a centrifugal pump. Pump Operation Describe checks that should be made on an operating centrifugal pump and its auxiliary equipment. Describe indications of air binding and vapor binding in a pump and some of the possible sources of in-leakage t o a pump.
Subjects: Startup and Shutdown Priming Pump Startup and Shutdown Pump Operation Operator Checks Air Binding and Vapor Binding Course 86 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Performance and Inspection (IHRDC_OM_AOPER)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to fact ors that affect the performance of pumps and some of the symptoms of improper pump operation. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to ident ify and explain the relationship bet ween various factors that affect pump performance, and to explain how pump performance can be evaluated. They should also be able to identify symptoms of some common pump problems and explain how to check a pump for signs of problems such as leaks and cavitation. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Pump Performance Define and explain t he relat ionship between the following: static head, dynamic head, suction head, discharge head, and total head. Describe some basic ways pump performance can be determined. Explain the relationship bet ween minimum net positive suction head and cavitation. Pump Inspection Ident ify symptoms that may indicat e abnormal pump operation. Ident ify pump components that should be checked for leaks. Describe common symptoms of cavitation. List some ways to stop or minimize cavitation.
Subjects: Pump Performance Head Suction Head and Cavitation Pump Inspection Sympt oms of Pump Problems Checking for Leaks Checking for Cavitation Course 87 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Reciprocating Positive Displacement Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPRE)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic parts and operation of several t ypes of reciprocating positive displacement pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general operation of the following t ypes of pumps: single-acting piston pumps, single-acting plunger pumps, double-acting piston pumps, duplex pist on pumps, motor-driven diaphragm pumps, and air-operated diaphragm pumps. Trainees should also be able to describe a general procedure for start ing up and shutting down a t ypical reciprocat ing pump, and t o explain the function and operation of a relief valve. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Piston and Plunger Pumps Describe the general operation of a single-acting piston pump. Describe the general operation of a plunger pump. Describe the general operation of a double-acting piston pump. Describe the general operation and an advantage of a duplex piston pump. Diaphragm Pumps Describe the general operation of a mot or-driven diaphragm pump. Describe the general operation of an air-operated diaphragm pump. Pump Operation Describe a general procedure for starting up a reciprocating pump. Describe a general procedure for shutting down a reciprocating pump. Explain the purpose of a relief valve.
Subjects: Piston and Plunger Pumps Single-Acting Pumps Double-Act ing Pumps Duplex Pumps Diaphragm Pumps Motor-Driven Diaphragm Pumps Air-Operated Diaphragm Pumps Pump Operation Pump Startup and Shutdown Relief Valves Course 88 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Rotary Positive Displacement Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPRP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic parts and operation of several t ypes of rotary posit ive displacement pumps. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the general operation of t he following types of pumps: screw pumps, gear pumps, lobe pumps, vane pumps, and tubing pumps. They should also be able to describe a general procedure for start ing up and shutting down a t ypical rot ary pump, and t o explain the function and operation of a relief valve. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types of Rotary Pumps Describe the general operation of a progressive cavity pump. Describe the general operation of a two-screw pump. Describe the general operation of an external gear pump and an internal gear pump. Describe the general operation of a lobe pump. Describe the general operation of a sliding vane pump and a flexible vane pump. Describe the general operation of a tubing pump. Operating Procedures Describe procedures involved in starting up a rotary positive displacement pump. Describe procedures involved in shutting down a rotary positive displacement pump. Explain the purpose of a relief valve.
Subjects: Types of Rotary Pumps Screw Pumps Gear and Lobe Pumps Vane Pumps Tubing Pumps Operating Procedures Rotary Pump Startup and Shutdown Relief Valves Course 89 of 245
Process Operations
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Basic Concepts (IHRDC_OM_AORBC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the basic principles of refrigeration system operation. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o explain what refrigerat ion is and how heat transfer occurs in a refrigeration system. They should also be able to describe the basic parts, or steps, of a refrigerat ion cycle and explain how t hese steps can be carried out by specific refrigeration system components. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Fundamentals Define refrigeration. Explain what a refrigerant is. Explain the basic difference between sensible heat transfer and latent heat transfer. Describe how pressure and temperature can affect heat transfer. Define heat source and heat sink. Refrigeration Systems Describe the processes involved in a typical refrigeration cycle. Describe the devices that accomplish the basic functions of a typical refrigeration cycle. Explain how a refrigeration system can be used with a secondary cooling system.
Subjects: Fundamentals Introduction t o Refrigeration Heat Transfer Refrigeration Systems Basic Refrigeration Cycle Refrigeration Components Secondary Cooling Systems Course 90 of 245
Process Operations
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOROP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the operation of vapor compression refrigeration systems and absorpt ion refrigeration systems. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to describe the components and operations of a vapor compression system and an absorption system. They should also be able to describe control devices, indicat ing inst ruments, and operator checks associated with t hese systems, and identify some operating problems that may occur. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types of Systems Ident ify the component s of a typical vapor compression refrigerat ion syst em. Describe the operation of a vapor compression refrigeration system. Describe the operation of one type of absorption refrigeration system. System Operation Describe some control devices commonly used with refrigerat ion syst ems. Describe some monitoring and indicat ing inst ruments commonly used with refrigeration systems. Describe some operator checks commonly performed on a refrigerat ion syst em. Ident ify some operating problems that may occur in a typical refrigeration system.
Subjects: Types of Systems Vapor Compression System Absorption System System Operation Controls Indicators and Checks Operating Problems Course 91 of 245
Process Operations
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Basic Control Charts (IHRDC_OM_AOSBC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h some of the basic control charts used in Statistical Process Control (SPC). After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the characteristics of X+ charts, R charts, moving X+ charts, moving R chart s, and individual X charts. They should also be able to explain what each chart represent s and how to plot values on each chart. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Control Charts - 1 Describe how SPC is helpful in responding to an out-of-control process. Explain what X+ charts represent. Describe how to plot values on an X+ chart. Explain what R charts represent. Describe how to plot values on an R chart . Explain why an X+ and an R chart are commonly used t ogether. Describe how to recognize abnormal variat ions on X+ charts and R charts. Control Charts - 2 Describe the characteristics of moving X+ chart s. Describe how to plot values on a moving X+ chart. Describe the characteristics of moving R charts. Describe how to plot values on a moving R chart. Describe the characteristics of individual X charts. Describe how to plot values on an individual X chart .
Subjects: Control Charts - 1 SPC and Control Charts X+ Charts R Charts Examples Control Charts - 2 Moving X+ Charts Moving R Charts Individual X Charts Course 92 of 245
Process Operations
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOSIN)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles of Statist ical Process Control (SPC). Aft er completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what SPC is and how it can be applied t o a process. They should also be able to describe the basic element s of an SPC control chart and relate an SPC control chart to an X-Y graph and to a normal distribution curve. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: What is SPC? Define quality in terms of the process industry. Explain what Statistical Process Control (SPC) is. Describe the benefits of SPC. Describe how SPC was developed. Applying SPC Describe what a process is. Ident ify factors that affect a process. Describe the t wo basic types of variation in a process. Ident ify factors that affect how SPC is applied to a process. Charts Describe how to plot values on a basic X-Y graph. Explain what a histogram is and how it relates to SPC cont rol charts. Explain what a st andard deviation is. Ident ify the basic elements of a typical Shewhart cont rol chart. Relate a Shewhart control chart to a normal distribution curve.
Subjects: What is SPC? SPC and Product Quality Origin of SPC Applying SPC Factors Affecting a Process Application t o a Process Charts X-Y Graph Histogram Shewhart Control Chart Course 93 of 245
Process Operations
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Process Variations (IHRDC_OM_AOSPV)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h some basic techniques for using Statist ical Process Control (SPC) to recognize and respond to variations in plant processes. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how plotted values on control charts can be interpreted, describe how an operator can use SPC to recognize and respond to out-of-control conditions and process inst ability, describe basic considerat ions for using SPC with a computer, and explain how t o use various types of at tribute charts. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Control Charts Describe how plotted values on control charts can be interpreted. Describe common patt erns of instability and identify conditions t hat can cause these patterns to occur. Operating with SPC Describe how an operator can use SPC t o recognize and respond t o problems in a process. Define CUSUM and explain how it can be used. Describe how using CUSUM compares to using control charts. Describe two common causes of an off-aim condition. Describe how to reset CUSUM and how to set a new aim. Attribute Charts Define t he terms defect and defective product. Describe how to use C charts, U Chart s, NP charts, and P charts.
Subjects: Control Charts Interpreting Charts Recognizing Patt erns Operating With SPC Using SPC CUSUM Attribute Charts Types of Charts Course 94 of 245
Process Operations
TROUBLESHOOTING: Basic Concepts (IHRDC_OM_AOPOB)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with troubleshooting a problem in a process system. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to explain what t roubleshooting is, and how it can be carried out as a systematic, logical procedure. They should also be able to explain how to apply the major steps of a basic t roubleshooting procedure to a problem in a process. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Define t roubleshooting. Ident ify and describe the main steps involved in troubleshooting. Ident ify various sources of information that can be used for troubleshooting. Explain how the following process of elimination met hods are applied in troubleshooting: input /output test ing, bracketing, the serial met hod, and the half-splitting method. Troubleshooting Describe a basic wast ewat er treatment process. Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in a wastewater treatment process.
Subjects: Introduction What is Troubleshooting? Process of Elimination Troubleshooting Process Problem Course 95 of 245
Process Operations
TROUBLESHOOTING: Process Examples (IHRDC_OM_AOPOP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with troubleshooting problems in process systems. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to follow a logical, systematic troubleshooting procedure to identify and correct process problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Exercise 1 - Tank Level Describe how troubleshooting techniques can be used to find and correct a problem in a process system. The system in this example transfers liquid from a storage tank to a process feed tank. Exercise 2 - Fluid Transfer Describe how troubleshooting techniques can be used to find and correct a problem in a process system. The system used in t his example t ransfers feed material to a dist illation process. Exercise 3 - Process Column Describe how troubleshooting techniques can be used to find and correct a problem in a process system. The system used in t his example is a dist illation process.
Subjects: Exercise 1 - Tank Level Exercise 2 - Fluid Transfer Exercise 3 - Process Column Course 96 of 245
Process Operations
VALVES: Basic Types and Operation 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOVB1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic parts and operation of valves commonly used in process systems. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the purpose and uses of valves in process systems, identify the main part s of a typical valve, and describe the function of each part. They should also be able to describe t he specific uses, parts, and operat ion of gate valves, globe valves, plug valves, ball valves, and butterfly valves. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Valves Describe purposes and uses of valves in process systems. Describe how valves are lined up. Ident ify main parts of a typical valve and their functions. Describe flanged, threaded, and welded methods of att aching valves t o piping systems. Describe the locations of typical valve leaks and how to stop a packing leak. Describe one method of lubricating a t ypical valve. Valve Types Describe the function and operation of gate valves. Describe typical applications of gate valves. Describe the functions and operation of globe and needle valves and t heir typical applicat ions. Ident ify a plug valve and describe its function and operation. Ident ify a t hree-way and a four-way valve and describe their function and operat ion. Describe typical applications of plug valves. Ident ify a ball valve and describe its function and operation. Describe typical applications of ball valves. Ident ify a butterfly valve and describe its function and operat ion. Describe typical applications of butterfly valves.
Subjects: Introduction to Valves Valves and the Process Syst em Valve Parts Valve Problems and Maintenance Valve Types Gate Valves Glove Valves Plug Valves Ball Valves Butterfly Valves Course 97 of 245
Process Operations
VALVES: Basic Types and Operation 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOVB2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some valves that are commonly used to isolate components, t o thrott le flow, to prevent reverse flow through a process system, and to protect systems from overpressure conditions. Aft er completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe t he basic functions and operat ion of diaphragm valves, pinch valves, and check valves. They should also be able t o explain how relief valves and safety valves protect syst em equipment and piping from excessive pressure. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Valve Types Ident ify a diaphragm valve and describe its functions and operation. Ident ify a pinch valve and describe its functions and operation. Ident ify swing check valves, lift check valves, and ball check valves, and describe their functions and operation. Relief and Safety Valves Describe the function and operation of relief valves. Describe typical uses of relief valves. Describe the function and operation of safety valves. Describe typical uses of safety valves.
Subjects: Valve Types Diaphragm Valves Pinch Valves Check Valves Relief and Safety Valves Relief Valves Safety Valves Course 98 of 245
Process Operations
VALVES: Electric and Hydraulic Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AOVEH)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to various types of electric and hydraulic actuators that are used t o control valves in process systems. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the basic operation of solenoid actuators, motor-operated actuators, and various types of hydraulic act uators. They should also be able to explain t he funct ion of a pilot valve and describe problems associated with hydraulic act uators. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Electric Actuators Describe the basic operation of a solenoid actuat or. Describe the basic operation of a motor-operated act uator. Describe the function of torque swit ches. Describe the function of limit switches. Hydraulic Actuators Describe the operation of a single-acting, spring-return hydraulic actuator. Describe the basic operation of a double-acting hydraulic act uator. Describe the function of a pilot valve. Describe some ways to identify actuator problems.
Subjects: Electric Actuators Solenoid Actuat ors Motor-Operated Actuat ors Hydraulic Actuators Single-Acting Hydraulic Actuators Double-Act ing Hydraulic Actuat ors Pilot Valves Hydraulic Actuator Problems Course 99 of 245
Process Operations
VALVES: Introduction of Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AOVIA)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to actuators in general, and pneumatic act uators, in part icular. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify and describe three basic types of actuators and explain how actuators position control valves. They should also be able to describe the basic design and operation of single- and doubleacting diaphragm actuators, single- and double-act ing piston actuators, van actuators, and positioners. Finally, trainees should be able to describe some common actuator problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Actuators and Control Valves Define actuator and describe three basic types of actuators. Describe the function of an actuat or. Describe the function of a controller. Describe the function of a control valve. Pneumatic Actuators Describe the basic design and operation of single-acting diaphragm and double-acting actuators. Describe the basic operation of single-acting and double-act ing piston actuators. Describe the basic operation of a vane actuator. Describe the function and basic operation of a positioner. Describe some ways to identify actuator problems. Describe some ways that an operat or can identify actuator problems. Describe a general procedure for handling a cont rol valve failure.
Subjects: Actuators and Control Valves Types of Actuators Control Valves Pneumatic Actuators Single-Acting Diaphragm Actuat ors Double-Act ing Diaphragm Actuators Single- and Double-Act ing Piston Actuators Van Actuators Positioners Actuator Problems Course 100 of 245
MAINTENANCE CURRICULUM
Maintenance
BEARINGS: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AMBIN)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of bearings. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic functions of bearings, the various types of sliding surface and rolling contact bearings, and the procedures for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft . They should also know how to install a rolling contact bearing on a shaft. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Bearing Basics State three basic functions of bearings. Describe two basic categories of bearings. Describe journal bearings and how they are constructed. Describe thrust bearings and how they are construct ed. Describe basic methods of lubricating sliding surface bearings. Describe common types of sliding surface bearing failures. Describe the basic construction of a typical rolling contact bearing. Describe each of the following rolling cont act type bearings: shallow groove ball bearings, deep groove ball bearings, spherical race ball bearings, cylindrical roller bearings, t apered roller bearings, barrel roller bearings, needle roller bearings, rolling cont act t hrust bearings, and angular cont act bearings. Explain how rolling contact bearings can be lubricated. Describe common types of rolling contact bearing failures. Bearing Maintenance Describe a procedure for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft . Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing a rolling contact bearing. Describe a procedure for installing a new rolling contact bearing on a shaft.
Subjects: Bearing Basics Operation Sliding Surface Bearings Rolling Contact Bearings Bearing Maintenance Bearing Removal Bearing Inst allation Course 101 of 245
Maintenance
BEARINGS: Rolling Contact (IHRDC_OM_AMBRB)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of rolling contact bearings. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe common t ypes of rolling cont act bearings, and explain how they can be mounted and lubricated. Trainees should also be able t o explain how to remove a failed rolling contact bearing and how to install a new one. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Concepts Describe the basic functions of a bearing. Ident ify the basic parts of a typical rolling contact bearing. Describe common types of ball bearings. Describe common types of roller bearings. Explain the difference between a press fit and a push fit. Describe common methods of mount ing rolling cont act bearings. Describe types of bearing housings. Describe a common oil lubrication system for rolling cont act bearings. Describe a common method of greasing a bearing. Bearing Failure and Removal Describe symptoms and causes of common types of rolling contact bearing failures. Describe a procedure for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft . Installation Describe preparations for installing a new rolling cont act bearing. Describe a procedure for installing a rolling contact bearing.
Subjects: Basic Concepts Functions and Features Types of Bearings Mountings and Housings Lubrication Bearing Failure and Removal Types of Failures Removal Technique Installation Preparing for Installation Installation Course 102 of 245
Maintenance
BEARINGS: Sliding Surface (IHRDC_OM_AMBSB)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of sliding surface bearings. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe common t ypes of journal bearings and t hrust bearings, and explain how sliding surface bearings can be lubricated. They should also be able to describe common indications of bearing performance and common types of sliding surface bearing failures. Additionally, they should be able to describe procedures for disassembling, inspecting, and reassembling journal bearings and thrust bearings. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Concepts Describe two general categories of sliding surface bearings. Describe common types of journal bearings. Describe common types of t hrust bearings. Describe the process of film lubrication. Describe ways t hat sliding surface bearings can be lubricated. Performance Describe common indications of bearing performance. Describe inst ruments that can be used to measure indicat ions of bearing performance. Describe common causes of sliding surface bearing failure. Maintenance Describe a procedure for disassembling a journal bearing. Describe what to look for during an inspection of a disassembled journal bearing. Describe how to check the total clearance bet ween a journal bearing and a shaft. Describe a procedure for reassembling a journal bearing. Describe how to take a thrust reading. Describe a procedure for disassembling a thrust bearing. Describe what to look for during the inspection of a disassembled thrust bearing. Describe a procedure for reassembling a thrust bearing.
Subjects: Basic Concepts Types Lubrication Performance Performance Indications Types of Failure Maintenance Journal Bearing Thrust Bearing Course 103 of 245
Maintenance
CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Breakers and Switchgear 1 (IHRDC_OM_AECLV)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of low voltage circuit breakers and switchgear. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the basic operation of a circuit breaker and t he basic functions of switchgear. They should be able to explain how an arc forms and how arcs can be extinguished, and also describe basic procedures for racking out a circuit breaker and performing maintenance and testing on it . Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Operation Describe how an electromagnet ic t rip device operates in a typical circuit breaker. Describe how a thermal element t rip device operates in a typical circuit breaker. Describe how a dashpot can be used to delay the movement of a trip device. Describe ways in which circuit breaker contacts can be closed. Describe the functions of three sections of a t ypical switchgear assembly. Describe how a typical circuit breaker is connected t o primary power and control power. Principles of Circuit Interruption Describe what an arc is and how it forms. Describe how speed, distance, and cooling affect ext inguishing an arc. Describe how a metal fin arc chute can be used t o extinguish an arc in a typical circuit breaker. Explain what current zero is. Maintenance Describe a procedure for racking a circuit breaker out for preventive maintenance. Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing a typical circuit breaker as part of preventive maintenance. Describe how arc chutes and contacts are inspected and cleaned on a typical circuit breaker. Describe how to clean a typical circuit breaker during an overhaul. Describe how primary and secondary disconnect fingers are inspected on a t ypical circuit breaker. Describe how to lubricate t he moving parts in the operating mechanism of a t ypical circuit breaker. Describe three checks that can be performed on t he movable and stationary contacts of a typical circuit breaker. Describe how to perform an instantaneous trip test and a t ime delay trip test on a typical circuit breaker.
Subjects: Basic Operation Circuit Breakers Switchgear Principles of Circuit Interruption Arcs Extinguishing an Arc Maintenance Prevent ive Maintenance Overhaul Test ing Course 104 of 245
Maintenance
CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Breakers and Switchgear 2 (IHRDC_OM_AECHV)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of high voltage breakers and switchgear. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the basic operation of an air-magnetic circuit breaker and an oil circuit breaker. They should also be able to explain how each type of circuit breaker extinguishes an arc, and describe basic procedures for racking out high voltage circuit breakers and performing maintenance and testing on t hem. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Principles of Operation Describe the main components of a t ypical air-magnet ic circuit breaker. Describe how an arc is extinguished in a t ypical air-magnet ic circuit breaker. Describe the main components of a t ypical oil circuit breaker. Describe how an arc is extinguished in a t ypical oil circuit breaker. Describe a typical undervoltage and overvoltage protection system used with high voltage circuit breakers. Maintenance of Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Describe one way to disconnect an air-magnet ic circuit breaker from power. Describe how to inspect the interior of an empty switchgear cell. Describe how to inspect the arc chut es and arc runners on a t ypical air-magnet ic circuit breaker. Describe how to inspect and clean the st at ionary and movable cont acts on a t ypical air-magnet ic circuit breaker. Describe how to inspect the operating mechanism and the primary and secondary disconnects on a typical air-magnetic circuit breaker. Describe how to perform elect rical test s on a typical air-magnetic circuit breaker. Maintenance of Oil Circuit Breakers Describe a procedure for electrically isolating a t ypical oil circuit breaker. Explain why an oil sample is typically taken from an oil circuit breaker before maintenance is performed. Describe a procedure for disassembling a typical oil circuit breaker. Describe how the contact s and the operating mechanism are maintained on a typical disassembled oil circuit breaker. Describe a procedure for reassembling a typical oil circuit breaker.
Subjects: Principles of Operation Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Oil Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection Maintenance of Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Preparations Inspection and Cleaning Electrical Tests Maintenance of Oil Circuit Breakers Preparations Inspection, Cleaning, and Reassembly Course 105 of 245
Maintenance
COMPRESSORS: Centrifugal (IHRDC_OM_AMCCC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to explain centrifugal compressor components and operat ion. It also covers disassembly and reassembly of a vertically split compressor and the various checks and measurements t hat are made t o compressor components. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Describe the operation of a centrifugal compressor. Ident ify the component s of a horizontally split centrifugal compressor. Ident ify the component s of a vertically split centrifugal compressor. Describe the main components of a compressor lubrication system. Define surging. Compressor Overhaul Describe some common precautions and preparations associated with centrifugal compressor maint enance. Describe one way to remove int ercoolers, diffusers, impellers, diffuser covers, and pinion shaft assemblies from a vertically split cent rifugal compressor. Describe some common checks and measurements that are made during a compressor overhaul. Describe a procedure for reassembling a vertically split centrifugal compressor.
Subjects: Introduction Components and Operation Support Systems Compressor Overhaul Maintenance Practices Disassembly Component Inspection Reassembly Course 106 of 245
Maintenance
COMPRESSORS: Reciprocating (IHRDC_OM_AMCAC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of reciprocating compressors. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify the main components of a reciprocating compressor, explain how the compressor operates, and describe routine maintenance tasks that are commonly performed on reciprocating compressors. They should also be able t o describe tasks generally associated with a compressor overhaul. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Compressor Basics Ident ify the main components of a reciprocating air compressor. Describe the general operation of a reciprocating air compressor. Describe factors that determine air compressor design. Describe components t hat are part of lubrication, air flow, cooling, and moisture removal systems in a typical reciprocating air compressor. Describe tasks rout inely performed to maintain the efficiency of a reciprocat ing air compressor. Overhaul Ident ify and describe components of a reciprocating air compressor that are removed during compressor disassembly. Describe a procedure for disassembling a reciprocat ing air compressor. Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing int ernal components of a reciprocating air compressor. Describe a procedure for reassembling a reciprocating air compressor.
Subjects: Compressor Basics Components and Operation Rout ine Maintenance Overhaul Disassembly Cleaning and Inspection Reassembly Course 107 of 245
Maintenance
DIAGRAMS: Blueprints (IHRDC_OM_AEDBL)
Overview: This interactive training unit introduces the basic features of const ruction blueprints. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able to describe various types of blueprint s; identify lines, symbols, and abbreviations that are commonly found in blueprints; and explain how to properly care for blueprints.
Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Describe what a blueprint is, and identify some of t he methods used to create blueprints. Ident ify two basic types of drawings that can be used to illustrat e objects on paper. Describe the t ypes of drawings typically included in a set of blueprints: Working Drawings (plan views, elevation drawings, section drawings, detail drawings) Auxiliary Drawings (electrical plans, HVAC plans, plumbing plans, door and window schedules, framing plans) Describe the basic elements of a blueprint, including the design drawing area, title block, revision block, legend and scale. Scales and Symbols Describe the Engineer's, Archit ect's and Met ric scales commonly used as measuring tools for blueprint s. Describe the following types of lines commonly used on blueprints: Property lines Boundary lines Main object lines Hidden lines Center lines Dimension and extension lines Break lines Section lines Reference lines for sections Leader lines Ident ify examples of building mat erial symbols, electrical symbols, plumbing and piping symbols and door and window symbols commonly used on blueprints. Ident ify abbreviations commonly used on blueprints. Using Blueprints Describe how dimensions are used on blueprints t o show sizes and distances. Ident ify rules for protecting blueprint s during their use.
Subjects: Introduction What is a Blueprint? Working Drawings Parts of a Blueprint Scales and Symbols Types of Scales Line Scales Symbols Abbreviations Using Blueprints Dimensions Care of Blueprints Course 108 of 245
Maintenance
DIAGRAMS: Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AEDEL)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h various types of electrical diagrams. After completing this unit, trainees should be able t o explain why symbols are used on electrical diagrams, and how to obtain informat ion from a title block and an equipment location index. They should also be able to explain how to use each of the following t ypes of diagrams: block, single line, schematic, wiring, connection, interconnection, and raceway. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Diagram Basics Explain why symbols are used on electrical diagrams. State the purpose of the American Standard Device Function Numbers Table and the Standard Diagram Abbreviations Table. State the purpose of legends on electrical diagrams. Describe information commonly found in title blocks on electrical diagrams. State the purpose of notes on electrical diagrams. Define equipment locat ion index. Describe how to use an equipment location index. Types of Diagrams State the purpose of a block diagram. State the purpose of a single line diagram. Ident ify symbols commonly used on single line diagrams. Describe information that can be found on single line diagrams. State the purpose of a schematic diagram. Describe how to read a schematic diagram. State the purpose of a wiring diagram. Describe how to use a wiring diagram to locate components. State the purpose of a connection diagram. Describe how to read a connect ion diagram. State the purpose of an interconnection diagram. Describe how to read an interconnection diagram. State the purpose of a raceway diagram. Describe how to read a raceway diagram. Explain how to use Raceway Not es, Symbols, and Det ail Reference, and a Raceway Schedule.
Subjects: Diagram Basics Symbols Title Blocks Equipment Location Index Types of Diagrams Block Diagrams Single Line Diagrams Schematic Diagrams Wiring Diagrams Connection Diagrams Raceway Diagrams Course 109 of 245
Maintenance
DIAGRAMS: Industrial Process Systems (IHRDC_OM_AEDPR)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to plant system diagrams and diagram symbols. After completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify and describe the purpose of several kinds of system diagrams, and describe the information found on each type. Trainees should also be able to identify symbols commonly used on piping and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs), describe the types of informat ion typically found on a legend, and use a P&ID to locat e the component s of a system. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types of Diagrams Ident ify and describe the purpose of equipment arrangement diagrams, elevation drawings, piping system (flow) diagrams, piping and instrument at ion diagrams (P&IDs), electrical diagrams, and legends. Describe, in general t erms, the information found on each t ype of diagram. Flow Diagram Symbols Ident ify some of the basic symbols associated wit h flow diagrams. Ident ify symbols commonly used t o represent components in flow diagrams. Briefly describe the basic operat ion of the components typically found in a fluid system. Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams Ident ify instruments using an identification chart. Ident ify line symbols and instrument symbols used in piping and instrumentation diagrams. Using a System Diagram Describe the t ypes of information typically found on a legend. Locate the components in a boiler fuel oil system by identifying the symbols used to represent them.
Subjects: Types of Diagrams Equipment Location Diagrams System Diagrams Flow Diagram Symbols Tanks, Pumps, and Valves Actuators Heat Exchangers Using a System Diagram Legends Using a System Diagram Course 110 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: AC Motor Controllers 1 (IHRDC_OM_AEEA1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic funct ions and operation of AC motor controllers. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o explain how an AC motor controller operates and describe the operation of master switches and pilot devices that can be used with AC motor controllers. They should also be able to explain how an AC motor can provide overload protection and low voltage protection, and to describe the operation of special types of AC motor controllers. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Describe how a manual controller can be used t o control a mot or. Describe how a magnetic controller can be used to control a motor. Describe the parts and operation of a typical magnetic contactor. Describe the operation of a magnetic contactor in a t ypical AC motor cont roller. Describe the operation of maintaining master switches and momentary master switches. Describe the operation of float switches, pressure switches, limit switches, and flow switches. Describe the operation of bellows thermostats and bimetallic strip thermost at s. Explain how a mercury switch can be used in a pilot device. Protective Devices State the purpose of overload devices. Describe the parts and operation of t wo types of thermal overload devices. Describe the parts and operation of a typical magnetic overload device. State the purpose of low voltage protection in a magnetic mot or controller. Describe the operation of an LVP and an LVR motor cont roller. Explain how a low voltage relay operates. Special Motor Controllers Explain how a reduced voltage start motor controller provides protect ion to motors when they are first start ed. Describe the operation of a two-speed and a reversible motor controller.
Subjects: Introduction Basic Principles Contactors Master Switches and Pilot Devices Protective Devices Overload Prot ection Low Voltage Prot ection Special Motor Controllers Reduced Voltage Start Two-Speed Reversible Course 111 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: AC Motor Controllers 2 (IHRDC_OM_AEEA2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic procedures for troubleshooting and maint aining AC motor controllers. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o use diagrams and charts to obtain information about an AC motor controller. They should also be able to explain how t o troubleshoot a problem in an AC motor controller and how t o inspect and clean a controller's part s. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Explain how to use a schematic diagram to obtain informat ion about the operation of an AC motor cont roller. Explain how to use a wiring diagram to locate t he components in an AC motor controller. Describe a typical legend and a typical sequencing chart. Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting an AC motor cont roller. Ident ify and describe typical sources of information about the normal operat ion of an AC motor controller. Ident ify and describe possible sources of informat ion about an AC motor controller malfunction. Describe how to use a schematic diagram to diagnose an AC motor controller malfunction. Troubleshooting Describe how a voltage tester can be used to locate a malfunction in an energized AC motor controller. Describe how to test an AC motor cont roller to determine if it is de-energized. Describe how a megohmmeter can be used to test a de-energized AC motor controller for grounds. Describe how a multimeter can be used to locate an open and a short in a de-energized AC mot or controller. Maintenance Explain why an AC motor controller should be kept clean. Describe how an AC motor controller can be cleaned. Describe a basic procedure for inspecting an AC motor cont roller's magnetic contactor. Describe how to inspect an AC motor controller's wiring and components.
Subjects: Introduction Diagrams and Charts Procedures Troubleshooting Energized Controllers De-Energized Controllers Maintenance Cleaning Inspection Course 112 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: DC Motors (IHRDC_OM_AEEDM)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of DC motors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the operation and basic parts of a DC mot or. They should also be able t o describe basic procedures for maintaining and overhauling a DC mot or. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Motor Principles Explain what motor action is. Describe armature reaction in DC motors. Ident ify the basic parts of a DC motor. Explain how DC motors can be classified. Motor Maintenance Describe problems that can occur with the brushes in a DC mot or. Describe the characteristics of a good brush. Explain how to inspect and replace brushes in a DC motor. Describe how a commutator can be cleaned. Describe typical commutator problems. Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a DC motor's armature and field windings and their connect ions. Describe how to test for grounds, opens, and shorts in a DC motor. Motor Overhaul Describe how to disassemble a DC motor. Describe how to inspect and clean a disassembled DC motor. Describe how to reassemble a DC motor.
Subjects: Motor Principles Motor Action DC Mot ors Motor Maintenance Brushes and Brush Rigging Commutators Troubleshooting Motor Overhaul Disassembly Inspection and Cleaning Reassembly Course 113 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: Motor Branch Circuit Protection (IHRDC_OM_AEEMB)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of motor branch circuits. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the component s of a typical motor branch circuit, preventive maintenance procedures, and one way to troubleshoot a problem in a motor branch circuit. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Motor Branch Circuits Describe a typical mot or branch circuit. Ident ify and describe protect ion devices typically used in motor branch circuits. Describe a procedure for overriding a safety switch enclosure interlock. Describe general charact eristics of fuses commonly used in motor branch circuits. Describe how to determine what size fuse to use when the proper fuse rating for a motor branch circuit is unknown. Describe a typical molded-case circuit breaker and explain how it can be reset. Describe the operation of thermal, magnetic, and thermal-magnetic molded-case circuit breakers. Maintenance Describe a low-impedance grounding syst em t ypically used wit h motor branch circuit s and explain how it can be maintained. Describe a general preventive maintenance procedure for a motor branch circuit. Describe one way to troubleshoot a mot or branch circuit.
Subjects: Motor Branch Circuits Circuits Safety Swit ches Circuit Breakers Maintenance Prevent ive Maintenance Troubleshooting Course 114 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: Three Phase (IHRDC_OM_AEETP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h three-phase AC motor operation, inspect ion, testing, and maintenance. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to explain the basic principles of three-phase AC motor operation, how to inspect one, and how to conduct electrical t ests on one. They should also be able t o explain how to disconnect, disassemble, clean, reassemble, and reconnect a three-phase AC motor. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Motor Principles Describe alternating current. Explain the relationship bet ween the three phases of three-phase alternating current . Ident ify the basic parts of a three-phase AC motor. Ident ify and describe common types of three-phase AC mot ors. Describe the operation of a typical three-phase AC motor. Explain what slip is, and describe the effects of increasing load on an AC mot or. Describe how speed control can be accomplished in a t hree-phase AC motor. Inspection and Testing Describe how an operating and non-operating three-phase AC motor can be inspected. Explain the purpose of an insulation test and describe how it can be conducted on a three-phase AC mot or. Describe how to test for grounds in the stator of a three-phase AC motor. Describe how to test for opens in a wye-connected stator of a three-phase AC motor. Describe how to test for opens in a delta-connect ed stator of a three-phase AC mot or. Describe how to test for shorts in the stator of a three-phase AC mot or. Describe how to test for grounds, opens, and shorts in the rotor circuit of a wound three-phase AC mot or. Motor Maintenance Describe how to disconnect and disassemble a three-phase AC mot or. Describe how to inspect and clean a disassembled three-phase AC motor. Describe how to reassemble and reconnect a three-phase AC motor.
Subjects: Motor Principles AC Review Three-Phase AC Motors Speed Control Inspection and Testing Motor Inspection Insulation Testing Stator Testing Rotor Testing Motor Maintenance Disconnection and Disassembly Inspection and Cleaning Reassembly and Reconnect ion Course 115 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Battery Systems (IHRDC_OM_AEETM)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to industrial battery systems, and bat tery cells, and how to inspect and test batteries. After complet ing this unit, trainees should know the characteristics and baic operat ion of a typical battery system and its components. They should also underst and how to inspect and perform basic tests on industrial bat teries. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Battery Systems Describe a typical industrial battery system. List the basic components of a lead-acid cell. Describe the electrochemical action in a cell that is charging. Describe the electrochemical action in a cell that is discharging. State the voltage rating for a t ypical cell at full charge. Explain a cell's capacity rat ing. Briefly describe the relationship of cell capacity, voltage, and specific gravity during discharge and recharge. Describe the functions of a typical battery system charger. List the common components of most bat tery chargers and describe their functions. Inspection and Testing List the prot ective equipment and safety procedures associated with working on batt eries. Describe typical visual inspection checks. State the purpose of and describe t he basic steps for checking intercell and terminal connection resistances. State the purpose of and describe t he basic steps for checking specific gravity. Explain the effect of temperature on specific gravity.
Subjects: Introduction to Battery Systems System Overview Cell Components Cell and Batt ery Ratings Battery Chargers Inspection and Testing Battery System Safety Battery Inspection Volt age and Resist ance Testing Specific Gravity Test ing Course 116 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Fasteners (IHRDC_OM_AEEFA)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h various types of fasteners used in electrical work. After completing this unit, t he trainees should be able to describe common types of threaded and non-threaded fast eners and identify applications for which each type might be used. They should also be able to describe basic procedures for installing fasteners. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types of Fasteners Describe some common types of threaded fasteners and identify applications for which these fasteners may be used. Describe some common types of non-threaded fasteners and identify applicat ions for which these fasteners may be used. Installing Fasteners Describe general steps for inst alling threaded fasteners. Describe a typical procedure for installing a toggle bolt. Describe a typical procedure for installing an anchor bolt in wet concrete. Describe a typical procedure for installing an expansion anchor bolt in hardened concrete. Describe a typical procedure for installing blind rivets.
Subjects: Types of Fasteners Threaded Fasteners Non-Threaded Fasteners Installing Fasteners Basic Steps Installing Toggle Bolts Installing Anchor Bolts Installing Blind Rivets Course 117 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Introduction to the NEC (IHRDC_OM_AEEIN)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the organizat ion and layout of the National Elect rical Code. Aft er completing t his unit, the trainees should be able to use the NEC to locate specific types of information. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Overview Explain the purpose and describe the history of t he NEC. Describe how the NEC was developed and revised. Describe the role of testing laboratories in developing the NEC. Describe the purpose of the NFPA and the NEMA. Explain the difference between mandatory rules and advisory rules. Describe the kinds of informat ion found in Articles 90, 100, and 110 of the NEC. Define t he terms labeled and listed. Describe how the chapters of the NEC are organized. Describe the different types of text used in the NEC. Using the NEC Explain how to locate information for a particular procedure in the NEC. Ident ify and describe key sections of the NEC that are often used as references for servicing elect rical systems. Describe how the NEC can be used as a reference for installing elect rical systems.
Subjects: Overview Purpose and History Layout Using the NEC Navigating Examples Course 118 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Relays 1 (IHRDC_OM_TDRE1)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to t each the basic principles of protect ive relays and to introduce directional and nondirectional relays. The unit begins with t he basic theory of protective relays, commonly used types of relays, and a brief explanation of how t hese relays are used. Additional det ails and examples are provided for directional and nondirectional relays. At the conclusion of this unit , the trainees should have a basic understanding of how protective relays work. They should be able to explain the need for protective relays and to list commonly used types of relays and their functions. They should also be able to explain how directional and nondirect ional relays work and give examples of how they are used. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to relays Explain the purpose of protective relays in a T&D system and describe how they are used. Describe five common relay elements and how they work. Overcurrent relays Describe the basic operating principles of overcurrent relays and the condit ions that cause them to operate. Directional overcurrent relays Ident ify T&D equipment typically protected by directional overcurrent relays. Describe the basic operating principles of directional overcurrent relays and the conditions that cause them to operate. Reclosing relays Describe the basic function and operating principles of reclosing relays. Voltage relays Ident ify the type of equipment that volt age relays t ypically protect. Describe the basic operating principles of voltage relays and the conditions t hat cause t hem to operat e. Auxiliary relays Describe the basic function and operatiing principles of auxiliary relays. Solid-state relays Describe the basic operating principles of solid-state relays. Define t he terms analog signal , digit al signal and logic circuit .
Subjects: Introduction to relays Purpose and use of relays Relay elements: plunger element, clapper element, induct ion disc element , induction cup element and solid-state circuitry. Overcurrent relays: Instantaneous overcurrent relays; time-delay overcurrent relays Directional overcurrent relays: Usage and operation; three-phase directional relays Reclosing relays: function, components and operat ion Voltage relays Overvoltage and undervolt age relays with plunger elements; overvoltage relay with an induction disc element; overvoltage/undervoltage relay Auxiliary relays Function of auxiliary relays Auxiliary relay used t o trip multiple breakers Auxiliary relay used t o trip multiple overcurrent relays Solid-state relays Operating principles of solid state relays; Logic gates Course 119 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Relays 2 (IHRDC_OM_TDRE2)
Overview: This unit continues the development begun in Relays 1 by introducing differential and pilot relays and discussing routine relay maintenance. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees should be able to explain how differential and pilot relays work and give examples of situations where they are used. They should also be able to describe how to approach routine inspection and maintenance and how to put a relay in or out of service. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to relays Ident ify five common relay elements. Describe t he funct ions of overcurrent , direct ional overcurrent, reclosing, voltage, and auxiliary relays. Differential relays Ident ify what different ial relays typically protect. Describe t he basic operating principles of different ial relays and t he condition that causes a differential relay t o operate. Transfer tripping Describe the function of a transfer tripping system and identify its main components. Ident ify four communication channels used for transfer tripping and explain how they work. Ident ify the main equipment components associated with transfer tripping communication channels and describe their funct ions. Distance relays Ident ify what distance relays t ypically protect. Describe the basic operating principles of distance relays and the condition t hat causes a distance relay to operate. Pilot wire relaying Describe the function of a pilot wire relaying system. Ident ify the main components of a pilot wire relaying system and describe its basic operating principles. Breaker failure relaying Ident ify the function and the main components of a breaker failure relaying system. Describe the general operation of a breaker failure relaying system. Describe the basic operating principles of (1) a breaker failure relay and (2) a timing relay in a breaker failure relaying system.
Subjects: Introduction to relays Relay elements (plunger element, clapper element, iInduction disc element, induction cup element and solid-state circuitry) Basic protect ive relay functions (overcurrent relays, directional overcurrent relays, reclosing relays, volt age relays and auxiliary relays) Differential relays Different ial relay operation; current backfeed and different ial relay operation; types Transfer tripping Function of transfer tripping; transfer tripping example; communication channels and equipment Distance relays Function of distance relays; zoned protection; construction and operation of a dist ance relay Pilot wire relaying Pilot wire relaying system components and operation; pilot wire relay component s and operation Breaker failure relaying system components and operation Timing relay components and operation Course 120 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Troubleshooting Electrical Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AEETA)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the use of basic troubleshooting procedures to troubleshoot problems in electrical circuits. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to identify and describe the mainsteps of a basic troubleshooting procedure and use t he procedure to t roubleshoot problems in elect rical equipments and electrical systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Troubleshooting Fundamentals Explain what troubleshooting is. Ident ify and describe the main steps of a basic t roubleshooting procedure. Describe how electrical tests can be used in the process of eliminat ion. Describe two basic ways that the process of elimination can be used in t roubleshooting. Troubleshooting Examples Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in a piece of electrical equipment. Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in an electrical system.
Subjects: Troubleshooting Fundamentals What is Troubleshooting? The Process of Elimination Troubleshooting Examples Electrical Equipment Electrical Systems Course 121 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL THEORY: AC Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AEEAC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with the operation of AC circuits. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o explain how current flows t hrough AC circuit s and how AC current and voltage are affected by inductance and capacitance. They should also be able to define t rue power, reactive power, apparent power, and power factor, and to identify various types of single-phase and three-phase systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Alternating Current Explain the difference between direct current and alternating current. Explain how current flow and polarity change in AC circuits. Describe a sine wave t hat represents AC voltage. Explain what frequency is, and how it is measured. Define peak value, peak-to-peak value, and effective value with respect to AC voltage and current. Inductance Define inductance and inductive react ance. Explain how inductive reactance limits current flow. Explain how the inductive reactance in a circuit can be increased. Describe the effects of induct ance on current and voltage. Capacitance Define capacitance and capacitive react ance. Explain how a capacit or is charged. Describe the effects of capacit ance on current and voltage. AC Power Different iate between true power, reactive power, and apparent power. Explain how power factor is used in calculating true power in AC circuits. Explain how a three-wire single-phase AC system supplies two different voltages. Different iate between delta-connected and wye-connect ed three-phase AC systems.
Subjects: Alternating Current Current Flow Sine Waves Peak Values and Effective Values Inductance Inductance and Induct ive Reactance Factors That Affect Inductive React ance Inductance, Current, and Voltage Capacitance Capacitance and Capacitive Reactance Capacitance, Current and Voltage AC Power True Power, Reactive Power, and Apparent Power Single Phase and Three-Phase Systems Course 122 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL THEORY: Basic Electricity Review (IHRDC_OM_AEBER)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h some of the basic principles associat ed with electricity and electrical circuits. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o explain where electricity comes from; what voltage, current, and resistance are; and how their values can be calculated for various types of circuits. They should also be able t o explain how electrical circuits are affected by induct ion, inductance, and capacitance. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Concepts Explain what atoms are, and how they are constructed. Explain what voltage is, and how it can be produced. Explain what current is, and state t he basic difference bet ween direct current and alt ernating current. Explain what resistance is, and st at e the basic difference between a conductor and an insulat or. Explain how volt age, current, and resistance can be measured. Explain what power and elect rical energy are and how they can be measured. Explain how Ohm's Law relates to current , voltage, and resistance. Explain how to use Ohm's Law to calculate current, voltage, or resistance when the other two values are known. Circuit Types Describe the basic operating principles of a series circuit. Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a series circuit. Describe the basic operating principles of a parallel circuit. Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a parallel circuit. Describe the basic operating principles of a series-parallel circuit . Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a series-parallel circuit. Circuit Characteristics Explain what induction is and how voltage can be induced in a conduct or. Describe the basic operation of a transformer. Explain what inductance is and how it affects electrical circuits. Explain how the inductance of an induct or can be increased. Explain what capacitance is and how it affects electrical circuits. Describe the basic operation of a capacit or.
Subjects: Basic Concepts Where Does Electricit y Come From? Basic Electrical Quantities Ohm's Law Circuit Types Series Parallel Series-Parallel Circuit Characteristics Induction Inductance Capacitance Course 123 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL WIRING: Cables and Conductors (IHRDC_OM_AEECC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic construction and installation of electrical cables and conductors. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to describe the basic const ruction of cables and conductors, and how conductors are classified and rated. They should also be able to describe factors that affect the installat ion of a conductor for a specific application, and how to make splices and terminations. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Concepts Describe the basic construction of conductors. Describe how the physical characterist ics of a conductor's wires affect how the conduct or is classified and rated. Describe how the physical characterist ics of a conductor's insulation affect how the conductor is classified and rated. Installation Requirements Describe factors that determine the current requirements of a circuit. Describe factors that determine the voltage requirements of a circuit. Describe characteristics in an environment that affect t he type of conductor that should be installed. Explain how environmental temperatures affect t he type of conductor that should be installed. Electrical Connections Describe factors that should be considered when a mechanical connector is selected. Describe factors that should be considered when replacement insulat ion is selected. Describe how to make a splice. Describe how to make a termination.
Subjects: Basic Concepts Construction Classifications and Rat ings Installation Requirements The Circuit The Environment Electrical Connections Connectors and Replacement Insulation Splices and Terminations Course 124 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL WIRING: Conduit Installation (IHRDC_OM_AEECI)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic concepts of conduit and conduit fittings, and t ypical methods of cutting, bending, and installing conduit . After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the basic types of metallic and nonmetallic conduit, common types of conduit fittings, and procedures for cutting, bending, and installing met allic and nonmet allic conduit. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Materials Define t erms that are commonly used to describe conduit and conduit installations. Describe common types of metallic conduit . Describe common types of nonmetallic conduit . Fittings Describe types of couplings that are used t o connect conduit in a straight line. Describe types of fit tings t hat are used to change the direction of a conduit run. Describe types of fit tings t hat are used to secure conduit when it is installed. Cutting Describe a method for cutt ing rigid t ypes of met al conduit. Describe a method for cutt ing flexible types of metal conduit. Describe met hods for cutting nonmetallic conduit. Bending Describe different types of conduit bends and explain where they might be used in an installation. Explain how bends affect conduit measurements. Describe how rigid-type metal conduit can be bent. Describe how rigid PVC can be bent. Installing Describe tasks associated with t erminating conduit to an elect rical control box. Describe how conductors can be installed in conduit.
Subjects: Materials Overview Metallic Conduit Nonmetallic Conduit Fittings Making Straight Connections Changing Run Direction Securing Conduit Bending Bend Types Measurement s Demonstrations Installing Termination t o a Box Pulling Conductors Course 125 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL WIRING: Splices and Terminations (IHRDC_OM_AESAT)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h splices and terminations used in electrical systems of less than 600 volt s. After completing this unit, the t rainees should be able to identify basic types of electrical wiring, conductor terminals, and connect ors; describe tools and materials required to make conduct or splices and terminations; explain what makes a good electrical connection; describe common types of splices; and explain how to connect conductors to a terminal box on a 3-phase AC motor. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Hardware and Accessories Ident ify and describe basic types of elect rical wiring. Ident ify types of conductor terminals and connectors and describe the applications for which they are suitable. Ident ify and describe tools and materials typically used in making conductor splices and t erminations. Making Connections Ident ify the basic requirement s for a good electrical connection. Describe how to make some common types of splices and identify the applications for which each type of splice is suitable. Ident ify requirements for terminating conductors in enclosures. Describe how to make up connections to a terminal box on a 3-pnase AC mot or.
Subjects: Hardware and Accessories Types and Sizes of Conduct ors Terminals Solder Connect ors Solderless Connectors (Compression and Mechanical) Ring Terminal Spade (Fork) Terminal Quick Disconnect Terminals Butt Splice and Reducing Connect ors Compression Connector Variations Mechanical Connectors Dual-Rated Connectors Wire Connectors Strippers and Crimpers Solder and Soldering Tools Insulation (Tubing and Tapes) Cable Ties and Cable Clips Making Connections De-energizing Electrical Systems Stripping Insulation Selecting Connectors, Materials Common Splicing Methods (Western Union Splice, Rattail Joint, Fixture Joint , and Knott ed Tap Joint) Enclosures Motor Connect ions Course 126 of 245
Maintenance
FORKLIFTS: Operation (IHRDC_OM_AMFOO)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic design and operation of forklifts. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe how forklift s can be classified and identify t he major features and common working dimensions of a forklift. They should also be able to explain how to inspect a forklift, how to recharge or refuel a forklift, and how t o operate a forklift safely. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basics Describe ways in which forklifts can be classified and identify the t ypes of forklifts that are most appropriate for use in specific working conditions. Ident ify the major feat ures of most forklifts. Describe the common working dimensions of a forklift . Describe how to operate a typical forklift. Describe general safety considerations associated wit h forklift operation. Routine Tasks Describe tasks that are performed during typical forklift startup and prevent ive inspect ions. Describe basic procedures and safet y precautions associated wit h recharging elect ric forklifts and refueling forklifts that have internal combustion engines. Forklift Stability and Loads Explain the basic principles of forklift stabilit y and describe how they affect forklift operation. Describe general guidelines for handling loads safely with a forklift.
Subjects: Basics Types of Forklift s Major Features Basic Forklift Operation Forklift Traffic Safet y Routine Tasks Inspections Recharging and Refueling Forklift Stability and Loads Stability Handling Loads Course 127 of 245
Maintenance
GEARS: Overhauls (IHRDC_OM_AMGG1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to explain major tasks involved in gearbox overhauls. Trainees learn about disassembly and reassembly procedures for two t ypes of gearboxes: a double action unit and a worm gear unit. Trainees will also learn t ypical checks and measurements performed during gearbox overhauls. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Disassembly and Reassembly Describe precautions associated with the disassembly of a double-reduction gearbox. Describe one way to remove the upper housing of a double-reduction gearbox. Describe how to remove the bearing endcaps and internal components of a double-reduction gearbox. Describe common methods of removing and installing a gear on its shaft. Describe precautions associated with gearbox reassembly. Describe the installat ion of the gears and endcaps in a typical double-reduction gearbox. Describe how to complete t he reassembly of a typical double-reduction gearbox. Ident ify differences in preparing a unit to be stored and preparing a unit t o be returned to service. Checks and Measurement Describe the procedure to check for shaft endplay. Describe the procedure to check for backlash and tooth contact. Describe the procedure to check for shaft runout. Worm Gearset Ident ify the main components of a motor actuator that uses a worm gearset. Describe one way to disassemble a worm gearbox. Describe one way to reassemble a worm gearbox. Explain how tooth contact checks are made on a worm gear arrangement.
Subjects: Disassembly and Reassembly Disassembly Gear Removal and Replacement Reassembly Checks and Measurements Endplay Backlash and Tooth Contact Shaft Runout Worm Gearsets Basic Component s Disassembly Reassembly Course 128 of 245
Maintenance
GEARS: Types and Characteristics (IHRDC_OM_AMGG2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to gears and gear arrangements. After completing this unit , t rainees should know how a gearset basically works. They should be familiar wit h different types of gears and gear arrangements, and understand commonly used gear terminology. They should also be able to identify common gear problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Fundamentals Describe the function of gears. Describe how power, speed, and torque are involved in the operation of gears. Describe characteristics of spur gears. Describe characteristics of bevel gears. Describe characteristics of spiral bevel gears. Describe characteristics of helical gears. Describe characteristics of hypoid gears. Describe characteristics of worm gears. Define t he term backlash. Define t he term endplay. Define t he term t ooth cont act. Gearsets Ident ify the component s of a typical gearbox. Describe characteristics of a mechanical differential gearset arrangement. Gear Problems Ident ify some problems that can cause bearing failure. Describe gear tooth breakage and some condit ions that can cause it . Describe some gear lubricat ion problems. Describe how scoring affects gears. Describe how pitting affects gears.
Subjects: Fundamentals Speed and Torque Basic Types of Gears Worm Gears Backlash, Endplay, and Tooth Contact Gearsets Basic Gearbox Components Mechanical Differentials Gear Problems Bearing Failures Tooth Breakage Improper Lubrication Scoring and Pitting Course 129 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AHHAC)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of various types of cylinders and hydraulic motors in hydraulic systems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the basic components and common types of singleacting cylinders and double-acting cylinders. They should also be able to describe the basic components and operation of common types of vane motors, gear motors, piston motors, and part ial rotation actuat ors. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Cylinders Describe the basic components and operation of a single-acting load-return cylinder. Describe the basic components and operation of a single-acting spring ret urn cylinder. Describe the basic components and operation of a telescoping cylinder. Describe the basic components and operation of a double-acting cylinder. Describe the basic components and operation of a double-rod cylinder. Describe the basic functions of piston rings, rod seals, rod wipers, and cylinder cushions. Describe how fixed and pivoting cylinder mountings can be used to mount linear actuat ors. Motors Describe the basic components and operation of a vane motor. Explain what a balanced vane motor is. Describe the basic components and operation of an external gear motor. Describe the basic components and operation of an internal gear mot or. Describe the basic components and operation of a gerotor motor. Describe the basic components and operation of an in-line piston motor. Describe the basic components and operation of a variable displacement in-line pist on motor. Describe the basic components and operation of a bent -axis piston mot or. Describe the basic components and operation of a vane type rotary actuator. Describe the basic components and operation of a crank type piston actuator. Describe the basic components and operation of a rack type piston actuator.
Subjects: Cylinders Single-Acting Double-Act ing Features Motors Vane Gear Pist on Partial Rotation Actuators Course 130 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Component Inspection and Replacement (IHRDC_OM_AHHCI)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with typical procedures for removing, inspecting, reassembling, and reinst alling hydraulic system components. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe typical procedures for disassembling, inspecting, reconditioning, reassembling, and reinstalling valves, pumps, and cylinders. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Removal and Inspection Describe general precaut ions and preparations for safely removing and disassembling components from a hydraulic system. Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting valves that are commonly used in hydraulic systems. Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting a fixed displacement vane pump. Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting a hydraulic cylinder. Reassembly and Reinstallation Describe general procedures for reassembling and reinst alling hydraulic system components. Describe typical procedures for reconditioning, reassembling, and reinstalling valves that are used in a hydraulic system Describe typical procedures for reconditioning and reassembling a fixed displacement vane pump. Describe typical procedures for reinstalling a pressure compensated, variable displacement piston pump. Describe typical procedures for reconditioning, reassembling, and reinstalling a hydraulic cylinder.
Subjects: Removal and Inspection Basic Preparations Valve Inspection Pump Inspection Cylinder Inspection Reassembly and Reinstallation General Guidelines Valve Reconditioning and Reinst allation Pump Reconditioning and Reinst allation Cylinder Reconditioning and Reinst allation Course 131 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Diagrams (IHRDC_OM_AHHDI)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with hydraulic system schemat ic diagrams. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to interpret symbols that are used in hydraulic system schemat ic diagrams and use schematic diagrams t o trace fluid flow t hrough various t ypes of hydraulic circuits. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Symbols Ident ify symbols used to represent the basic parts of a hydraulic circuit. Ident ify types of lines represented on a hydraulic schematic diagram. Ident ify symbols used to represent the following pumps: unidirectional fixed displacement, bi-directional fixed displacement, unidirectional variable displacement, bi-directional variable displacement. Ident ify symbols used to represent the following component s: reservoirs, accumulators, heat ers, coolers, and filters. Ident ify symbols used to represent the following linear actuators: single-act ing, double-act ing, fixed cushion cylinder and adjustable cushion. Ident ify symbols used to represent the following hydraulic motors: unidirectional, fixed displacement, bi-directional, fixed displacement, unidirectional, variable displacement, bi-directional, variable displacement. Ident ify symbols used to represent the following valves: pressure relief valve, flow control valve, and directional cont rol valve. Reading Diagrams Describe basic guidelines for reading hydraulic schematic diagrams. Use a schemat ic diagram to describe how fluid flows through an automatic venting circuit . Use a schemat ic diagram to describe how fluid flows though an accumulator circuit. Use a schemat ic diagram to describe how fluid flows through a regenerat ive circuit.
Subjects: Symbols Overview Pumps Fluid Storage and Fluid Containers Actuators Valves Reading Diagrams Diagram Reading Basics Automat ic Venting Circuit Accumulator Circuit Regenerative Circuit Course 132 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Fluid and Reservoirs (IHRDC_OM_AHHFS)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the fluid used in hydraulic systems and with the basic functions and uses of filt ers and st rainers, reservoirs, conduct ors, and accumulators. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the functions, characteristics, and types of fluid that may be used in hydraulic systems. They should also be able to describe typical uses of filt ers and strainers, the components and accessories of typical reservoirs, the various types of conductors and fit tings, and t he basic functions and common uses of accumulat ors in hydraulic syst ems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Hydraulic Fluid Describe the functions of the fluid in a hydraulic syst em. Describe properties that are considered when hydraulic fluid is selected for a specific application. Describe the basic charact eristics of various types of hydraulic fluid. Explain how filt ers and strainers can be classified. Describe typical uses of strainers and filters in hydraulic systems. Reservoirs and Conductors State the function of a reservoir in a hydraulic system. Describe the components and accessories of a t ypical hydraulic fluid reservoir. Describe various types of heat exchangers that may be used wit h hydraulic fluid reservoirs. Describe types of conductors and fittings that are used in hydraulic systems. Accumulators Describe the basic function and common uses of accumulators in hydraulic systems. Describe the components and operat ion of various types of accumulators.
Subjects: Hydraulic Fluid Types of Fluid Filters and St rainers Reservoirs and Conductors Reservoirs Conductors Accumulators Function and Applications Types of Accumulators Course 133 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Principles and Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AHHPC)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the principles of hydraulic system operation and the components and operation of some typical hydraulic circuits. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o explain how force is transmitt ed through a liquid and how pressure and flow are related in a hydraulic system. They should also be able to describe the main concepts and basic operation of several t ypes of hydraulic circuits. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Principles Explain what a liquid is and how liquids differ from solids and gases. Explain how force is transmitted through a liquid. Define t he following terms: pressure, head, atmospheric pressure, vacuum, laminar flow, turbulent flow, velocity, and flow rate. Describe the relationship bet ween pressure and flow in a hydraulic system. Circuits List the main components of a basic hydraulic circuit and describe t he funct ion of each component. Describe the basic operation of an automat ic vent ing circuit. Describe the basic operation of an accumulator circuit. Describe the basic operation of a regenerative circuit.
Subjects: Principles Charact eristics of Liquids Pressure and Flow Circuits Circuit Component s Typical Hydraulic Circuits Course 134 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Pumps (IHRDC_OM_AHHPU)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of various types of pumps in hydraulic systems. After completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the basic operation of common types of gear pumps, vane pumps, radial piston pumps, axial piston pumps, and pressure compensated piston pumps. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types of Pumps Describe the basic operation of a hydraulic power circuit . Describe the role of a pump in a typical hydraulic power circuit. Describe how positive displacement pumps work and explain why they are used in hydraulic power circuits. Describe the differences between a fixed displacement pump and a variable displacement pump. Rotary Pumps Describe the basic operation of an external gear pump. Describe the basic operation of an internal gear pump. Describe the basic operation of a gerotor pump. Describe the basic operation of an unbalanced vane pump. Describe the basic operation of a pressure compensated vane pump. Describe the basic operation of a balanced vane pump. Piston Pumps Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement radial piston pump. Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement radial piston pump. Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement axial pist on pump. Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement axial pump. Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement bent-axis pump. Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement bent-axis pump. Describe the basic operation of a pressure compensated axial pist on pump.
Subjects: Types of Pumps Pump Basics Positive Displacement Pumps Rotary Pumps Gear Pumps Vane Pumps Piston Pumps Radial Piston Pumps Axial Pist on Pumps Pressure Compensated Piston Pumps Course 135 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Routine Maintenance (IHRDC_OM_AHHRM)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with tasks associated with t he regular or routine maintenance of hydraulic systems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe general considerations and safety precautions associated with routine maintenance. They should also be able t o describe procedures for performing external inspect ions and for maintaining t he hydraulic fluid, the reservoir, filters and strainers, accumulators, and heat exchangers. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: General Recommendations Describe what routine maintenance is, and state its purpose. Describe four steps involved in establishing a rout ine maintenance program. Describe personal protective equipment and clot hing that should be worn by personnel performing routine maintenance tasks. Ident ify hazards of hydraulic fluid spills and describe one method of cleaning up a spill. Describe what is generally meant by lock out and tag out and describe the purpose of such a procedure. System Inspections List components that are typically checked during a visual inspection and explain why t hey are checked. Describe problems to look for during a visual inspection of fluid lines on an operating hydraulic system. Ident ify areas where fluid leaks are commonly found, and describe possible causes. Describe the t erm starving t he pump and identify one possible cause. Explain what a sounding rod is, and describe specific conditions or malfunctions that can cause component s to make unusual sounds. Define t he term hot spot and explain how hot spots can be detected in a hydraulic system. List possible causes of excessive vibration in a hydraulic system and list some possible results of this problem. Component Maintenance Describe two types of contaminants that are t ypically found in hydraulic fluid, and identify likely causes of each. Describe how filt ers and strainers are maint ained and explain why they must be maintained. Describe a procedure for cleaning a hydraulic reservoir and explain t he purpose of this task. Explain the purpose of checking t he charge of a nitrogen-charged accumulator. Describe a procedure for cleaning an air-cooled heat exchanger, and explain why t his is necessary.
Subjects: General Recommendations Establishing a Program Safety System Inspections Visual Inspections Other External Inspections Component Maintenance Fluid and Reservoir Accumulators and Heat Exchangers Course 136 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_AHHTR)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with general steps for analyzing problems in hydraulic syst ems. After completing this unit, trainees should be able t o explain how to ident ify problems in hydraulic systems and describe common problems associated with hydraulic syst em components. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Problem Analysis Ident ify prerequisite knowledge and skills t hat mechanics should have in order to troubleshoot hydraulic systems effectively. Ident ify the basic steps of the troubleshooting process. Describe the process of identifying a problem and taking prevent ive action in immediat e response to a hydraulic system operating problem. Describe how to evaluate common general sympt oms of problems in a hydraulic system. Describe common methods for applying the process of elimination to troubleshoot problems in hydraulic systems. Describe major concerns associated wit h correcting problems and safely returning a hydraulic system to service. Component Problems Describe common problems that may be associated with the hydraulic fluid, hoses, and accumulators in a hydraulic system. Describe common problems that may be associated with the valves in a hydraulic system. Describe common problems that may be associated with the cylinders in a hydraulic system. Describe common problems that may be associated with the pumps and hydraulic motors in a hydraulic system.
Subjects: Problem Analysis Basics Immediate Response Problem Correct ion Component Problems Fluid, Hose, and Accumulator Problems Valve Problems Cylinder Problems Pump and Hydraulic Mot or Problems Course 137 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Valves 1 (IHRDC_OM_AHHV1)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic design and operation of various types of valves used in hydraulic systems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees will be able to describe the functions of flow and pressure in a hydraulic system, and identify and describe various types of manually adjusted valves, sliding spool valves, and spring-biased valves. They should also be able to describe various ways in which valves can be actuated. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Valve Basics Define flow and describe its function in a hydraulic system. Define pressure and describe its funct ion in a hydraulic system. Explain the functions of valves in a hydraulic system. Explain the t erm throttling. Ident ify and describe a typical needle valve. Ident ify and describe a typical globe valve. Ident ify and describe a typical plug valve. Ident ify and describe a typical ball valve. Ident ify and describe a typical gate valve. Actuated Valves Ident ify and describe the main components of a typical directional control, sliding spool valve. Explain positioning of a directional control sliding spool valve. Ident ify and describe a typical check valve. Ident ify and describe a typical relief valve. Ident ify and describe a typical pressure reducing valve. Define cracking pressure and pressure override. Describe three methods of valve actuat ion. Explain what a solenoid does, and describe two different types of solenoids. Describe a servo system and explain what it does. Describe what a pilot-operated valve is and how it works.
Subjects: Valve Basics Basic Principles Manually-Adjusted Valves Actuated Valves Sliding Spool Valves Spring-Biased Valves Methods of Actuation Course 138 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Valves 2 (IHRDC_OM_AHHV2)
Overview: This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the functions performed by various types of valves in hydraulic syst ems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how valves control flow rate, flow direction, and pressure in a hydraulic system. They should be able to describe the basic operat ion of a pressure-compensated flow control valve, a temperaturecompensated flow control valve, various types of flow control circuit s, a pressure reducing valve, a relief valve, a sequence valve, and a counterbalance valve. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Flow and Directional Control Describe what a non-adjustable orifice is and what it does. List three factors that affect t hrottled flow through a valve. Describe how a pressure-compensated flow control valve works. Describe how a temperature-compensated flow control valve works. Ident ify three different flow control circuits. Describe a bleed-off circuit and how it is used. Describe a meter-in circuit and how it is used. Describe a meter-out circuit and how it is used. Explain how a directional control sliding spool valve controls fluid direction in a hydraulic syst em. Pressure Control Explain what a pressure reducing valve does and how it works. Explain what a relief valve does and how it works. Explain what a sequence valve does and how it works. Explain what a counterbalance valve does and how it works.
Subjects: Flow and Directional Control Flow Cont rol Valves Flow Cont rol Circuits Directional Control Pressure Control Pressure Reduction and Relief Sequencing and Counterbalancing Course 139 of 245
Maintenance
LUBRICATION: Lubrication Basics (IHRDC_OM_AMLBA)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the properties and uses of various types of lubricants. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain why lubricants are used and describe some charact eristic properties of lubricants. They should also be able t o describe procedures for storing, handling, and applying lubricants. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Lubrication Describe three types of friction, three types of lubricants, and t hree levels of lubrication. Describe some of the characteristic propert ies of lubricants. Ident ify factors that usually affect the selection of a lubricant for a specific situation. Explain how to use a typical lubrication chart. Storing and Handling Lubricants Describe proper procedures for, and safety concerns associated with the storage of lubricants. Describe common types of lubricant equipment. Describe common safety concerns and precautions that are associated with t he handling of lubricant s. Describe common procedures for handling, dispensing, and applying lubricants. Oils and Greases Describe some of the typical groups of general oils. Describe common methods of oil lubrication. Describe some unique properties of greases. Compare the uses of greases and oils for lubrication. Describe some common methods of applying grease.
Subjects: Introduction to Lubrication Friction and Lubrication Properties of Lubricants Lubricant Selection Storing and Handling Lubricants Lubricant Storage Lubrication Equipment Lubricant Handling Oils and Greases Types of Oils Oil Lubrication Properties of Grease Applying Grease Course 140 of 245
Maintenance
MATH: Basics of Math (IHRDC_OM_AMMBA)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic mathematical applications that can be used on the job. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to int erpret measurements that include fractions and decimal values, measurement s in English and metric units, and perform mathematical applications involving fractions and decimals. They should also be able to calculate dimensions associated with rect angles, t riangles, and circles. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Working With Numbers Interpret measurements that include fract ions. Add and subt ract fractional measurements. Multiply and divide fractional measurements. Convert a fraction to a decimal, and a decimal to a fraction. Convert a decimal to a percent, and a percent to a decimal. Perform mathematical operations with decimal numbers. Use a calculator to perform mathematical operations. Round off a decimal to a specific number of places. Interpret measurements in metric units. Angles and Shapes Explain what an angle is, and how angles are measured. Explain what a rectangle is, and define the terms length and widt h. Explain what a t riangle is, and define the terms base and height. Explain what a circle is, and define the terms diameter and radius. Calculate the perimeter of a rect angle. Calculate the length of the hypotenuse of a right angle. Calculate the circumference of a circle. Areas and Volumes Calculate the area of a rectangle, a right triangle, and a circle. Calculate the volume of a rect angular solid. Calculate the volume of a cylinder.
Subjects: Working With Numbers Fractions and Measurements Working Wit h Fractions Decimals Using a Calculator Metric Measurement s Angles and Shapes Angles Rect angles, Triangles, and Circles Working Wit h Shapes Areas and Volumes Areas Volumes Course 141 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Motor Operators (IHRDC_OM_AMPMO)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of motor operators. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify the main parts of a motor operator and explain how a motor operator opens and closes a valve. They should also be able t o describe the parts and operation of limit and torque switches, and explain how these swit ches can be replaced and adjusted. In addition, they should be able to describe preventive maintenance procedures for a motor operator and explain how to troubleshoot a motor operator problem. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Mechanical Components Name the basic parts of a typical mot or operator and describe the function of each part . Describe how the gears in a typical motor operator work during motor-driven operation and during manual operation. Electrical Controls Describe the parts and operation of a typical rotary drum limit switch, and explain how the switch is replaced and adjusted. Describe the parts and operation of a typical t orque switch, and explain how the switch is replaced and adjusted. Maintenance and Troubleshooting Describe preventive maintenance procedures for a typical motor operat or. Explain how to troubleshoot a typical mot or operator.
Subjects: Mechanical Components Basic Component s Motor and Gear Operation Electrical Controls Limit Switches Torque Switches Maintenance and Troubleshooting Prevent ive Maintenance Troubleshooting Course 142 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Pipes and Pipe Fittings (IHRDC_OM_AMPPP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h common types of pipes, pipe joints, and pipe fit tings, and to provide general guidelines for working with pipes. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to identify common materials used to make pipes, and explain how pipes are identified and sized. They should also be able to identify common t ypes of pipe joints and pipe fittings, and describe procedures for calculating pipe lengths, cutting pipe, and threading pipe. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basics Ident ify some common materials used to make pipe and describe characterist ics of those materials. Describe how pipes are usually sized and explain how t hey are marked for identification. Describe some common signs of wear and damage t o look for during a pipe inspection. State some basic guidelines for handling and storing pipes. Joints and Fittings Ident ify some common types of pipe joint s and describe their characteristics. Ident ify some common types of pipe fit tings and describe their funct ions. Installation Describe some basic met hods for calculating the length of pipe needed bet ween fittings. Ident ify some common tools used to cut pipe and explain how they operate. Explain how to use a pipe die to cut t hreads in a pipe.
Subjects: Basics Pipe Materials Sizes and Identification Inspection, Handling, and Storage Joints and Fittings Joints Fitt ings Installation Calculating Pipe Length Cutt ing Pipe Threading Pipe Course 143 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Safety Valves (IHRDC_OM_AMPSV)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of types of safety valves commonly found in indust rial facilities. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the parts and operation of a huddling chamber safety valve, a safet y-relief valve, and a pilot-actuated relief valve. They should also be able t o describe procedures for inspecting, disassembling, reassembling, and testing a safet y valve. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types of Safety Valves Describe the parts and operation of a typical huddling chamber safety valve. Describe the parts and operation of a typical safety-relief valve and a typical pilot-actuat ed valve. Safety Valve Maintenance Describe the procedure for performing an external inspect ion on a safety valve. Describe procedures for disassembling a safety valve and inspecting its internal components. Describe procedures for reassembling and testing a safety valve before put ting it in service.
Subjects: Types of Safety Valves Huddling Chamber Safety Valves Specialized Relief Valves Safety Valve Maintenance External Inspection Disassembly and Inspection Reassembly and Testing Course 144 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Steam Traps (IHRDC_OM_AMPST)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of types of steam t raps commonly found in industrial facilities. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe functions commonly performed by steam t raps, describe common t ypes of steam traps, and describe procedures for performing steam trap surveys and replacing worn or damaged steam trap components. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basics Describe functions typically performed by steam traps. Describe the components of a typical steam trap station. Types of Steam Traps Describe the basic operation of two common types of mechanical steam traps: inverted bucket and float, and t hermostatic. Describe the basic operation of two common types of thermostatic steam traps: bellows and bi-metallic.Describe t he basic operation of a typical thermodynamic disc-type steam trap. Inspecting and Replacing Describe what to check for during a survey or inspection of a steam trap st at ion. Describe typical procedures for performing a t emperature inspection, a sound inspection, and a visual inspection of a steam trap. Describe a typical procedure for replacing worn or damaged steam trap component s.
Subjects: Basics Functions of Steam Traps Steam Trap St at ions Types of Steam Traps Mechanical Traps Thermostatic Traps Inspecting and Replacing Surveying Steam Trap Stations Surveying Steam Traps Replacing Steam Traps Course 145 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Valve Maintenance (IHRDC_OM_AMPV2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic procedures for performing routing maintenance on a valve and for performing a valve overhaul. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe tasks involved in preparing for valve maint enance and explain how to adjust and replace valve packing. They should also be able to describe how to disassemble a valve, inspect its part s, perform maintenance on it, and reassemble it. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Routine Maintenance Describe tasks typically complet ed in preparation for performing maintenance on a valve. Describe how to adjust packing in a valve. Describe how to remove packing from a valve. Describe how to replace the packing in a valve. Valve Overhaul Describe a basic procedure for disassembling a valve. Describe tasks associated with inspecting the parts of a valve. Explain how lapping and spotting-in are performed on a valve seating area. Describe a basic procedure for reassembling a valve and returning it t o service.
Subjects: Routine Maintenance Maintenance Preparations Adjusting and Replacing Packing Valve Overhaul Disassembly and Inspection Maintenance Reassembly Course 146 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Valve Types and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AMPV1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic components and operation of valves commonly found in industrial sites. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o explain how valves can be classified, describe the parts and operation of various types of valves, and describe how valves can be operated. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Valve Fundamentals Describe the basic purpose of a valve. Ident ify the basic components of a valve. Ident ify the valves that are commonly classified. Valve Types Describe the basic components and operation of a gate valve. Describe the basic components and operation of common types of globe valves. Describe the basic components and operation of a plug valve, a ball valve, and a butterfly valve. Describe the basic components and operation of a diaphragm valve. Describe the basic components and operation of a swing check valve, a lift check valve, and a ball check valve. Valve Operation Describe how a handwheel is used to operate a valve. Describe how a handle is used to operate a valve. Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatically, hydraulically, and electrically powered mechanical operators for valves.
Subjects: Valve Fundamentals Valve Characteristics Valve Classificat ions Valve Types Gate Valves Globe Valves Plug, Ball, and Butterfly Valves Diaphragm Valves Check Valves Valve Operation Manual Operation Mechanical Operators Course 147 of 245
Maintenance
PUMPS: Centrifugal Pump Basics and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_AMPC1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion of centrifugal pumps and general procedures for troubleshooting centrifugal pump problems. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the basic operation of a centrifugal pump, explain how cent rifugal pumps can be classified, identify the main part s of a centrifugal pump, and describe problems that can occur in them. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Pump Basics Name the two most common t ypes of pumps and describe t he differences between them. Describe the basic operation of a centrifugal pump. Ident ify and describe characteristics that are used to classify cent rifugal pumps. Describe advantages and applications of various types of centrifugal pumps. Pump Parts Name the main ext ernal parts of a centrifugal pump and describe the function of each. Name the main internal part s of a centrifugal pump and describe the function of each. Troubleshooting Describe some general considerations associated wit h troubleshooting a centrifugal pump. Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem t hat can be heard, and list the probable causes of t hose symptoms. Describe the causes and effects of cavitation, and explain how it can be eliminat ed. Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem t hat can be seen, and list the probable causes of those symptoms. Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem t hat can be felt, and list the probable causes of those symptoms. Describe some general preparations for working on a pump. Describe some problems that can be detected by inspecting the int ernal parts of a centrifugal pump.
Subjects: Pump Basics Types of Pumps Centrifugal Pump Operat ion Classification of Centrifugal Pumps Pump Parts External Parts Internal Part s Troubleshooting General Considerations Common Symptoms Internal Problems Course 148 of 245
Maintenance
PUMPS: Centrifugal Pump Overhaul (IHRDC_OM_AMPC2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic procedures for overhauling a cent rifugal pump. Aft er completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe preparations for a centrifugal pump overhaul, procedures for disassembling a centrifugal pump, inspecting its parts, and reassembling it. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Preliminary Steps Describe general preparations for a centrifugal pump overhaul. Describe safety precautions that should be taken as part of preparing t o work on a centrifugal pump. Describe a procedure for removing the upper half of a horizontally split centrifugal pump casing. Describe a procedure for preliminary inspection of the internal parts of a centrifugal pump. Disassembly and Assembly Describe a procedure for disassembling t he internal parts of a centrifugal pump. Ident ify the parts of a centrifugal pump t o be inspect ed and state what to look for in each part. Describe how to measure the clearance between a casing wearing ring and an impeller. Explain how to determine if casing wearing rings are round. Describe the procedure for performing a shaft runout test . Reassembly List steps that are commonly taken in preparing to reassemble a centrifugal pump. Describe a procedure for reinstalling an impeller. Describe a procedure for reassembling and reinstalling a rotor. Describe a procedure for reassembling the casing of a centrifugal pump.
Subjects: Preliminary Steps Preparation Casing Removal Preliminary Inspect ion Disassembly and Inspection Disassembly Inspection Wearing Ring Measurements Shaft Tests Reassembly Reinstalling the Impeller Reassembling and Reinstalling the Rot or Reassembling the Casing Course 149 of 245
Maintenance
PUMPS: Multistage Centrifugal (IHRDC_OM_AMPMC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion, disassembly, and reassembly of a typical multistage centrifugal pump. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe the components and operation of a multistage cent rifugal pump and explain how this kind of pump can be disassembled and reassembled when necessary. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basic Concepts Ident ifyand describe the component s of a typical multistage centrifugal pump. Describe the operation of a typical multist age centrifugal pump. Describe techniques t hat are commonly used to minimize axial thrust in a multistage centrifugal pump. Describe techniques t hat are commonly used to minimize radial thrust in a multistage centrifugal pump. Ident ify problems commonly found in mult istage centrifugal pumps. Describe techniques used to ident ify problems in a mult istage centrifugal pump. Pump Assembly Describe tasks that are commonly part of preparing for a pump disassembly. Describe a general procedure for disassembling an axially split multistage centrifugal pump. Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a radially split multistage centrifugal pump is disassembled. Describe tasks that are commonly performed as part of removing components from a pump shaft assembly. Pump Reassembly Describe tasks that are commonly performed when pump shaft assembly components are installed. Describe a general procedure for reassembling an axially split multistage centrifugal pump. Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a radially split multistage centrifugal pump is reassembled. Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a mult istage centrifugal pump is returned to service.
Subjects: Basic Concepts Types of Multistage Cent rifugal Pumps Components and Operation Minimizing Axial and Radial Thrust Ident ifying Common Problems Pump Disassembly Preparations Axially Split Pumps Radially Split Pumps Shaft Assemblies Pump Reassembly Shaft Assemblies Axially Split Pumps Radially Split Pumps Return to Service Course 150 of 245
Maintenance
PUMPS: Positive Displacement (IHRDC_OM_AMPPD)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and maintenance of positive displacement pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of various t ypes of reciprocating and rotary positive displacement pumps. They should also be able t o describe how to prepare for overhauling a posit ive displacement pump, disassemble the pump, clean and inspect its parts, and then reassemble it. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types and Operation Describe the basic operation of a pist on pump. Describe the basic operation of a plunger pump. Describe the basic operation of a diaphragm pump. Describe the basic operation of a double-acting pump. Explain what a duplex pump is. Describe the basic operation of a screw pump. Describe the basic operation of a gear pump. Describe the basic operation of a lobe pump. Describe the basic operation of a sliding vane pump. Describe the basic operation of a flexible member pump. Overhaul Preparations and Pump Assembly Describe general preparations for a pump overhaul. Describe basic tasks associated wit h disconnecting a pump from its motor and bedplate. Explain how to remove the timing gears and the outboard bearing bracket from a two-screw rot ary pump. Describe a basic procedure for removing mechanical seals from a t wo-screw rotary pump. Describe basic guidelines for removing the rotors from a two-screw rotary pump. Cleaning, Inspection, and Reassembly Describe precautions associated with cleaning pump component s. Describe basic steps for inspect ing the components of a two-screw rotary pump. Describe general preparations that should be made before a pump is reassembled. Describe a basic procedure for reassembling a two-screw rotary pump.
Subjects: Types and Operation Reciprocating Pumps Rotary Pumps Overhaul Preparations and Pump Assembly Overhaul Preparations Init ial Disassembly Final Disassembly Cleaning, Inspection and Reassembly Cleaning and Inspection Reassembly Course 151 of 245
Maintenance
RIGGING: Basic Lifting (IHRDC_OM_AMRLL)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the proper use of devices designed to lift and move loads. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe how to use a simple block and tackle, a compound block and t ackle, a hoist, a jack, a winch, a turnbuckle, and a load leveler. They should also be able to describe t he effects of sling angles and hitch pat terns on a sling's lifting ability. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Block and Tackle Ident ify the parts of a simple block and t ackle. Describe the proper use of a simple block and tackle. Ident ify the parts of a typical compound block and t ackle. Describe inspections that are typically performed before a compound block and tackle is used. Explain what is involved in reeving a block and t ackle. Describe the proper use of a compound block and tackle. Define mechanical advant age. Explain how to use a formula to select the appropriate block and tackle needed to lift a given weight. Hoists, Jacks, and Winches Describe the basic operation of a chain hoist. Describe the basic operation of a come-along. Describe the basic operation of a ratchet jack. Describe the basic operation of a screw jack. Describe the basic operation of a hydraulic jack. Describe basic safety precautions associated with using a jack. Describe the basic operation of a winch. Slings and Levelers Describe the effects of sling angles on a sling's lift ing capacity. Describe the effects of hitch patterns on a sling's lifting capacit y. Describe how a turnbuckle can be used to adjust sling length. Describe how a load leveler can be used to balance a load.
Subjects: Block and Tackle Simple Block and Tackle Compound Block and Tackle Mechanical Advantage Hoists, Jacks and Winches Hoist s Jacks Winches Slings and Levelers Slings Leveling Devices Course 152 of 245
Maintenance
RIGGING: Heavy Lifting (IHRDC_OM_AMRHL)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h equipment and procedures used for lifting and moving heavy objects. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe various types of rigging hardware and cranes. They should also be able t o explain how to use lifting capacity charts and how to balance loads. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Heavy Lifting Equipment Describe the following rigging components and identify basic inspect ion checks that should be made to t hem: Shackles Hooks Swivels Turnbuckles Rigging links and equalizer plates Lifting lugs and eyebolts Spreader beams and lifting beams Tag lines Heavy Lifting Procedures Describe how to read and interpret lifting capacity charts. Describe load balancing techniques commonly used during heavy lifting. Describe basic procedures involved in planning and completing a heavy lifting job using a crawler crane.
Subjects: Heavy Lifting Equipment Hardware Bridge Cranes Boom Cranes Crane Inspections Heavy Lifting Procedures Capacity Charts Load Balancing Crawler Crane Job Course 153 of 245
Maintenance
RIGGING: Ladders and Scaffolds (IHRDC_OM_AMRLS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h various types of ladders and scaffolds that enable personnel t o work at elevated height s. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe how t o select the proper ladder for a job and then use t he ladder safely. They should also be able to describe general safet y precautions associated wit h using scaffolds, and the basic operat ion and use of various types of fixed and powered scaffolds. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ladders Describe various types of ladders and their ratings. Explain how to select t he proper ladder for the job. Explain how to use a ladder safely. Fixed Scaffolds Describe general safety precautions associated with stationary, or fixed scaffolds. Describe the assembly, use, and disassembly of a systems scaffold. Describe the assembly, use, and disassembly of a t ubular welded frame scaffold. Powered Scaffolds Describe the basic components and operation of a pneumat ic scaffold. Describe the basic components and operation of a hydraulic scaffold.
Subjects: Ladders Types of Ladders Ladder Safety Fixed Scaffolds Scaffold Safety Systems Scaffolds Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds Powered Scaffolds Pneumatic Scaffolds Hydraulic Scaffolds Course 154 of 245
Maintenance
RIGGING: Overview (IHRDC_OM_AMROV)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles involved in moving materials and equipment from one place to another. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to describe t he funct ions of various t ypes of rigging equipment and explain how t o select and inspect equipment for a job that involves rigging. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Rigging Describe the basic charact eristics of fiber rope, wire rope, and chain. Ident ify and describe the functions of t he following end fittings and connectors: eye splices, thimbles, wire rope clips, shackles, sockets, wedge socket s and hooks. Ident ify and describe the uses bridle slings, choker hitch slings and basket hitch slings. Explain how to inspect wire rope, chains, synthetic web slings, hooks, shackles and socket s, and equipment to be rigged. Derricks and Cranes Ident ify the following types of derricks: A-frame and Gin pole derricks Guy derricks and Stiffleg derricks Chicago boom derricks Ident ify the following types of cranes: Crawler cranes Truck-mounted cranes Truck-mounted hydraulic cranes Gantry-mounted cranes Tower-mounted cranes Hammerhead cranes Rough-terrain cranes Carrydeck cranes Describe hand signals commonly used for different types of cranes. Rigging and Moving Loads Explain how to estimate the size and weight of a load. Explain how to find a load's center of gravity. Ident ify the following types of knots: bowline, running bowline, timber hitch, half hitch, square know, clove hitch and barrel hitch. Describe the basic rigging safety precautions. Describe basic steps involved in planning a rigging job. Describe how to select t he proper equipment for a rigging job.
Subjects: Introduction to Rigging Ropes and Chains End Fittings, Connectors, and Slings Equipment Inspections Derricks and Cranes Derricks and Cranes Crane Hand Signals Rigging and Moving Loads Estimating Size, Weight, and Center of Gravity Tying Knots Rigging and Moving Materials and Equipment Course 155 of 245
Maintenance
SAFETY: Basics (IHRDC_OM_AMSBA)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h hazards they may encounter on the job, and ways in which t hey can protect t hemselves from these hazards. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe causes of on-the-job accident s, explain how company safety policies can help prevent accidents, describe actions t hat can be taken to make a work site safe, and explain how workers can protect themselves from electrical hazards and fire hazards. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Preventing Accidents Describe causes of on-the-job accidents. Explain how good housekeeping can prevent accidents. Explain why it is important to follow all company safety policies. Explain why it is important to report on-the-job injuries, accident s, and near misses. Explain why it is important for workers to know and follow company evacuation procedures. Work Site Safety Describe typical personal protective equipment, and explain when and why each type of equipment is used. Describe how to inspect and care for personal protect ive equipment . Describe safe procedures for lift ing heavy object s. Describe common workplace hazards. Describe rules and guidelines for general work site safety. Describe safety requirements for working in confined spaces. Describe safe pract ices for operating or working near motorized vehicles. Describe safe lockout/tagout procedures. Describe safe pract ices for working around barriers and barricades. State the purpose of the OSHA Hazard Communicat ion St andard and the function of Material Safety Data Sheets. Describe rules and guidelines for working safely around hazardous substances. Describe how to inspect and work safely with ladders. Describe how to inspect and work safely with scaffolds. Electrical and Fire Safety Describe typical work site electrical hazards. Describe safe pract ices for working around electrical hazards. Describe actions t hat should be taken when an electrical shock occurs. Explain how fires start. Describe common fire prevent ion practices. Ident ify the classes of fires and the type of extinguisher to use for each class. Describe actions t hat should be taken if a fire occurs.
Subjects: Preventing Accidents Accidents; Safety Policies Work Site Safety Personal Protection; Safe Work Practices Equipment and Materials Ladders and Scaffolds Electrical and Fire Safety Course 156 of 245
Maintenance
SAFETY: Chemical Health Hazards (IHRDC_OM_AMSHS)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h chemical health hazards that might be present in the workplace. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify various types of physical hazards and health hazards associated with chemicals and describe how they can protect themselves from those hazards. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Identification Define t he terms physical hazard and health hazard and identify examples of each. Define t he term route of entry and describe three examples. Define t he terms acute effects and chronic effects and describe examples of each. Describe information that is provided on Material Safety Data Sheets. Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the NFPA fire diamond. Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the HMIS labeling syst em. Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the DOT labeling system. Protection Describe two types of respirat ors. Describe how to determine if a respirator is in safe working condition. Describe how to properly select and use goggles. Describe how to properly select and use chemical-resist ant clothing. Describe two properties of a chemical that can indicat e a hazardous situation. Describe general steps for responding t o a chemical emergency.
Subjects: Identification Types of Hazards Documents and Labels Protection Respirators Clothing and Equipment Emergency Response Course 157 of 245
Maintenance
SAFETY: Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AMSEL)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of electricit y and electrical safety. At t he conclusion of htis unit, trainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of working safely around elect rical equipment Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Electrical Concepts Describe the basic elect rical quantities of current, voltage, and resistance. Shock State what an electrical shock is. Describe factors that affect the severity of an electrical shock. Describe the physical effects of current passing through the human body. Hazards Describe hazards associated with working near electrical equipment. Protection Describe ways of providing protect ion to personnel from hazards associated with electricit y. Emergencies Describe how to safely give aid to an electrical shock victim. Describe how to safely respond to an electrical fire.
Subjects: Electrical Concepts Friend or Foe? Current Volt age Resistance Shock What Is Shock? Amount of Current Length of Time Path Through the Body Effects Hazards High Voltage Area Overloaded Circuits Damaged Cords Bare Connect ors Long and Tall Objects Mobile Equipment Standing Water Course 158 of 245
Maintenance
SEALS: Gaskets and Packing (IHRDC_OM_AMMSG)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the use of gaskets and packing to prevent or minimize leakage from equipment such as pumps and valves. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to identify various types of gaskets and explain how t o cut and install gaskets. They should also be able to identify the components of a packing gland and explain how to remove and install packing. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Gaskets Explain how gaskets work. Describe common types of gaskets. Describe a procedure for using a gasket cutter. Describe a procedure for cut ting a gasket by hand. Describe a procedure for installing a basic flat gasket on a pump casing. Describe a procedure for installing an "O" ring on a flange. Packing Describe packing and explain how it works. Describe components of a typical packing gland. Describe compression and hydraulic packing. Describe a procedure for removing old packing from a pump. Describe a procedure for installing new packing on a pump.
Subjects: Gaskets Operation Cutt ing Gasket s Installing Gaskets Packing Operation Packing Removal Packing Installation Course 159 of 245
Maintenance
SEALS: Mechanical (IHRDC_OM_AMMES)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the use and installation of various types of mechanical seals. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o identify the components of commonly used types of mechanical seals, explain why mechanical seals can fail, and identify causes of seal failures by examining seal components. They should also be able to disassemble a pump t o remove a mechanical seal, take the appropriat e installation measurements, and install a new mechanical seal. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Ident ify the component s of a typical mechanical seal. Describe how a typical mechanical seal operates. Ident ify commonly used types of mechanical seals. Describe some common causes of mechanical seal failures. Explain how to identify causes of seal failures by examining seal components. Preparations for Seal Installations Describe one way to disassemble a pump to remove a mechanical seal. Describe checks and measurements commonly made during and after t he pump disassembly to prepare for a mechanical seal inst allation. Seal Installations Explain how certain pump component s are temporarily reassembled so that preliminary measurements can be t aken before a new mechanical seal is installed. Describe one way to install an inside pusher seal. Describe one way to install an elastomer bellows seal. Describe one way to install a metal bellows seal. Describe one way to install an outside seal. Describe one way to install a cartridge seal.
Subjects: Introduction Seal Components Types of Mechanical Seals Mechanical Seal Failures Preparations for Seal Installations Pump Disassembly Pump Component Checks Seal Installations Installation Measurement s Inside Pusher Seal Installation Non-Pusher Seal Installation Out side and Cartridge Seals Course 160 of 245
Maintenance
SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AMSAF)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles associated with measuring and correcting shaft misalignment. Aft er completing t his unit, trainees should be able t o describe the basic types of misalignment, conditions t hat may affect shaft alignment, and how to perform a rough alignment . Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction Describe the basic types of misalignment. Describe how a proper orientation t o equipment should be established prior to alignment procedure. Describe basic measurements that are necessary for determining misalignment. Describe how misalignment is corrected. Describe the basic operation of two t ypes of dial indicators commonly used for alignment work. Conditions Affecting Alignment Ident ify common foundation problems and describe preparations performed on equipment foundations. Describe what a soft foot is. Describe a procedure for measuring and correcting a soft foot condition. Describe what pipe st rain is, and how it can affect shaft alignment . Describe a procedure for measuring pipe strain. Describe how a bent shaft or bad bearings can affect shaft alignment. Describe a procedure for measuring shaft runout. Describe what thermal growt h is and how it can affect shaft alignment. Describe procedures for measuring thermal growth. Rough Alignment Procedure Describe a procedure for measuring and setting the mechanical center of a pump's shaft. Describe a procedure for determining the magnetic center of an elect ric mot or. Describe a rough alignment procedure using the straightedge and feeler gage met hod.
Subjects: Introduction Types of Misalignment Alignment Orientation Basic Measurements and Corrections Conditions Affecting Alignment Foundat ion Problems Soft Foot Pipe Strain Shaft and Bearing Problems Thermal Growth Rough Alignment Procedure Basic Preparations Straightedge and Feeler Gage Method Course 161 of 245
Maintenance
SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Reverse Dial and Laser (IHRDC_OM_AMSRD)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h equipment and procedures for aligning shafts using the reverse dial method and using a laser system. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to prepare and set up equipment for a reverse dial and laser-based alignment. They should also be able to measure shaft misalignment and determine how it should be corrected so t hat the alignment is within specified tolerances. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Preparing for a Reverse Dial Alignment Review the basic types of shaft misalignment . Describe the arrangement of instrument s used to perform a reverse alignment. Describe the general types of preparations required for a shaft alignment using the reverse dial met hod. Performing a Reverse Dial Alignment Explain how to measure misalignment in the vertical plane using the reverse dial method. Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the vertical plane that is measured by the reverse dial method. Describe how to correct misalignment in the vert ical plane. Explain how to measure misalignment in the horizontal plane using the reverse dial met hod. Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the horizontal plane that is measured by the reverse dial method. Describe how to correct misalignment in the horizont al plane. Explain how to determine if a shaft alignment is within tolerances. Laser Alignment Describe the basic part s and operation of a laser alignment system.
Subjects: Preparing for a Reverse Dial Alignment Fundamentals Equipment Preparations Performing a Reverse Dial Alignment Overview Measuring Vertical Plane Alignment Measuring Horizontal Plane Alignment Graphing and Correct ing Horizontal Misalignment Alighment Tolerances Laser Alignment System Parts and Operation Course 162 of 245
Maintenance
SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Rim and Face (IHRDC_OM_AMSRF)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles associated with measuring and correcting shaft misalignment using the rim and face method. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to describe t he basic types of misalignment, general preparations for a rim and face shaft alignment procedure, and explain how to use t he rim and face shaft alignment procedure. They should also be able to explain how to use the rim and face method to measure and correct misalignment on horizontally mounted equipment and on vertically mount ed equipment. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Getting Started Review the basic types of shaft alignment . Describe the arrangement of dial indicators and t heir mount ing bracket s for a rim and face shaft alignment. Describe equipment checks and adjustments that are generally made before alignment readings are taken using the rim and face method. Aligning Horizontally Mounted Equipment Explain how to take measurements on horizontally mounted equipment for a rim and face alignment. Explain how to measure misalignment in the vertical plane using the rim and face met hod. Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the vertical plane that is measured by the rim and face method. Describe how to correct a misalignment in the vertical plane. Explain how to measure misalignment on the horizontal plane using the rim and face met hod. Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the horizontal plane that is measured by the rim and face method. Describe how to correct misalignment in the horizont al plane. Aligning Vertically Mounted Equipment Explain how to take measurements on vertically mount ed equipment for a rim and face alignment. Explain how to measure misalignment on vertically mounted equipment using the rim and face method. Explain how to construct graphs representing misalignment measured by t he rim and face method. Describe how to correct misalignment on vert ically mounted equipment.
Subjects: Getting Started Fundamentals General Preparations Aligning Horizontally Mounted Equipment Preliminary Measurements Vertical Plane Misalignment Horizontal Plane Misalignment Aligning Vertically Mounted Equipment Preparations Measuring Misalignment Correcting Misalignment Course 163 of 245
Maintenance
TOOLS: Introduction to Hand Tools (IHRDC_OM_AMTIH)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the proper use of hand tools. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to explain how to properly use hammers, punches, prying tools, screwdrivers, wrenches, measuring tools, cutting tools, vises and clamps. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Hammers, Punches, and Prying Tools Explain how to properly use a hammer. Describe the difference bet ween a claw hammer and a ball peen hammer. Explain how to properly use a sledgehammer. Explain how to properly use a wedge. Explain how to properly use a punch. Identify two types of punches. Explain how to properly use a ripping bar. Explain how to properly use a nail puller. Screwdrivers and Wrenches Explain how to properly use a screwdriver. Describe the difference between a straight-blade screwdriver and a Phillips-head screwdriver. Explain the proper use of non-adjustable, socket and torque wrenches. Measuring Tools Define t he terms level and plumb. Explain the proper uses of a level, a plumb bob and a chalk line. Explain how to properly use a framing square and a combination square. Explain how to properly use a steel rule, a measuring tape and a wooden folding rule. Cutting Tools Explain how to properly use a hand saw. Describe the differences between a crosscut saw and a rip saw. Explain how to properly use a file. Describe four types of files: a single-cut file, a double-cut file, a curved tooth file, and a rasp-cut file. Explain how to use a wire brush to clean tools such as files. Explain how to properly use a chisel. Distinguish between a wood chisel and a cold chisel. Explain how to properly use a ut ility knife. Gripping and Holding Tools Explain how to properly use slip joint, long nose, and lineman pliers. Explain how to properly use a bench vise and a C-clamp.
Subjects: Hammers, Punches, and Prying Tools Hammers and sledgehammers Wedges and punches Ripping Bars and nail pullers Screwdrivers and Wrenches Screwdrivers Wrenches and socket wrenches Measuring Tools Levels, plumb bobs and chalk lines Squares, rulers and measuring tapes Cutting Tools Saws, files and chisels Utility knives Course 164 of 245
Maintenance
TOOLS: Introduction to Power Tools (IHRDC_OM_AMTIP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the proper use of various t ypes of power tools. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how to properly use and maintain power drills, power saws, power grinders, jackhammers, and hydraulic jacks. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Types of Power Tools Ident ify and describe some common ways of classifying power tools. Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power drills. Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power saws. Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power grinders. Ident ify and describe common examples of jackhammers and hydraulic jacks. Power Tool Safety Describe safety procedures associated with the use of power tools in general. Describe safety procedures associated specifically with the use of electric power t ools. Describe safety precautions and procedures associated specifically wit h the use of pneumat ic power t ools. Power Tool Operation and Maintenance Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power drills. Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power saws. Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power grinders. Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of a t ypical jackhammer and a t ypical hydraulic jack.
Subjects: Types of Power Tools Power Tool Classifications Power Drills Power Saws Power Grinders Jackhammers and Hydraulic Jacks Power Tool Safety General Safety Concerns Electric Tool Safety Pneumatic Tool Safety Power Tool Operation and Maintenance Using Power Drills Using Power Saws Using Power Grinders Using Jackhammers and Hydraulic Jacks Course 165 of 245
Maintenance
TOOLS: Precision Measurement Instruments (IHRDC_OM_AMTMI)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h use of vernier calipers, different t ypes of micrometers, dial indicat ors, and fixed gauges. This program also describes basic calibrat ion procedures for several types of instruments and some basic guidelines for caring for precision measurement tools. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Vernier Caliper Ident ify the purpose and parts of a vernier caliper. Explain the procedures for using a vernier caliper properly. Demonstrate how to read a vernier scale. Micrometers Demonstrate the procedure for using an outside micrometer. Explain how to read an out side micrometer's scale. Demonstrate the procedure for using an inside micromet er. Demonstrate the procedure for taking measurements wit h a t elescoping gauge. Demonstrate the procedure for using a micrometer depth gauge. Dial Indicators Describe how to use a dial indicator. Fixed Gauges Explain how measurements are t aken with feeler gauges. Explain how measurements are t aken with a taper gauge. Calibration and Care Describe general procedures for calibrating several precision measurement instrument s. Describe some basic guidelines for caring for precision measurement tools.
Subjects: Vernier Caliper Basics Reading a Vernier Caliper Micrometers Out side Micrometers Inside Micrometers Telescoping Gauges Depth Micrometers Dial Indicators Features Fixed Gauges Feeler Gauge Taper Gauge Calibration and Care Calibration Care Course 166 of 245
Maintenance
VIBRATION ANALYSIS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AMVAI)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles associated with measuring and analyzing vibration in rotating equipment. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to explain what vibration is and why it occurs in rotating equipment. They should also be able to describe how to measure vibration using a transducer, a vibration meter, and a vibration analyzer. Additionally, t hey should be able to explain how t o analyze vibration using baseline data, vibration severity charts, and vibrat ion signatures. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Fundamentals Define vibration. Define t erms associated with vibration. Describe characteristics of rotating equipment that are associated with vibration. Describe causes of vibration in rotating equipment. Measuring Vibration Define t ransducer. Describe considerations associated with using a transducer. Describe how a typical vibration meter can be used in vibration analysis. Describe how a typical portable vibration analyzer can be used in vibration analysis. Describe how a typical computer-based vibration analyzer can be used in vibrat ion analysis. Analyzing Vibration Describe how informat ion about a vibration's characteristics can be used to analyze the vibration. Describe how baseline data can be used in vibration analysis. Describe how to use a vibration severity chart . Describe how a vibration signature can be used in vibration analysis.
Subjects: Fundamentals Charact eristics of Vibration Vibration and Rotating Equipment Measuring Vibration Basic Concepts Vibration Severity Charts Vibration Signatures Course 167 of 245
Maintenance
WELDING: Arc Welding (IHRDC_OM_AEEDC)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic concepts associated with arc welding. Aft er completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe various hazards associat ed with arc welding and what can be done t o protect personnel from those hazards, identify and describe t he parts and operation of a basic arc welding machine, and describe basic tasks involved in preparing for a welding job. They should also be able to identify and describe the equipment used for three common arc welding met hods: shielded metal arc welding, metal inert gas arc welding, and tungsten inert gas arc welding. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Fundamentals Describe hazards associated with welding. Describe ways of providing basic prot ection to personnel from hazards associated with welding. Describe precautions t hat should be taken when an arc welding unit is set up. Describe the basic process of arc welding. Ident ify and describe the parts of a basic arc welding unit. Describe the basic operation of an arc welding unit. Describe basic tasks involved to prepare for a welding job. Welding Methods Ident ify and describe the equipment used for shielded metal arc welding. Ident ify and describe the equipment used for metal inert gas arc welding. Ident ify and describe the equipment used for tungsten inert gas arc welding.
Subjects: Fundamentals Safety Welding Equipment Preparations Welding Methods Shielded Metal Arc Welding Metal Inert Gas Welding Tungsten Inert Gas Welding Course 168 of 245
Maintenance
WELDING: Oxy-Fuel Gas Welding (IHRDC_OM_AMWIG)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic parts and safe operation of oxy-fuel gas welding rigs. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe common oxy-fuel gas welding applications and safety concerns associat ed with the use of oxy-fuel gas welding equipment. They should also be able to describe the parts of a t ypical oxy-fuel gas welding rig and explain how t o assemble a rig, light the torch, and t hen disassemble the rig. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Basics Describe common oxy-fuel gas welding applicat ions. Describe characteristics of oxygen and acet ylene. Describe safety concerns associated with oxy-fuel gas welding and identify precautions that can be taken. Parts and Maintenance Describe characteristics of oxygen and acet ylene cylinders. State precautions associated with properly storing and transporting oxygen and acetylene cylinders. Describe oxygen and acetylene regulator types and gauges. State some basic guidelines for handling regulators. Describe oxygen and acetylene hoses. State some basic guidelines for handling hoses. Describe characteristics of welding and cut ting t orches and tips. Assembly, Lighting and Disassembly Describe tasks associated with assembling an oxy-fuel gas welding rig. Describe three types of oxy-fuel flames. Explain how to light a torch and adjust a flame. Describe a procedure for shut ting down and disassembling an oxy-fuel gas welding rig.
Subjects: Basics Applications Oxygen and Acetylene Safety Parts and Maintenance Assembly Lighting Disassembly Course 169 of 245
HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT CURRICULUM

Health, Safety & Environment

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION: Air Pollution (IHRDC_OM_AOEAP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with what air pollution is and how it can be controlled. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to explain what air pollut ion is, where it comes from, and how it can be monit ored. They should also be able to explain how air pollution from industrial facilities can be controlled. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Pollution Explain what air pollution is and how it can be harmful. List two sources of air pollution and name one way in which air pollution is monit ored. Give an example of a unit used to measure pollutant concentrat ions in the air. Controlling Air Pollution Describe one way of preventing particulates from getting into t he air. Provide a basic description of how a process can be modified to reduce air pollution from gases. Explain how material substitution can reduce air pollution. Ident ify four devices that can be used to remove particulates from a stream of exhaust of air or gases. Explain how an electrostatic precipitator can capture particulates and remove them from a stream of exhaust gases. Give a basic description of a method to capture a potent ially polluting vapor for reuse in a process. Name two ways to destroy waste gases. Explain how a scrubber that captures gases operates.
Subjects: Introduction to Pollution What is Pollution? Sources of Air Pollution Controlling Air Pollution Prevent ion Removal of Particulates Removal of Gases Course 170 of 245

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION: Water Pollution and Waste Disposal (IHRDC_OM_AOEWP)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles of preventing pollutant s from gett ing into plant wastewater and removing pollut ants from plant wastewater before the water is released int o the environment. Also covered are methods of waste disposal and general considerations associat ed with hazardous wast es. After completing this unit, trainees should be able t o identify sources of water pollution and explain how pollutants are kept out of plant wastewater. They should also be able t o describe wastewater treatment methods and waste disposal methods. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Introduction to Water Pollution List two sources of water pollution. Name one way that water pollution is monitored. Name a unit used to measure pollutant concentrations in water. List two ways to keep pollutant s from gett ing int o wastewater. Explain the purpose of a retention pond. Wastewater Treatment Explain why removing inorganic chemicals from wast ewat er requires flocculation and settling. List how bacteria use oxygen t o break down organic chemicals. Describe a typical organic waste treatment facility that includes biological (bacterial) treatment. Explain what happens in ant hracite and activated carbon filters used to remove organic chemicals from wastewater. Describe the flow of air and water through a typical cooling tower. Waste Disposal List two ways of disposing of wastes. List why hazardous waste disposal must be carefully controlled. Explain what a manifest is and how using a manifest helps keep hazardous wastes out of the environment.
Subjects: Introduction to Water Pollution Sources of Wat er Pollution Containment Wastewater Treatment Treatment Methods Filters Cooling Towers Waste Disposal Disposal Hazardous Waste Course 171 of 245

FIRE SAFETY: Classes of Fires and Extinguishers (IHRDC_OM_BBCOF)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of fire, t ypes of fire extinguishers, and how t o identify different types of fire extinguishers. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of t hree elements of combustion, four classes of fires, common types of fire extinguishers and extinguishing agents, and ways of ident ifying different types of fire extinguishers. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Fire Basics Name three element s of combustion. Describe the four classes of fires. Extinguishers & Extinguishing Agents Describe common types of fire extinguishers and extinguishing agents. Extinguisher Identification Describe several ways of identifying different types of fire extinguishers.
Subjects: Fire Basics Elements of Combustion Classes of Fires Extinguishers & Extinguishing Agents Water Multipurpose Dry Chemicals Carbon Dioxide Foam Class D Agents Extinguisher Identification Ident ification Symbols Pictures Course 172 of 245

FIRE SAFETY: Fire Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBFSA)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles associated with fire, fire prevention, and managing fire situat ions. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of how fires start, general categories of fire prevention methods, common workplace evacuation procedures, and how to select and use common t ypes of portable fire extinguishing equipment. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: How Fires Start Explain how fires start. Preventing Fires Describe two general categories of fire prevention methods and list examples of each. Managing Fire Situations Describe some common workplace evacuation procedures. Explain how to select and use common types of portable fire extinguishing equipment.
Subjects: How Fires Start Basic Elements of Fire Igniting a Fire Preventing Fires Controlling Sources of Heat Controlling Sources of Fuel Managing Fire Situations Evacuation Procedures Emergency and Fire Prevention Plans Fire Types and Fire Extinguishers Using a Fire Extinguisher Using a Fire Hose/Standpipe System Course 173 of 245

FORKLIFT SAFETY: Forklift Safety Checks (IHRDC_OM_BBFSC)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of performing safety checks on a forklift. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of t asks performed as part of a structural check of a forklift, t asks performed as part of a power system check of a forklift , and tasks that can be performed as part of an operational check of a forklift. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Structural Checks Describe tasks that can be performed as part of a structural check of a forklift . Power System Checks Describe tasks that can be performed as part of a power system check of a forklift. Operational Checks Describe tasks that can be performed as part of an operational check of a forklift.
Subjects: Structural Checks Preparation Major Components Safety Components Power System Checks Hydraulic System Electrical System Internal Combustion Engines Propane Gas Cylinders Operational Checks Before-Use Checks During-Use Checks Aft er-Use Checks Course 174 of 245

FORKLIFT SAFETY: Safe Forklift Operation (IHRDC_OM_BBSFO)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of various aspects of operating a forklift safely. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees will have a basic understanding of some t echniques that are commonly used to maneuver a forklift including some special situations they will probably encounter, traffic safety issues associat ed with forklift operation, and how to safely handle loads using a forklift. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Maneuvering a Forklift Describe how to maneuver a forklift. Traffic Safety Describe how to drive a forklift to protect yourself, others and propert y from injury or damage. Handling Loads Describe general guidelines associated with handling loads safely with a forklift .
Subjects: Maneuvering a Forklift Rear Wheel Steering Turning a Corner Turning in an Aisle Turning Around Entering Trucks/Trailers/Rail Cars Driving on Slopes Elevators Traffic Safety Personal Preparedness In Case of a Tipover Pedestrians and Other Vehicles Obstacles and Hazards Parking a Forklift Handling Loads Visual Inspection Weights of Loads Preparing to Move a Load Moving a Load Placing a Load Disengaging t he Forks Other Considerations Course 175 of 245

FORKLIFT SAFETY: Understanding Forklifts (IHRDC_OM_BBUFL)
Overview: The training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some basic information about forklifts. Aft er completing t his unit, the trainees should be able to describe the various types of forklifts and some differences between forklifts and cars, t he standard components of most forklifts, and the principles of forklift safety. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Forklift Basics Describe the various types of forklifts. Describe the differences between a forklift and a car. Forklift Components Describe the basic components of a forklift. Describe a forklift's operat ing controls and gauges. Principles of Stability Describe the factors that affect the st ability of a forklift.
Subjects: Forklift Basics How Forklifts are Powered Forklift Sizes and Capacit ies Forklift At tachments Forklift Components Major Sections of a Forklift Forklift Operating Controls Principles of Stability Three-Point Suspension Systems Center of Gravity Load Center Course 176 of 245

HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: Hazard Communication (IHRDC_OM_BBHAC)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a basic understanding of what hazard communication is and how to use it. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a general understanding of the types of hazards associated with hazardous substances, safety guidelines that reduce the risks of working with hazardous substances, and various ways to obtain information about hazardous subst ances. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Types of Hazards Define t he term "physical hazard" and identify examples of physical hazards. Define t he term "health hazard" and identify examples of health hazards. Define t he terms "acut e effects" and "chronic effects," and identify examples of each. Operations and Emergency Response Describe information that should be included in a facility's standard operating procedures for working with hazardous substances. Describe information that should be included in a facility's emergency response plan. Warning Labels Describe labeling requirements for hazardous substances in the workplace. Explain what the colors, numbers, and symbols represent on an NFPA fire diamond. Explain what the colors, numbers, and symbols represent on an HMIS label. Material Safety Data Sheets Describe information that can be found on Material Safety Data Sheets. Written Training Plan Describe requirements of hazard communication training and what informat ion it must cont ain.
Subjects: Types of Hazards Physical Hazards Health Hazards Acute Effects Chronic Effects Operations and Emergency Response Standard Operating Procedures Emergency Response Plan Warning Labels Labeling Requirements NFPA Fire Diamond HMIS Labels Material Safety Data Sheets Types of Information Written Training Plan Requirements Types of Information Course 177 of 245

HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_BBWOP)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of what "HAZWOPER" means, the purpose of the OSHA HAZWOPER Standard, and the requirements associated with safety and health training and medical surveillance. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees will know what "HAZWOPER" means and the purpose of the OSHA HAZWOPER St andard. They will also have a general understanding of chemical hazards, cont rol measures, and the basic requirements of emergency response t raining. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: What is HAZWOPER? Explain what "HAZWOPER" means and explain t he purpose of the OSHA HAZWOPER Standard. List the two general areas of informat ion contained in the Safety and Health Plan as required by HAZWOPER. List the two general goals of the safety and health training program. Explain the purpose of the HAZWOPER medical surveillance program. Chemical Hazards List the two general types of chemical hazards and describe the risks associated with each type. Describe the four routes of chemical exposure. Control Measures List three general types of control measures to reduce exposure to hazardous chemicals. Describe the four levels of personal protect ive equipment . Emergency Response List the five levels of emergency response training and describe the general requirements of each level.
Subjects: What is HAZWOPER? What "HAZWOPER" Means Safety and Health Program Training Medical Surveillance Chemical Hazards Physical Hazards Health Hazards Rout es of Exposure Control Measures Engineering Controls and Work Practices Personal Protective Equipment Emergency Response Emergency Response Training Course 178 of 245

HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: First Responder - Awareness Level (IHRDC_OM_BBHFR)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a general understanding of what hazardous materials are and how to respond to a hazardous materials emergency. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of what hazardous materials are, how hazardous materials can be ident ified, and what to do if they are first on the scene of a hazardous materials incident. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Hazardous Materials Explain what hazardous mat erials are. List the two general types of hazards associated with hazardous materials and describe the general risks associated with each type. Hazardous Materials Emergencies Describe some of the potential outcomes of an emergency when hazardous materials are present. Identifying Hazardous Materials List some ways that the presence of hazardous materials can be recognized. List some ways that hazardous materials can be ident ified. First on the Scene Describe some general procedures to follow if you are first on the scene of a hazardous mat erials incident. Describe some roles that a first responder "Awareness Level" may be required to fill in a hazardous materials emergency. Describe the general contents of the DOT Emergency Response Guidebook.
Subjects: Hazardous Materials What is a HAZMAT? Physical Hazards Health Hazards Hazardous Materials Emergencies Fire and Explosion Hazards Corrosive Mat erials Toxic Materials Hazards Not Directly Related to Chemical Hazards Identifying Hazardous Materials Recognizing Hazardous Materials Ident ifying Hazardous Materials First on the Scene First on the Scene - What to Do The Roles of a First Responder The DOT Emergency Response Guidebook Course 179 of 245

HEALTH: Bloodborne Pathogens (IHRDC_OM_BBBPA)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of hazards associated wit h exposure to blood in the workplace and basic met hods t o help minimize exposure. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees will have a basic understanding of t he potential hazards of exposure to blood, how to minimize t he risk of exposure, and basic principles of t he OSHA bloodborne pathogen standard. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Blood as a Hazardous Material Explain what bloodborne pat hogens are. Describe the general effects of exposure to the HIV virus. Describe the general effects of exposure to the HBV virus. The Risks of Occupational Exposure List some job categories in t he healthcare indust ry t hat are pot entially at risk for exposure to bloodborne pathogens. List some job categories outside the healthcare industry that are potentially at risk for exposure to bloodborne pathogens. Describe some situations that are not directly related to a job where someone might be at risk for exposure t o bloodborne pathogens. Minimizing the Risk of Occupational Exposure Describe the four routes of exposure for bloodborne pathogens, and describe some ways to protect yourself from exposure through each route of exposure. The OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard List the general requirements of the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard, including t he Exposure Control Plan. Explain the meaning of the term "exposure incident."
Subjects: Blood as a Hazardous Material What are Bloodborne Pathogens? HIV HBV The Risks of Occupational Exposure Healthcare Industry General Industry Other Exposure Risks Minimizing t he Risk of Occupational Exposure Rout es of Exposure Personal Protection Other Protective Measures The OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard General Requirements Exposure Control Plan Exposure Incident Course 180 of 245

HEALTH: Hearing Conservation (IHRDC_OM_BBHCO)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a basic underst anding of how to protect themselves from hazardous levels of noise in t he workplace. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees will have a general understanding of when noise levels are hazardous, t he basic requirements of the OSHA regulation on hearing conservation, and devices that are used t o provide hearing protection. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Hazardous Noise Levels Define t he following terms: sound, sound wave, and noise Describe two properties of sound waves: int ensit y and frequency OSHA Standard Describe the OSHA regulations for hearing conservat ion. Hearing Protection Equipment Describe how ear plus and earmuffs provide hearing protection.
Subjects: Hazardous Noise Levels Sound Sound Waves Noise Action Level OSHA Standard Requirements Hearing Conservation Program Hearing Tests Hearing Protection Equipment Ear Plugs Ear Muffs Noise Reduct ion Rating Course 181 of 245

HEALTH: Workplace Ergonomics (IHRDC_OM_BBWPE)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of ergonomics in t he workplace. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees will have a basic underst anding of how ergonomics can prevent MSDs; be able to identify ergonomic risk factors and work activities associated with MSD hazards; describe some common MSDs, including their signs and symptoms and the importance of report ing them early; and describe the actions t hat they can take to cont rol ergonomic hazards. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Ergonomics Basics Describe musculoskeletal disorders. Explain the t erm "ergonomics." Ergonomic Risk Factors Describe ergonomic risk factors associat ed with MSDs. Describe work activit ies t hat involve ergonomic risk factors. Common MSDs Describe common MSDs. Explain the importance of report ing signs and symptoms early. Controlling Ergonomic Hazards Explain what a job hazard analysis is. Describe some things you can do to reduce MSD hazards. Raynaud's Phenomenon Recognize Signs and Symptoms of MSDs
Subjects: Ergonomics Basics Musculoskeletal Disorders Ergonomics Explained Ergonomic Risk Factors Awkward Postures Force Repetition Contact Stress Vibration Static Postures Cold Temperatures Multiple Risk Fact ors Common MSDs Tendinitis and Tenosynovitis Carpal Tunnel Syndrome Epicondylit is Shoulder and Neck Pain Low Back Pain Raynaud's Phenomenon Recognize Signs and Symptoms of MSDs Controlling Ergonomic Hazards Job Hazard Analysis Things You Can Do to Reduce Ergonomic Hazards Course 182 of 245

MATERIAL HANDLING: Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) (IHRDC_OM_BBMSD)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the types of information t hat can be found in Mat erial Safety Data Sheets. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees will know why an MSDS is important and what t ypes of information an MSDS provides. They will also know how to find specific types of information in an MSDS. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: MSDS Overview Describe types of information contained in the product identificat ion sect ion of an MSDS. Characteristics and Physical Hazards Describe types of information contained in an MSDS about a chemical's characteristics. Describe types of information contained in an MSDS about a chemical's physical hazards. Health Hazards Describe types of information contained in the health hazards section of an MSDS. How to Protect Yourself Describe types of information contained in an MSDS on how to protect yourself from hazardous chemicals.
Subjects: MSDS Overview What an MSDS IS Why an MSDS Is Important Product Ident ification Section Characteristics and Physical Hazards Chemical Ingredients Physical Data Fire and Explosion Data Reactivity Data Health Hazards Exposure Limits Rout es of Entry Effects of Exposure First Aid How to Protect Yourself Spills Waste Disposal Storage and Handling Course 183 of 245

MATERIAL HANDLING: Tank Trucks (IHRDC_OM_AOMTT)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts of material handling using tank trucks. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe characteristics of liquids that can affect liquid handling operations. They should also be able t o describe precautions, procedures, and equipment associated with handling hazardous liquids. Trainees should also be able to describe feat ures of a typical tank truck and typical procedures for its loading and unloading. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: General Concerns Explain how toxicit y, viscosity, volatilit y, temperature, and pressure can affect liquid handling operations. Describe how static electricity can affect t he handling of bulk liquids. Describe how operat ors can identify hazardous materials. Ident ify precaut ions, procedures, and equipment associat ed with handling hazardous chemicals. Loading and Unloading Describe the major features of a t ypical tank truck. Ident ify associat ed equipment used with tanks during liquid transfers. Ident ify equipment commonly associated with t ank trucks. Ident ify methods of transferring bulk liquids. Describe the basic tasks involved in transferring bulk liquids. Ident ify it ems t hat should be checked during pre-t ransfer and post -t ransfer inspections. Describe typical procedures for top-loading a tank truck. Describe how bottom-loading a t ank truck differs from top-loading a tank truck. Describe typical procedures for pressurized top unloading from a tank truck by pressurizing with air. Describe common safety concerns and regulations associated with tank t rucks.
Subjects: General Concerns Charact eristics of Liquids Handling Hazardous Mat erials Loading and Unloading Tank Truck Features Loading a Tank Truck Unloading a Tank Truck Course 184 of 245

MATERIAL HANDLING: Transporting Hazardous Materials (IHRDC_OM_BBTHM)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the requirements associated wit h transporting hazardous materials. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of how hazardous materials and t heir containers are prepared for t ransport, what t ypes of documentation are required, and how hazardous materials are ident ified according to DOT requirements. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Classifications Define t he term "hazardous materials," and identify the Department of Transportation regulations that control t he shipment of t hese materials. Ident ify and describe the different classes of hazardous mat erials. Ident ify and describe terms and symbols used to identify hazardous materials. Documentation and Packaging Describe documentation that is needed to transport hazardous materials. Describe types of packaging used to t ransport hazardous materials. Describe markings used to ident ify hazardous mat erials contained in packaging. Labels and Placarding Ident ify and describe labels and placarding used t o identify hazardous materials.
Subjects: Classifications What are Hazardous Materials? Classes of Hazardous Materials Terms and Symbols Documentation and Packaging Documentation Packaging Labels Labels and Placarding Labels Course 185 of 245

MATERIAL HANDLING: Warning Signs and Labels (IHRDC_OM_BBWST)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the purpose and use of warning signs and various types of labels. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of government regulations t hat deal with labeling. They will also have a general understanding of the t ypes of information that can be obtained from hazardous product labels, shipping labels and warning signs. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Overview Ident ify government regulations regarding labeling. Hazardous Product Labels Describe types of information that can be found on hazardous product labels. Shipping Labels Describe types of information that can be found on DOT shipping labels and markings. Warning Signs Describe types of information that can be found on warning signs.
Subjects: Overview Resource Conservat ion and Recovery Act OSHA Hazard Communication Standard DOT Regulations Examples of Warning Signs and Labels Hazardous Product Labels NFPA Hazard Rating System HMIS Rating System Shipping Labels DOT Shipping Labels and Markings Warning Signs Types of Information Protection Informing Workers Prevent ing Exposure Prevent ing Accident al Operation Tools Equipment Personal Gear Emergencies Aiding a Shock Vict im Fighting an Electrical Fire Course 186 of 245

PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT : Respirator Fit Testing (IHRDC_OM_BBRFT)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of respirat or fit factors and methods for performing basic respirator testing. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will understand how to select a respirator of t he proper size, and how to perform fit checks and testing to ensure t hat the respirator will protect the user from airborne contaminants. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Fittings Explain how proper respirat or fit is determined, and ident ify factors that may prevent s respirator from properly fitting an individual. Disposable Respirators Describe how to ensure a proper fit with a disposable filter mask respirat or. Fit Checks Describe basic procedures for performing exhalation and inhalat ion fit checks. Testing Describe basic procedures for performing qualitative testing. Describe basic procedures for performing quantitative testing.
Subjects: Fittings Proper Fit Fitt ing Factors Disposable Respirators Types of Disposable Respirators Selecting the Proper Size Ensuring the Proper Fit Fit Checks Checking General Condition Positive Pressure Check Negative Pressure Check Testing Qualitative Testing Quantitative Testing Course 187 of 245

PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: Personal Protection Equipment (IHRDC_OM_BBPPE)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic t ypes of personal protection equipment. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of personal prot ective clot hing and equipment, including respirat ory prot ection and fall protection. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Protective Clothing Describe basic clothing that can be worn to protect against job related hazards. Describe types of gloves worn to protect t he hands from job related hazards. Describe types of work shoes worn to protect the feet from job related hazards. Protective Equipment Describe a typical hard hat and other head protection used to protect the head from job related hazards. Describe types and uses of prot ective equipment commonly used to protect eyesight and hearing. Respiratory Protection Describe equipment used for respiratory protection. Fall Protection Describe typical equipment used for fall prot ection.
Subjects: Protective Clothing Prot ective Clothing Wearing Clothing Properly Prot ecting Hands and Feet Protective Equipment Head Protection Eye Protection Hearing Protection Respiratory Protection Types of Respirators Fall Protection Fall Protection Equipment Course 188 of 245

PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: Respiratory Protection (IHRDC_OM_BBRPR)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic t ypes of respirators and proper methods for the use and care of respirators. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of air purifying respirat ors, air supplied respirators, and how to properly use and care for respirators. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Air Purifying Respirators Describe what an air purifying respirator is and identify common types of air purifying respirators. Describe a typical disposable filt er mask and explain how it can be used. Describe a typical chemical cartridge mask and explain how it can be used. Explain how to choose the proper cartridge for a chemical cartridge respirator. Describe a typical gas mask and explain how it can be used. Air Supplied Respirators Ident ify basic t ypes of air supplied respirators. Describe a typical air line respirator and explain how it can be used. Describe a typical self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) and explain how it can be used. Describe a typical portable escape respirator and explain how it can be used. Use and Care of Respirators Ident ify factors that affect respirator selection. Describe general rules for the inspection and safe use of respirators. Describe general rules for the cleaning and st orage of respirators.
Subjects: Air Purifying Respirators What is an Air Purifying Respirat or? Disposable Filter Masks Chemical Cart ridge, Filter and Canist er Masks Gas Masks Air Supplied Respirators What is an Air Supplied Respirator? Types of Air Flow Air Line Respirators SCBAs Port able Escape Respirators Use and Care of Respirators Selecting a Respirator Inspection Proper Use Cleaning and Disinfecting Reassembly and Testing Course 189 of 245

SAFETY: Back Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBBBA)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a general understanding of how to minimize their chances of sustaining a back injury. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees will know how to maintain good posture as they go about their daily activities, how to safely lift and move loads, and how t o perform some simple exercises that are helpful in maintaining a healthy back. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Posture Explain what is meant by t he term "good post ure." Describe techniques for maintaining good posture during various activities. Safe Lifting Describe the proper technique for lifting and moving an object. Describe proper techniques for carrying a long load, stacking a load, and performing activit ies t hat involve t wist ing or t urning. Back Exercises Describe basic exercises that can be done in an office. Describe basic exercises that can be done at home or at a gym.
Subjects: Posture "Good Posture" Sitt ing Standing Walking and Turning Reaching Overhead Picking Up an Object from the Floor Safe Lifting "Mental Lifts" Lifting an Object Lowering an Object Carrying a Long Load Stacking a Load Turning a Valve Wheel Back Exercises At t he Office At Home or at the Gym Course 190 of 245

SAFETY: Confined Space Entry (IHRDC_OM_BBCSE)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a basic underst anding of confined space hazards and t he general requirements of t he OSHA Confined Space Standard. At the conclusion of this unit , trainees will know the difference between a confined space and a "permit-required" confined space. They will also have a general understanding of the hazards associated with working in confined spaces and how to protect t hemselves from these hazards. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Confined Space Characteristics Describe the characteristics of a confined space. List some examples of confined spaces. Explain how a "permit-required" confined space differs from one that does not require a permit. Confined Space Hazards Describe the main types of hazards found in "permit-required" confined spaces. OSHA Confined Space Standard Describe the general requirements of the OSHA "Permit-Required" Confined Space St andard. Describe the general requirements for a written Permit Space Program. Describe the general requirements of a t ypical entry permit. Protective Measures Describe some general protective measures used to prot ect workers in confined spaces. The Attendant Describe general responsibilit ies of the confined space at tendant .
Subjects: Confined Space Characteristics Confined Spaces "Permit-Required" Confined Spaces Confined Space Hazards Hazardous Atmospheres Engulfment Hazard Configurat ion Hazard Other Hazards OSHA Confined Space Standard General Requirements Writt en Permit Space Program A Typical Entry Permit Protective Measures Preparing the Space Personal Protective Equipment Other Safet y Equipment The Attendant The Attendant's Responsibilities Course 191 of 245

SAFETY: Driving Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBDRS)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of driving safety. At the conclusion of this unit, trainees will have a basic understanding of the general circumstances that cause vehicle accidents, the role of defensive driving and space management in preventing accidents, t he importance of the mental and physical condition of the driver, and how proper vehicle maintenance and use of t he car's safet y features can minimize or prevent accidents. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Understanding Motor Vehicle Accidents Explain the factors typically involved in motor vehicle accident s. Explain the difference between "not at fault " and "accident-free." Defensive Driving Explain the t erms "defensive driving" and "space management." Discuss specific defensive driving and space management techniques. Condition of the Driver Explain error-prone states of mind: frustration/anger, rushing, distracted and drowsy. Discuss the role of alcohol in motor vehicle accidents. Vehicle Condition and Safety Features Discuss the import ance of the condition of the vehicle. Discuss safety belt s, air bags, and antilock braking syst ems.
Subjects: Understanding Motor Vehicle Accidents Typical fact ors in motor vehicle accidents The difference between "not at fault" and "accident-free" Defensive Driving Defensive driving defined Delayed start Changing lanes on a highway Space management defined Managing space in front Managing space t o the side and rear Space management when not moving Condition of the Driver Frustration and anger Rushing Distract ed Drowsy Alcohol Vehicle Condition and Safety Features Condition of the vehicle Safety belts Air bags Antilock braking systems Course 192 of 245

SAFETY: Electrical Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBESA)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of electricit y and electrical safety. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of working safely around electrical equipment. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Electrical Safety Describe the basic elect rical quantities of current, voltage and resistance. Shock State what an electrical shock is. Describe factors that affect the severity of an electrical shock. Describe the physical effects of current passing through the human body. Hazards Describe hazards associated with working near electrical equipment. Protection Describe ways of providing protect ion to personnel from hazards associated with electricit y. Emergencies Describe how to safely give aid to an electrical shock victim. Describe how to safely respond to an electrical fire.
Subjects: Electrical Concepts Friend or Foe? Current Volt age Resistance Shock What is Shock? Amount of Current Length of Time Path Through the Body Effects Hazards High Voltage Area Overloaded Circuits Damaged Cords Bare Connect ors Long & Tail Objects Mobile Equipment Standing Water Protection Warning Tape, Signs, Locks and Tags Compressed Air Tools Battery Powered Tools Proper Grounding Emergencies Electrical Shock Victim Electrical Fire Course 193 of 245

SAFETY: Fall Protection (IHRDC_OM_BBFPR)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of when fall protection is required and how to select and use a personal fall arrest system. At the conclusion of this unit , trainees will have a basic understanding of conditions in which fall protection is required, how fall protection can be achieved, how to identify the basic part s of a typical fall arrest system, and how to select, use, and care for a personal fall arrest syst em. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Introduction Describe working condit ions in which fall protection is required and the purposes served by fall protection. Ident ify the basic means by which fall protect ion can be achieved. Ident ify the major topics that must be covered to provide personnel with adequate fall prot ection training. Describe the difference between fall prevention and fall arrest. Ident ify and describe typical equipment used to prevent falls. Fall Protection Equipment Ident ify and describe the basic parts of a typical fall arrest syst em. Selection, Use and Care Describe the proper selection, use, and care of a personal fall arrest system.
Subjects: Introduction Conditions in Which Fall Protection Is Required Purposes of Fall Protection Basic Means of Achieving Fall Protect ion Fall Protection Training Fall Prevention and Fall Arrest Fall Protection Equipment Parts of a Typical Fall Arrest System Selection, Use and Care Selecting a Personal Fall Arrest System Using a Personal Fall Arrest System Caring for a personal Fall Arrest System Course 194 of 245

SAFETY: Laboratory Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBLSA)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of safety in a laboratory setting. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of general hazards that exist in laboratories, basic personal prot ection equipment to protect from t hose hazards, how to locate information about chemicals, basic standard operating procedures and chemical hygiene practices, and how to respond in emergency sit uations. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Hazards in the Laboratory Describe two broad categories of chemical hazards Explain the difference between acute and chronic health effects from chemical exposure. Describe the four routes of chemical exposure. Minimizing the Risks Describe the four basic principles of safety in the laborat ory Describe three main types of personal protect ive equipment used in the laboratory. The OSHA Lab Standard State the primary requirements of the OSHA Lab Standard and describe some methods of meeting that requirement. Describe the general requirements of the written Chemical Hygiene Plan and explain some ways those requirements can be met. Chemical Hygiene Practices Describe some basic chemical hygiene practices that will help minimize exposure to hazardous chemicals in the lab. Chemical Storage Describe some general guidelines for chemical storage and list five classes of chemicals that should be considered for st orage purposes. Emergency Explain some general procedures to follow in the event of an emergency in the lab.
Subjects: Hazards in the Laboratory Physical Hazards Health Hazards Rout es of Exposure Minimizing the Risks Four Basic Safet y Principles Personal Protective Equipment The OSHA Lab Standard General Requirements The Chemical Hygiene Plan Chemical Hygiene Practices Safety Awareness Minimizing Exposure Chemical Storage General Storage Requirements Five Classes of Chemicals Emergency Emergency Response Plan Emergency Equipment/In Case of Exposure Course 195 of 245

SAFETY: Lockout/Tagout (IHRDC_OM_BBLOT)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of standards governing the control of hazardous energy. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of lockout/tagout, including safe lockout/tagout techniques. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: What is Lockout/Tagout? Define "hazardous energy." Explain why standards governing the control of hazardous energy are necessary. Describe the purpose and scope of the OSHA standard that governs the control of hazardous energy. Hazardous Energy Ident ify various types of hazardous energy. Requirements Ident ify and describe the basic contents of an energy control program. Describe the protective materials and hardware required by the OSHA energy cont rol standard to perform lockout/tagout . Describe the differences between a lockout and a tagout procedure. Procedures Describe the basic steps of a typical lockout/tagout procedure. Special Situations Describe special sit uations that can occur during lockout/tagout.
Subjects: What is Lockout/Tagout? Accidents Guidelines Purpose, Scope and Benefits Hazardous Energy Types; Active Energy and Residual Energy Variations Effects Requirements Energy Cont rol Programs and Procedures Materials & Hardware Lockout/Tagout Procedures Training Inspection Procedure Shutdown and Removal of Energy Applying of Lockout/Tagout Devices Verification of Safe Condition and Preparation for Startup Removal of Lockout/Tagout Devices and Return to Service Special Situations Introduction Energizing Equipment Contract ors Group Lockout/Tagout Shift/Personnel Changes Course 196 of 245

SAFETY: Safety Orientation (IHRDC_OM_BBSOR)
Overview: The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a brief overview of common safety issues t hat are associat ed with safet y in t he workplace. At t he conclusion of this unit, t rainees with have a general understanding of workplace safety issues that are associated with safe work habits, personal protective equipment, hazard communication, and fire prevention. Duration: 0.75 hrs Objectives: Safe Work Habits Define fitness for dut y and identify conditions that can affect a worker's fit ness for duty. Describe good housekeeping practices that are associated with workplace safety. Describe safety concerns and procedures that are associated with the proper use of tools. Describe safety concerns and procedures that are associated with the energy sources that are used to operate industrial equipment. Personal Protective Equipment Ident ify and describe basic types of personal protect ive equipment that are commonly required for workplace safety. Ident ify and describe common types of personal protective equipment that may be required for special hazards. Hazard Communication Describe the t ypes of information that may be obtained from Mat erial Safety Data Sheets. Describe common types of warning signs, tags, and labels that may be used to communicate information about hazards in a workplace. Describe safety concerns and procedures that are commonly associated with hazardous waste operations (HAZWOPER). Fire Prevention Describe basic concerns and procedures that are associated with fire safety. Ident ify the different classes of fire extinguishers and the types of fires on which each class of fire extinguisher is designed to be used.
Subjects: Safe Work Habits Fitness for Duty Housekeeping Tool Use Energy Sources Personal Protective Equipment Basic Types Specialized Types Hazard Communication Material Safety Data Sheets Warning Signs, Tags, and Labels Introduction t o HAZWOPER Fire Prevention Fire Safety Classes of Fire Extinguishers Course 197 of 245

WATER TREATMENT: Wastewater 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOWT1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with treating industrial wastewater to prepare it for safe discharge and reuse. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to describe processes and equipment typically used for wastewater collection and primary treat ment , describe the use of chemical precipit at ion and dissolved air flotation in intermediate treatment, and describe t he use of activat ed sludge in secondary treat ment . Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Primary Treatment Explain what wastewater is, where it comes from, and why it must be treated. Define t he following terms: sewer, sewage, and effluent. Describe processes and equipment t ypically used in wastewater collection and primary treatment. Explain why the pH of water may have to be adjusted. Describe the process of clarification and explain how an upflow clarifier works. Intermediate Treatment Describe how clarification is used with chemical precipitation to remove some types of dissolved materials. Describe the principles of operation for dissolved air flotation. Secondary Treatment Define t he following terms: micro-organisms, return act ivated sludge, waste activated sludge, and mixed liquor. Describe the activated sludge process. Explain the basic requirements that must be met in order for micro-organisms to work efficiently in the activated sludge process. Define sludge handling. Describe some typical met hods of sludge handling.
Subjects: Primary Treatment Introduction t o Wastewater Wastewater Flow and Screening Equalization and pH Adjust ment Clarification Intermediate Treatment Chemical Precipitation Dissolved Air Flotation Secondary Treatment The Activated Sludge Process Sludge Handling Course 198 of 245

WATER TREATMENT: Wastewater 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOWT2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with treating industrial wastewater so that it can be safely reused or discharged into t he environment. After completing this unit , trainees should be able to describe how filtration and activat ed carbon adsorption can be used in tertiary treatment, and how final effluent quality standards affect the discharge of wastewater from an industrial facility. They should also be able to describe general operator responsibilities associated with wast ewat er treatment and specific operator responsibilities associated with activated sludge systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Tertiary Treatment Explain how filt ration can be used in tertiary treatment. Explain how activated carbon adsorption can be used in tertiary treatment. Describe how established quality st andards affect the discharge of wastewater from an indust rial facility. Operator Responsibilities Describe tasks that an operator routinely performs to make sure that equipment used in wast ewat er treatment is funct ioning properly. Describe the purpose of sampling and analysis programs for wastewater treat ment units. Describe the role of safety in wast ewat er treatment unit operations. Ident ify process variables that operators monitor and adjust when operat ing wast ewat er treatment syst ems. Define t he following terms: sludge blanket level, biochemical oxygen demand, food to micro-organisms ratio, mean cell residence time, and shock.
Subjects: Tertiary Treatment Filtration and Activated Carbon Adsorption Final Effluent Quality Standards Operator Responsibilities General Responsibilities Secondary Treatment Responsibilities Course 199 of 245

WATER TREATMENT: Water for Plant Systems 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOWW1)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic concepts associated with primary water t reatment and chlorination. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe problems that can be caused by impurities in t he water used in plant systems and explain how some of these impurit ies can be removed by screens, clarifiers, and filters. They should also be able to explain why and how chlorine is used in wat er treatment. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Primary Water Treatment Describe primary and secondary water treatment and the uses of water after each treat ment . Describe problems with plant equipment that can be caused by dissolved solids, dissolved gases, and suspended solids. Describe organic and inorganic suspended solids. Describe the function and operation of screens. Describe the function and operation of clarifiers. Describe the coagulat ion, flocculation, and settling stages of clarification. Describe the function and operation of filt ers. Chlorination Describe some of the effects that micro-organisms can have on plant equipment. Describe the functions and operation of a typical chlorine evaporator and a typical chlorinat or. Describe safety precautions associat ed with operations involving chlorine.
Subjects: Primary Water Treatment Introduction Screens Clarifiers Filters Chlorination Micro-Organisms Chlorine Addition Equipment Safety Precaut ions Course 200 of 245

WATER TREATMENT: Water for Plant Systems 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOWW2)
Overview: This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the process of removing dissolved solids and gases from water, and wit h the safe use of chemicals in water treatment. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to describe ways in which dissolved solids and gases can cause problems in plant equipment. They should also be able to describe how t hese impurities can be removed by devices such as wat er softeners, demineralizers, activated carbon filters, aerators, and de-aerators. In addition, t rainees should be able to explain how chemicals are used in wat er treatment and identify safety precautions for the use of chemicals. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Dissolved Solids Removal Describe ways in which dissolved solids can cause problems in plant equipment. Describe the general function and operat ion of a water softener. Describe the general function and operat ion of a demineralizer. Dissolved Gas Removal Describe ways in which dissolved gases can cause problems in plant equipment. Describe how gases such as oxygen, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide become dissolved in water. Describe ways t hat corrosion can be prevent ed or controlled. Describe the general function and operat ion of an activated carbon filt er. Describe the general function and operat ion of an aerator. Describe the general function and operat ion of a de-aerator. Chemical Treatment Describe how corrosion inhibit ors, scale inhibit ors, and other chemicals are used in t reating water. Describe the general operation of a chemical injection pump. Describe safety precautions that should be taken when working around chemicals.
Subjects: Dissolved Solids Removal Dissolved Solids Water Softeners Demineralizers Dissolved Gas Removal Dissolved Gases Carbon Filt ers Aerators De-aerators Chemical Treatment Chemicals in Water Treatment Chemical Safety Course 201 of 245
CONTROL SYSTEMS CURRICULUM

Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Analog Configuration (IHRDC_OM_ACPCA)
Overview: The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Analog Configuration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for configuring traditional and "smart" analog field devices. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to set zero and span and perform a calibration procedure on a traditional analog transmit ter. They should also be able t o explain the basics of how to configure a smart analog field device using a portable communicator or a laptop PC. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Define "analog" as it relates to process control signals. Explain how analog field devices function in process control systems. Explain how to set zero and span on a traditional electronic transmit ter. Explain how to perform a calibrat ion procedure on a non-smart transmitt er. Explain the relationship bet ween the value of a process variable and a transmitter's 4-20 milliamp output signal. Ident ify the basic configuration parameters for smart transmitters. Calculate a process measurement from a smart transmitt er's analog signal output. Explain how to configure a smart field devices with a port able communicator. Explain how to configure a smart field device with a laptop PC.
Subjects: Analog Field Devices Analog Field Devices Traditional Electronic Devices Configuring Smart Devices Configuration Methods Port able Communicators Laptop PCs Course 202 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Analytical (IHRDC_OM_ACPAF)
Overview: The Field Devices - Analytical t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with input field devices t hat perform online analyses. After completing this program, the trainees should be able t o describe common applications and procedures t hat are associat ed with the use of online analyzers. They should also be able to describe some of the many different types of online analyzers that are used in cont inuous process systems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe common applications of online analytical field devices in continuous process syst ems. Describe the essent ial component s of most online process analyzers. Describe general concerns associated with the installation, operation, and maintenance of online analyzers. Describe common types of electrochemical analyzers that use property- or compound-specific sensors for online analyses in continuous process syst ems. Describe one type of flammable vapor analyzer t hat is commonly used in continuous process systems. Describe common maintenance concerns associated with electromagnet ic analyzers. Describe optical analyzers that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process syst ems. Describe mass spect rometers that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process syst ems. Describe nuclear devices t hat are commonly used for online analysis of densit y. Describe common maintenance concerns associated with electromagnet ic analyzers. Describe chromat ographs that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process systems. Describe common maintenance concerns associated with gas chromatographs.
Subjects: Introduction Typical Applicat ions Basic Concerns Types of Online Analyzers Electrochemical Analyzers Electromagnetic Analyzers Chromatographs Course 203 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Configuring with a Laptop PC (IHRDC_OM_ACPCL)
Overview: The Field Devices - Configuring with a Laptop PC training program, or unit, is designed t o familiarize trainees with basic procedures for using a laptop PC t o configure analog field devices. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able t o explain how to configure an input device such as a transmitt er and an output device such as a control valve. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Use Foxboro's PC-10 program to configure a transmitter. Use Foxboro's PC-20 program to configure a control valve.
Subjects: Configuring Input Field Devices Configuring a Transmit ter Configuring Output Field Devices Configuring a Control Valve Course 204 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Digital Configuration with a DCS (IHRDC_OM_ACPCD)
Overview: The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Digital Configurat ion with DCSs training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with basic procedures for using a distributed control system (DCS) t o configure digital field devices. After completing t his program, the trainees should be able to explain how to use the Honeywell TDC 3000 and the Fisher-Rosemount DeltaV to configure a digital field device. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how digital field devices differ from analog field devices. Describe how a DCS is used to monitor and cont rol a process. Ident ify and describe the information that is provided on t he point detail screens of a typical DCS. Describe a basic procedure for using a DCS to configure a digital field device. Describe the basic operating principles and architecture of fieldbus technology. Describe a basic procedure for using the DeltaV to configure a field device.
Subjects: The DCS Digital Field Devices Distributed Control Systems Honeywell TDC 3000 Point Details Configurat ion of Digital Field Devices Fisher Rosemount DeltaV Fieldbus Technology DeltaV Digital Configuration Course 205 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Level and Flow (IHRDC_OM_ACPLF)
Overview: The Field Devices - Level and Flow t raining program is designed to familiarize trainees with input field devices that sense and monitor level or flow. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of various t ypes of level measurement and flow measurement devices. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Define t he following terms: level, point level measurement, continuous level measurement, direct level measurement , and indirect level measurement. Ident ify common examples of point, continuous, direct, and indirect level measurement devices. Ident ify factors that determine the t ype of level measurement device used for a particular application. Define t he termsdensit y, specific gravity, and hydrost at ic pressure. Describe how pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters, bubblers, and displacers provide level measurement s. Describe common applications and limitations associat ed with pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters, bubblers, and displacers. Describe factors that must be considered during the configuration of pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters, bubblers, and displacers. Describe how capacitance, or radio frequency (RF) devices, and conductance devices measure level. Describe common applications and limitations associat ed with capacit ance and conductance devices. Describe factors that must be considered during the configuration of capacit ance and conductance devices. Describe how radar, ultrasonic, laser, and nuclear level measurement devices work. Describe common applications and limitations associat ed with radar, ultrasonic, laser, and nuclear level measurement devices. Describe how tuning fork sensors and weight devices provide level measurement s. Describe common applications and limit at ions associated with tuning fork sensors and weight devices. Describe how different ial pressure flowmeters provide flow measurements. Identify common primary flow elements that are used in differential pressure measurement. Describe common problems that can affect the operation of differential pressure flowmeters. Describe how positive displacement flowmeters measure flow. Describe how turbine flowmeters measure flow. Describe applications and limitations associated with positive displacement flowmet ers and turbine flowmeters. Describe how magnetic, vortex, and ultrasonic flowmeters measure flow. Describe applications and limit at ions associated with magnetic, vortex, and ultrasonic flowmeters. Describe operating principles and applications, limitations, and inst allation considerations for Coriolis flowmeters and t hermal flowmeters.
Subjects: Level Measurement Types of Level Measurement Pressure- and Density-Based Devices Capacitance and Conductance Devices Non-Contact Devices Tuning Fork Sensors and Weight Devices Flow Measurement Different ial Pressure Flowmeters Mechanical Flowmeters Electronic Flowmeters Mass Flowmet ers Course 206 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Pressure,Temperature & Weight (IHRDC_OM_ACPPT)
Overview: The Field Devices - Temperature, Pressure, and Weight t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with input field devices that sense and monitor temperat ure, pressure, or weight. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of various types of temperature, pressure, and weight transducers and transmitt ers. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: List typical t emperature, pressure, and weight applications. Explain how thermocouples, RTDs, and thermistors work. Explain reference junction compensat ion. Explain RTD lead length compensat ion. Explain how load cells work. Explain absolute, gauge, and differential pressure measurement. Explain the function of set points. Describe transmitter operating paramet ers, and define the following terms: range, LRL, URL, LRV, URV, span, turndown ratio, engineering units, PV, and SV. Explain how transmitter accuracy can be specified. Ident ify and describe common transmit ter configurat ion options. Describe the ways that transmitters communicate signal information. Describe how to set up a tradit ional t ransmitter. Explain how to communicate with, configure, and test a smart transmitter.
Subjects: Temperature, Pressure, and Weight Inputs Applications Temperature Transducers Pressure and Weight Transducers Sensor Swit ches Signal Equipment Transmitter Characteristics Transmitter Procedures Course 207 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Using Field Communicators (IHRDC_OM_ACPFC)
Overview: The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Using Field Communicators training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with basic procedures for using field communicators to configure "smart " analog field devices. Aft er completing t his program, the trainees should be able to explain how to configure smart analog transmitters using a HART communicat or, a Honeywell communicator, a Yokogawa communicator, and the Foxboro Local Display Module. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to use the HART communicator to perform the basic configurat ion of a magflow transmit ter. Explain how to use a Honeywell SFC to perform the basic configurat ion of a differential pressure t ransmitter. Explain how to use the Yokogawa BT200 to perform the basic configuration of a pressure transmitter. Explain how to use the Foxboro Local Display Module to perform the basic configurat ion of a transmitt er.
Subjects: HART Protocol - Magnetic Flow Transmitter Using the HART Communicator Honeywell Protocol - Pressure (DP) Transmitter Using the Honeywell Communicator Yokogawa Protocol - Pressure Transmitter Using the Yokogawa Communicator Foxboro - Local Display Module Using the Foxboro Local Display Module Course 208 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Introduction to Distributed Control Systems (IHRDC_OM_ACPID)
Overview: The Introduction to Distributed Control Systems training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees wit h DCS architect ure and basic tasks that DCS technicians may be asked to perform. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe the architect ural organizat ion of DCS field components, central components, and control loops. They should also be able t o describe ways that a DCS technician typically works with a DCS. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain the functions of input and output devices. Describe the difference between digital and analog I/O devices. List examples of I/O field devices. Describe how I/O devices communicate. Ident ify I/O devices from a piping and instrument diagram. Describe typical I/O field termination equipment. Describe typical I/O and control processor cards and functions. Explain the data functions of t he system server. Explain how to use a DCS user interface for basic informat ion retrieval. Describe DCS networks. Explain why and how PLCs are sometimes part of a DCS. Describe typical control loops. Describe the information that can be obtained from loop sheets. Describe preparations for working on a field device. Describe basic service operations that may have to be performed on a field device. Ident ify troubleshooting tasks that can be performed in a rack room. Ident ify tasks that can be performed at a DCS user interface.
Subjects: DCS Architecture Field Components Central Components Control Loops Working with a DCS Field Device Tasks Rack Room Tasks At t he User Interface Course 209 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Multiple Loop Control (IHRDC_OM_ACPML)
Overview: The Mult iple Loop Control training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic operat ion and use of multiple loop control. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to explain the basic operation of multiple single loops, cascade cont rol, ratio control, feedforward control, and special connections that are used with multiple loop cont rol. They should also be able to use a P & ID to trace boiler control functionality. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain typical interactions between single control loops. Explain several types and applications of cascade control. Explain several types and applications of ratio control. Describe computational components that are typically used in multiple loop control. Explain how limiters, interlocks, override controls and selective controls are used. Explain the difference between feedback control and feedforward control. Describe the advantages, problems, and applications of feedforward control. Ident ify the main boiler control components and connections on a P & ID. Trace boiler control functionality.
Subjects: Multiple Loop Applications Multiple Single Loops Cascade Control Ratio Cont rol Special Multiple Loop Connections Feedforward Control Boiler Master Controls P & ID Conventions and Symbology Boiler Control Operation Course 210 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Pneumatic Controls (IHRDC_OM_ACPPC )
Overview: The Pneumatic Controls training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basic operation, maintenance, and calibrat ion of components in a pneumatic control system. After completing this program, t he trainees should be able describe to how to service the various devices that help dry and filter t he air and how to check pressure control devices in t he system for proper operation. They should also be able to describe t he basic operation and maintenance of some typical control components in a pneumatic syst em. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe the operation and maint enance of air supply components t hat dry and filt er compressed air in a pneumat ic cont rol system. Describe the operation and maint enance of pressure control components in a pneumatic control syst em. Describe the operating principles of pneumatic control components. Ident ify the basic types of pneumatic sensor-transmitters. Describe the operation and maint enance of sensor-transmitters. Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatic receiver-controllers. Describe basic calibration procedures for a typical receiver-controller. Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatic act uators. Describe procedures involved in testing, calibrating, and maintaining pneumatic actuators.
Subjects: Air Supply Maintenance Air Filtering Pressure Control Control Components Basic Operation Sensor-Transmitters Receiver-Controllers Actuators Course 211 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Principles (IHRDC_OM_ACPCR)
Overview: The Principles training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees wit h some of the basic material, process, and system characteristics that can affect process cont rol. After completing this program, the trainees should be able t o identify and describe some basic fact ors that affect process control. They should also be able to describe common process control methods and t he operat ion of loops that control critical process variables. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ident ify variables that are routinely monitored and controlled by process control systems. Describe basic material properties and fluid flow charact eristics. Describe the relationship bet ween temperature and pressure in fluids. Describe the basic principles and methods of heat transfer. Ident ify and describe some basic factors that affect process control. Describe on/off, proportional, integral (reset), derivat ive (rate), and PID control algorithms. Ident ify and describe pressure, t emperature, level, flow, and pH control loops in a t ypical boiler system.
Subjects: Process Charact eristics Example System Layout Material Attributes Control Syst ems Basic Control Factors Process Control Methods Process Control Loops Course 212 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Single Loop Control (IHRDC_OM_ACPSL)
Overview: The Single Loop Cont rol training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operation and use of single cont rol loops. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to explain the basic operation of a feedback cont rol loop, describe how t he proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control algorithm works, and ident ify and describe features that may be used to enhance the performance of a PID controller. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe a typical feedback control loop. Describe how the proport ional-integral-derivative (PID) cont rol algorit hm works. Ident ify and describe features that are commonly used t o enhance t he performance of a PID controller. Describe a typical single-loop pressure control system. Describe a typical single-loop temperature control system. Describe a typical single-loop level control syst em. Describe a typical single-loop flow control system. Describe a typical single-loop pH control system.
Subjects: Control Basics Feedback Control Loop PID Control Controller Enhancements Course 213 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Smart Controllers (IHRDC_OM_ACPSC)
Overview: The Smart Controllers t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation and use of smart controllers. Aft er completing t his program, the trainees should be able to describe basic procedures for installing, configuring, operating, and t uning smart controllers. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe the purpose of a smart controller. Describe a smart controller's common cont rol options. Explain how to install and wire a new or replacement smart controller. Explain how to configure a smart controller. Explain how to operate a smart controller. Explain how to tune a smart cont roller for optimum performance. Describe the procedures for troubleshooting a single loop process controlled by a smart controller. Describe the procedures for tuning a single loop process controlled by a smart controller.
Subjects: Setting Up Smart Controllers Charact eristics Installation and Configurat ion Using Smart Controllers Operation and Tuning Demonstration Course 214 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Practices (IHRDC_OM_ACPTP)
Overview: The Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Practices t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with some practical applicat ions of basic procedures for troubleshoot ing the inputs and outputs of a distributed control system. After completing t his program, the trainees should be able to explain how to troubleshoot problems in digit al I/O devices that are part of a DCS, analog I/O devices that are part of a DCS, and miscellaneous I/O components of a DCS. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in a digital I/O device that is part of a DCS. Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in an analog I/O device that is part of a DCS. Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in a miscellaneous I/O component of a DCS.
Subjects: Troubleshooting Practices Troubleshooting Digital I/O Devices Troubleshooting Analog I/O Devices Troubleshooting Miscellaneous I/O Components Course 215 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Procedures (IHRDC_OM_ACPTD)
Overview: The Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Procedures training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with basic procedures for t roubleshooting the input s and outputs of a distributed cont rol system. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to gather information about a DCS I/O problem, identify possible causes of the problem, test the possible causes, and finish up the troubleshooting procedure. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to gather information about a DCS I/O problem. Explain how to eliminate possible causes of a DCS I/O problem. Explain how to prioritize possible causes of a DCS I/O problem. Explain how to test possible causes of a DCS I/O problem in a logical order. Explain how to complete t he procedures for troubleshooting a DCS I/O problem.
Subjects: Troubleshooting Procedures Investigating Sympt oms Ident ifying Possible Causes Test ing Possible Causes Finishing Up Course 216 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting Loops (IHRDC_OM_ACPTS)
Overview: The Troubleshooting Loops training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees wit h basic procedures for troubleshooting cont rol loop problems. After completing this program, t he trainees should be able to explain how to use a syst ematic t roubleshooting procedure to t roubleshoot problems in control loops. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to gather information about a control loop problem. Explain how to eliminate components or functional elements as possible causes of a control loop problem. Explain how to prioritize possible causes of a control loop problem. Explain how to test possible causes of a control loop problem in a logical order. Describe the st eps that should be t aken to complete the troubleshooting of a control loop problem. Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a discrete control loop. Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a single analog control loop. Describe considerations in t roubleshooting a multiloop control system.
Subjects: The Troubleshooting Procedure Investigating Sympt oms Ident ifying Possible Causes Test ing Possible Causes Finishing Up Loop Troubleshooting Examples Discrete Loop Single Control Loop Multiloop Control Course 217 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Tuning Loops (IHRDC_OM_ACPTL)
Overview: The Tuning Loops training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the basic principles of t uning control loops. Aft er completing t his program, the trainees should be able to describe how t o prepare for tuning a loop and how t o tune a loop manually using a syst ematic trial and error method, t he Ziegler-Nichols open loop met hod, and the Ziegler-Nichols closed loop method. They should also be able describe how tuning can be accomplished by the auto-tune function, by art ificial intelligence feat ures, and by tuning software. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe tuning in relation to loop response. Describe the t ypes of process upsets. Explain process delays. Describe the effects of gain, reset , and rate on response curves. Explain how to identify and assess asymmetry, non-linearity, and noise. Explain how to correct or reduce hyst eresis, stiction, and noise. Distinguish between random tuning and systematic trial and error tuning. Describe the precautions necessary when tuning by trial and error. Explain the procedure for tuning using the Z-N open loop method. Explain the procedure for tuning using the Z-N closed loop, or ultimate gain, met hod. Describe how the auto-tune function tunes. Describe artificial intelligence (fuzzy logic) t uning features. Explain how to connect and run tuning programs. Describe the options tuning programs may provide.
Subjects: Closed Loop Operation Control Loop Response Before Tuning Manual Tuning Trial and Error Tuning Ziegler-Nichols Tuning Methods Automated Tuning Self-Tuning Software Tuning Course 218 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Basic Electrical Test Equipment (IHRDC_OM_ACCBE)
Overview: The Basic Electrical Test Equipment training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of electrical t est instruments. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to follow safe work pract ices and procedures while properly using circuit test ers, multimeters, ammet ers, megohmmet ers, and digital low resist ance ohmmeters. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Follow safe work practices and procedures while using electrical t est equipment . Use circuit testers t o indicate t he presence of energized elect rical circuit s. Use an analog mult imeter to measure voltage, resistance, and current in AC and DC circuits. Use a digital multimet er to measure voltage, resistance, and current in AC and DC circuits. Ident ify in-line and clamp-on ammeters. Use an analog ammeter to measure current through a conductor. Use a digital ammet er to measure current through a conductor. Use a megohmmeter t o test the insulation resistance of a conductor, transformer, and mot or. Explain how to measure the resistance of elect rical circuit s and equipment with a DLRO.
Subjects: Test Equipment Safety Safe Work Practices Circuit Testers Basic Operation Multimeters Basic Operation Ammeters Basic Operation Megohmmeters Basic Operation DLRO Basic Operation Course 219 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Digital and Analog Oscilloscopes (IHRDC_OM_ACCDA)
Overview: The Digital and Analog Oscilloscopes training program, or unit, is designed t o familiarize trainees with the basic operation and use of digital and analog oscilloscopes. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain what an oscilloscope does, explain how to set up an oscilloscope for use, identify t he controls used to adjust an oscilloscope display, and explain how to use an oscilloscope t o make voltage measurements and time measurements. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Briefly explain how an oscilloscope converts a voltage input to an on-screen trace. Describe how an oscilloscope display is graduated. Explain why proper grounding is important. Explain how to set the controls to "standard position" for the initial setup of an oscilloscope. Explain how to select, compensate, and use oscilloscope probes. Ident ify the controls used to adjust an oscilloscope display and explain their functions. Explain what an oscilloscope's vertical controls do and how t o use them. Explain what an oscilloscope's horizontal controls do and how to use them. Determine an applied volt age by counting oscilloscope screen divisions. Determine frequency by measuring the period on an oscilloscope screen. Determine a pulse width and rise t ime.
Subjects: Fundamentals Basic Operating Theory Display Fundamentals Setting Up Grounding and Safety Controls Probes Control Use Display Vertical Horizontal Measurement Techniques Volt age Time Course 220 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Introduction to Control and Data Systems (IHRDC_OM_ACCIC)
Overview: The Introduction to Control and Dat a Systems training program, or unit, is designed t o familiarize trainees with the role of information systems in plant operations and the elements of modern information systems. Aft er completing t his program, the t rainees should be able to identify the information needs of typical plant functional elements and explain how information gets into an information system. They should also be able to describe system architecture and explain how to use environment software and applicat ion software. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: List the information needs of typical plant functional elements. Explain how alarms work in modern plants. List the routes by which information gets into the system. Explain I/O bus, LAN, WAN, client-server, and the role of network standards. Explain the function of an operating system. Describe the characteristics of common operat ing systems. Explain the role of operating system and network software. Explain virtual instrumentation. Explain programmable logic cont roller (PLC) program creation. Describe how to use graphical objects t o create t he system data structure and HMI. Describe password hierarchy and the need for security. Describe the functions and archit ecture of a SCADA syst em.
Subjects: Information and Plant Operations Information Needs Information Sources Information Systems System Architect ure Environment Soft ware Application Software Course 221 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Introduction to Process Control (IHRDC_OM_ACCIN )
Overview: The Introduction training program, or unit, is designed t o familiarize trainees with the basic elements, t erminology, and functions of control systems. Aft er completing t his program, the trainees should be able to identify and describe various types of input and output devices that are commonly used with automat ed control systems. They should also be able to identify and describe common t ypes of control devices and control loop arrangement Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Define t erms commonly associated with the input side of a control system. Ident ify and describe common types of temperature sensors that provide input information to a control system. Ident ify and describe common types of position sensors. Ident ify and describe common types of pressure sensors, flow sensors, and level sensors. Ident ify and describe common types of electric instruments, timers, counters, recorders, and pneumat ic sensors. Ident ify and describe common act uating devices used in the output side of a control system. Describe common decision-making devices that connect the input and output element s in a control system. Describe common control loop arrangements used in automatic control syst ems.
Subjects: Input Elements Terminology Temperature Sensors Position Sensors Pressure, Flow, and Level Sensors Other Input Devices Output Elements Actuating Devices Control Elements Decision-Making Devices Control Loops Course 222 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Principles of Calibration (IHRDC_OM_ACCCA )
Overview: The Principles of Calibration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with t he calibration of input field devices and control loops. Aft er completing t his program, the trainees should be able to explain how to test, adjust , and calibrate various types of gauges and transmitters. They should also be able to explain how to test , set up, and adjust input field devices and calibrate control loops. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to decide the best t ime to t est and calibrate. Describe the proper steps involved in a lockout/tagout procedure. Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical pressure gauge, pressure transmit ter, and t hermocouple. Describe how to adjust a typical sensor that switches in response to discrete position. Describe how to test and adjust a typical sensor that switches at a temperature, pressure, or cont rol signal set point . Describe how to test and calibrate a typical sensor that responds t o concentrations. Describe how to test, set up, and adjust a typical sensor that responds to flow. Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical output field device. Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical cont rol loop.
Subjects: Gauges and Transmitters Preparation Pressure Gauge Pressure Transmitter Temperature Devices Field Devices and Control Loops Input Field Devices Out put Device and Loop Calibration Course 223 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Principles of Control (IHRDC_OM_ACCCO)
Overview: The Principles of Control training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with t he basic operating principles of cont rollers used with discrete input/output devices and analog input/output devices. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to explain the control logic used in syst ems with discrete (digital) I/O, describe how to troubleshoot systems that use individual relays and solid st at e controllers, and describe how t o program a PLC and troubleshoot PLC system problems. They should also be able to explain how analog variables can be converted to digit al data and vice-versa, describe PID cont rol, describe common controller options and applications, and describe how to diagnose problems in single and multiple cont rol loops. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain the cont rol logic used in systems with discrete (digital) I/O. Describe how to troubleshoot systems that use individual relays and solid state controllers. Describe how to program a PLC, test t he program, run and adjust the program, and troubleshoot PLC system problems. Explain how analog variables can be converted t o digital dat a and vice-versa. Describe proportional control, derivative cont rol, and integral control. Describe common controller options and applications. Diagnose problems in single and multiple cont rol loops.
Subjects: Controllers Used with Discrete I/O Digital Logic Individual Relays PLC Applications Controllers Used with Analog I/O Analog/Digital Conversion PID Control Special Controller Features Troubleshooting Control Loops Course 224 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: The Human-Machine Interface (IHRDC_OM_ACCHM)
Overview: The The Human-Machine Interface t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the different types of HMIs t hat are likely t o be found in a modern plant . After completing this program, the trainees should be able t o obt ain process information using typical instrument s, operate typical switch controls, use smart I/O devices and controller interfaces, and perform common computer operations. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Read typical instruments. Use typical switch controls. Configure smart I/O devices. Operate portable instruments. Operate and program a variable frequency drive. Take readings from and program a loop cont roller. Use dedicated graphics terminals. Describe the role of soft ware in computer operation. Describe the main funct ional components of a computer. Use common DOS and character-based keyboard/screen functions. Use common GUI keyboard/screen functions. Turn a comput er on and log on. Find and run a program, enter data, save, print , exit , and shut down a computer.
Subjects: Traditional Equipment Interfaces Instrument s Controls Microprocessor-Based HMIs Smart I/O Interfaces Controller Interfaces The Computer Interface Basic Comput er Hardware and Operation The Human-Computer Interface Common Computer Operations Course 225 of 245
Control Systems
NETWORKS: Fiber Optic Systems (IHRDC_OM_ACNFO )
Overview: The NETWORKS: Fiber Optic Systems training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basic operating principles of fiber optic syst ems and some of the basic installation and t esting methods. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to describe characteristics of glass fibers and describe the function and types of fiber optic connectors. They should also be able t o describe basic procedures for installing and testing fiber optics. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe the composition of a common glass fiber. Describe characteristics of multi-mode fiber. Describe characteristics of single-mode fiber. Describe characteristics of optic fibers and cables. Describe the function and types of fiber optic connectors. Describe hazards and work precaut ions associated with fiber optics. List the main steps associated with running a new fiber optic drop. Describe steps that are commonly used to terminate fiber. Describe steps that are commonly used to make fiber splices. Describe steps that can be used to check newly inst alled fibers.
Subjects: Operating Principles Glass Fibers Basic System Hardware Installation Tasks Safety Installing Cable Terminations and Splices Course 226 of 245
Control Systems
NETWORKS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_ACNIN )
Overview: The NETWORKS: Introduction training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with some different types of control systems and some basic concepts that apply to control system networks. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe the layout and operation of traditional non-networked control systems and the layout and operation of some common networked control systems. They should also be able t o describe factors that can affect the speed at which signals can be sent across a network, describe t he various levels of network protocol, and describe common physical network layouts, or topologies. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe the layout and operation of traditional non-networked control systems. Describe the layout and operation of some common networked control systems. Describe how informat ion is coded as digital data for network transmission. Ident ify and describe factors that can affect the speed at which signals can be sent across a network. Ident ify and describe the various levels, or layers, of network prot ocol (the rules t hat govern how a network functions). Ident ify and describe common physical network layouts, or topologies Ident ify common protocols used in network control systems.
Subjects: Control Systems Overview Non-Networked Syst ems Networked Systems Basic Network Concepts Digital Data Network Speed and Traffic Network Protocol and Topology Common Protocol Types Course 227 of 245
Control Systems
NETWORKS: Setting Up and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACNST )
Overview: The NETWORKS: Sett ing Up and Troubleshooting training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with basic concept s t hat apply to setting up and troubleshooting cont rol networks. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to describe different types of cables and connectors that are used t o link together devices in cont rol networks. They should also be able to describe basic procedures for installing, test ing, and troubleshooting control networks. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe coaxial cable and explain how to inst all a connector onto the cable. Describe common types of t wist ed pair cable and explain how to install connectors onto t he cables. Ident ify and describe factors that must be considered when cable is rout ed. Describe how to connect and use a cable test er to perform various tests on network cabling. Describe common hardware configuration procedures that need to be performed during network installation. Describe common troubleshooting techniques that are helpful for ident ifying problems with network cabling and devices.
Subjects: Cables and Connectors Coaxial Cable Twisted Pair Cable Network Installation Cable Routing Circuit Testing Hardware Configuration Troubleshooting Course 228 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Architecture, Types and Networks (IHRDC_OM_ACLAT)
Overview: The PLCs: Architecture, Types and Net works t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operation and components of programmable logic controllers (PLCs). After completing this program, the trainees should be able t o explain what a PLC does, identify and describe PLC components, and explain how PLCs communicate. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how PLCs can be used to replace conventional, hard-wired ladder diagrams. Explain how PLC programs can be used to cont rol machines and processes. Ident ify the three main part s of a PLC system. Recognize a processor for a PLC and describe its functions. Recognize different types of input modules. Explain how to wire input devices int o input modules. Recognize different types of out put modules. Explain how to wire out put devices into output modules. Recognize power supplies. Recognize different types of programming terminals. Ident ify the three main time periods of the PLC scan cycle. Ident ify factors that can affect the scan cycle time of a PLC. Recognize different types of PLC networks. List devices that typically communicate across different types of PLC networks. Recognize that automated net works may include methods of machine cont rol other than PLCs.
Subjects: PLC Operations Basic PLC Concepts System Components The Processor The Input System The Output System Other Components The PLC Scan The PLC Scan Cycle Scan Time How PLCs Communicate Networking PLCs Other Methods of Machine Control Course 229 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Human Machine Interface and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACLMT)
Overview: The PLCs: HMIs and Troubleshooting training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees wit h human-machine int erfaces and how they can be used in the troubleshoot ing of programmable logic controller system problems. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to identify various t ypes of HMIs and explain how t hey are connected and used. They should also be able to describe the five st eps of troubleshooting and explain how t o use those steps and an HMI to t roubleshoot a problem in a PLC system. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ident ify common types of HMIs. List different ways to connect an HMI to a PLC. Describe some basic factors involved in using a PC-based HMI. Explain why it is important to know the equipment before you start to troubleshoot. List the aids available to you in investigating the symptoms. Explain how to use the half-splitting method of identifying symptoms. Explain how to prioritize and eliminate possible causes. Explain the importance of determining root causes of malfunct ions. Explain how to use an HMI and the five-step troubleshoot ing process to troubleshoot a PLC-cont rolled system.
Subjects: The Human-Machine Interface Types of HMIs Connection to the PLC Using an HMI The Five Steps of Troubleshooting Know the Equipment Investigate Symptoms List Probable Causes Test Probable Causes Discover Root Causes A Troubleshooting Case Study Course 230 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: I/O Communication (IHRDC_OM_ACLIO)
Overview: The PLCs: I/O Communication training program, or unit, is designed t o familiarize trainees with the various ways in which real-world devices can be connected to t he input and out put systems of a programmable logic controller. After completing t his program, the trainees should be able to identify various t ypes of I/O modules and field devices, and explain how direct I/O connect ions are made. They should also be able to ident ify some common device networks and ident ify some devices, ot her t han PLC devices, that you might find on a t ypical device network. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ident ify the pieces of hardware that make up a PLC rack. Different iate between serial and parallel communication between racks. Ident ify the three types of I/O modules. Describe a typical I/O addressing scheme. Describe the differences between discret e, or bit, devices; word devices; and analog field devices. Describe the difference between sinking and sourcing I/O modules. Explain why proper fusing, shielding and grounding are important when field devices are wired. Relate I/O modules to the input and output image tables, and t o the scan cycle. Ident ify some common proprietary and non-proprietary device networks. Ident ify some devices, ot her t han PLC devices, that you might find on a t ypical device network.
Subjects: Direct I/O Connections How I/O Modules Are Mounted I/O Module Types I/O Module Addressing Field Devices Field Wiring I/O Data Processing Networked I/O Modules Types of Device Networks Devices Course 231 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Installing and Maintaining (IHRDC_OM_ACLIM)
Overview: The PLCs: Inst alling and Maintaining t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic procedures involved in installing and setting up PLC equipment. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how t o mount and wire up PLC hardware. They should also be able to describe how to establish communications between a PC and a PLC, clear the processor memory, and initially configure the processor. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe what must be taken into consideration when mounting PLC hardware. Describe how to connect various types of PLC power supplies. Explain why emergency stop circuits must be hardwired. Explain what to be aware of when populating PLC chassis. Describe what to be aware of when wiring I/O field devices. Describe what to be aware of when making network connections. Explain how to establish communication between a PLC and a PC. Explain the st eps necessary to clear the memory of a PLC. Explain the st eps necessary to perform t he initial configurat ion of a PLC.
Subjects: Installing the PLC Mounting PLC Chassis Power Supplies and Connections E-Stop Circuits Configuring and Populating the Chassis I/O Wiring Network Connections Initial Configuration Establishing Communications Clearing Memory Performing Initial Configuration Course 232 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Introduction to Programming (IHRDC_OM_ACLIP)
Overview: The PLCs: Int roduction to Programming training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with t he basics of programming a programmable logic controller. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to ent er a simple ladder diagram program into the memory of a PLC. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to start programming software and verify proper drivers, connections, and node addresses. Name the two main file t ypes in PLC memory. Explain how to clear PLC memory. Ident ify PLC bit and word I/O addresses. Explain how to use RSLogix to insert a rung into a PLC. Ident ify input and output inst ructions and explain how to add t hem to a rung. Explain how to use RSLogix to add instruct ions and branches to a rung in a PLC. Different iate between the inst ructions for a discret e input device and the inst ructions for input-type contact s on an output device. Different iate between the inst ructions for real I/O devices and the instructions for virtual I/O devices. Explain how to connect real, discrete I/O devices to a PLC. Explain how to determine input and output addresses for PLC screw terminals. Explain how to use RSLogix to program a PLC to emulat e a hard-wired program.
Subjects: Establishing Communications Programming wit h a PC The PLC Memory Model Preparing to Program the PLC Programming a Rung Basic Rung Using Discrete I/O Complex Rungs Complex Discret e I/O Inst ructions A Real System Example The Hardware The PLC Program Course 233 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Ladder Logic and Symbology (IHRDC_OM_ACLLL)
Overview: The PLCs: Ladder Logic and Symbology training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with how PLCs use ladder diagrams and what the symbols used on ladder diagrams mean. Aft er completing t his program, the trainees should be able to identify common ladder diagram symbols, explain how a ladder diagram rung performs t he logic functions necessary to determine whether the rung is true or false, and interpret the meaning of some common PLC instructions. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ident ify the major parts of a ladder diagram. Describe how a ladder diagram forms a parallel circuit. Ident ify the NEMA symbols for common input devices. Ident ify the NEMA symbols for common output devices. Different iate between the Boolean AND, OR and NOT functions for multiple devices on a rung. Ident ify how each rung performs the logic functions necessary to determine whet her t he rung is t rue or false. Recognize rung numbers on a ladder diagram. Interpret cross references on a ladder diagram. Explain the PLC mode of operation with the Run-Rem-Prog key switch in each of it s positions. Ident ify the typical symbols used in a PLC ladder program and explain the function of mnemonics. Ident ify each of the three parts of the PLC scan cycle. Interpret the meaning of some common complex instructions. Ident ify several things that may interrupt the normal scan cycle.
Subjects: The Ladder Diagram Rung The Ladder Diagram as a Parallel Circuit Ladder Diagram Symbols Multiple Devices on a Rung Complete Ladder Diagrams The Mult iple Rung Control Program Rung Numbers and Cross References Ladder Logic Execution PLC vs. Hardwired Program Execution Complex Instructions Interruptions to the Scan Cycle Course 234 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Numerics (IHRDC_OM_ACLNU)
Overview: The PLCs: Numerics t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with numbering syst ems and codes commonly used by programmable logic controllers (PLCs). After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to int erpret place values for decimal, binary, octal, and hexadecimal numbers and convert numbers from one numbering syst em t o another. They should also be able to explain what BCD and ASCII codes are and how they are used. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ident ify commonly used numbering systems. Explain the organization of a positional numbering system. Interpret place values for binary numbers. Describe ways t hat signed binary numbers may be represented in a PLC. Convert bet ween binary and decimal numbers. Interpret place values for octal numbers. Convert bet ween octal, binary, and decimal numbers. Interpret place values for hexadecimal numbers. Convert bet ween hexadecimal, octal, binary, and decimal numbers. Explain what BCD code is. Express and int erpret information in BCD code. Explain what ASCII code is.
Subjects: Numbering Systems Numbering System Basics Positional Systems Binary Numbering Place Values Signed Binary Numbers Conversions Octal Numbering Place Values Conversions Hexadecimal Numbering Place Values Conversions Codes BCD Code BCD Conversions ASCII Code Course 235 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Program Entry, Testing and Modification (IHRDC_OM_ACLPE)
Overview: The PLCs: Program Entry, Test ing, and Modification training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the t echniques used t o install, t est, and modify a PLC program, or project. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to explain how to prepare a system for program entry and how to download or enter the program. They should also be able to explain how to test and debug t he program and make changes to the program in various processor modes. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to establish communication between a PLC and a PC. Explain the st eps necessary to clear the memory of a PLC. Explain how to install a project in a PLC. Explain some common techniques used in test and debug operations. Explain what must be done when a PLC's hardware or software configuration is changed. Explain how to use the PLC EEPROM for program backup. Explain how to use a PC hard drive for program backup. Explain the differences between online and offline programming. Describe the process for changing the PLC program while the system is in the program mode. Describe the process for changing the PLC program while the system is in the run mode.
Subjects: Entering and Testing the Program Preparing for Program Ent ry Downloading or Entering a Project Test ing and Debugging Configuration and Program Changes Configurat ion Changes Uploading and Downloading Projects Changes While in Program Mode Changes While in Run Mode Course 236 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Programming Common Functions (IHRDC_OM_ACLCF)
Overview: The PLCs: Programming Common Functions training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basics of programming common functions for a programmable logic cont roller. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to identify common non-I/O PLC inst ructions and explain how they are used. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Different iate between bit addresses and word addresses. Explain the function of each part of a timer. Explain the function of each part of a counter. Explain how to use word addresses to send data t o and from analog I/O modules. Explain how program control instructions modify the normal program scan sequence. Explain how immediate instructions interrupt the normal program scan cycle. Explain how data comparison instructions are used to make program decisions. Explain how math instructions are used t o perform calculat ions and modify data. Explain how regist ers and sequencers are used to emulate motor-driven cam switches. Explain how file instructions are used to move and manipulate data. Explain the operating concept of a PID feedback loop. Explain how to connect real, word I/O devices to a PLC. Explain how to use RSLogix to program a PLC with some common functions.
Subjects: Simple Word Instructions Word Addresses Timers Counters Analog I/O Program Control Instructions Modifying the Scan Sequence Modifying the Scan Cycle Comparison and Math Instructions Data Comparison Instructions Math Instructions Data Manipulation Instructions Registers and Sequencers File Instructions PID Loop Instruction A Real System Example The Hardware The PLC Program Course 237 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Troubleshooting Hardware (IHRDC_OM_ACLTH)
Overview: The PLCs: Troubleshoot ing Hardware training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with tools and procedures for t roubleshooting hardware-related PLC problems. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how t o isolate a PLC problem to either hardware or software and network and how to use PLC hardware indicat ors, programming software, and appropriate test equipment t o troubleshoot processor faults and I/O problems. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to isolate a problem to hardware vs. software and net work. Explain how to identify a software and network problem. Explain the meanings of common processor indicators. Describe common I/O problems. Ident ify the troubleshoot ing aids commonly found on a PLC power supply. Ident ify the indicators commonly found on a PLC processor module. Ident ify the indicators commonly found on a PLC I/O module. Explain how to go on-line using RSLogix. Explain how to use common search functions. Explain how to force an input or output instruction. Describe how cross references and I/O monitors can be used in troubleshooting. Ident ify the three main part s of a typical I/O system. Different iate between test equipment that is and is not appropriate for t roubleshooting PLC syst ems. Use the appropriate programming software and test equipment to troubleshoot a typical input system. Use the appropriate programming software and test equipment to troubleshoot a typical output syst em.
Subjects: Isolating PLC Problems Isolating the Problem Software and Net work Problems Hardware Problems Hardware Indicators Power Supply Processor I/O Modules Troubleshooting with Programming Software Starting t he Soft ware Using the Search Functions Using the Force Functions Using Cross References and I/O Monitors Troubleshooting I/O Systems I/O System Organization Using Test Equipment on I/O Syst ems Troubleshooting an Input Syst em Troubleshooting an Output System Course 238 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Troubleshooting Software and Networks (IHRDC_OM_ACLSN)
Overview: The PLCs: Troubleshoot ing Software and Networks training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with how t o use PLC programming software t o isolat e soft ware and network problems. Aft er completing t his program, the trainees should be able to go on-line to connect to a PLC network and be able to identify and describe the major parts of the PLC memory and some memory prot ection options. They should be able to explain how to diagnose timer, count er, and sequencer problems and how to use PLC indicators, processor status information, TND and SUS instructions, Custom Data Monitors, and histograms to t roubleshoot software problems. They should also be able to explain how to use processor indicators and communications software t o isolat e network problems, how to isolate network media problems, how to find and fix a network configuration problem, and how to connect to a PLC across a network and then troubleshoot a problem. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to start software and select drivers. Explain how to use a browser t o connect to a stand-alone or networked PLC. Describe the major parts of the PLC memory. Describe some major memory protection options. Explain how to use the five-step troubleshoot ing process to troubleshoot a PLC-cont rolled system. Explain how to isolate a problem to software and network vs. hardware. Explain how to isolate a problem to software vs. network. Explain how the fault indicat ion in the processor status box can be used for troubleshooting. Explain how to use processor status t able information to isolate problems. Explain how to check I/O configuration. Explain how to use the TND and SUS instructions to monit or program control instructions. Explain how to diagnose timer, count er, and sequencer problems. Explain how to use the Custom Data Monitor. Explain how to use histograms. Explain how to isolate a problem to a specific network node on DH+. Explain how to isolate a problem to a specific network node on Rem I/O. Explain how to isolate an HMI communication problem. Explain how to isolate net work media problems. Explain how to find and fix network configuration problems. Explain how to connect to a PLC across a network. Explain how the key switch affects programming across a net work.
Subjects: Connecting to the PLC Network Starting t he Soft ware Examining t he PLC Memory Troubleshooting Software Problems Isolating Problems Using PLC Status and Configuration Files Program Control Problems Timer, Counter, and Sequencer Problems Using Data Monitors Troubleshooting Network Problems Isolating the Problem Problems wit h Network Media Problems wit h Network Configuration Troubleshooting PLCs Across a Net work Course 239 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Applications (IHRDC_OM_ACVDA)
Overview: The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES - Applicat ions training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees wit h common applicat ions of variable speed drives and basic procedures for variable speed drive installat ion. After completing this program, t he trainees should be able to describe ways in which variable speed drives are used and ways in which t hey are set up and t ested. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ident ify common applications for variable speed drives. Describe typical network configurations for drives Ident ify common problems associated wit h the installation of variable speed drives. Set up a variable speed drive for operation. Test the operation of a variable speed drive. Create checkpointing documentation for a variable speed drive installation.
Subjects: Common Applications Selecting Drives Networking Drives Ident ifying Problems VSD Installation Set ting Up Test ing the Set up Creating Checkpointing Course 240 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Controllers and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACVCT)
Overview: The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Controllers and Troubleshooting training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with general procedures for using a variable speed drive cont roller to troubleshoot system problems and for troubleshooting problems in the controller itself. After completing this program, t he trainees should be able to describe how to safely use a variable speed drive controller t o locate basic system problems. They should also be able to explain how to use a test point checklist to troubleshoot a variable speed drive controller and how to test the major component s of t he controller. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe safe work practices for troubleshooting a variable speed drive. Ident ify and describe the four basic cat egories of electrical test equipment. Explain how to use a controller display to locate operat ing problems in a variable speed drive. Explain how to set up, interpret, and use a key test point checklist to troubleshoot a variable speed drive controller. Explain how to check the major components of a variable speed drive controller.
Subjects: Troubleshooting with the Controller Safety Basics Common Drive Problems Troubleshooting the Cont roller Test Point Checking Component Checking Course 241 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Introduction to VSDs (IHRDC_OM_ACVSD)
Overview: The Introduction to Variable Speed Drives training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees wit h the operation and use of variable speed drives. Aft er completing t his program, the trainees should be able to identify different types of DC and AC drives and explain how they cont rol mot or operation. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ident ify different types of variable speed DC drives. Explain the operation of a DC motor controlled by a variable speed controller. Ident ify the major component s of a variable speed controller operating a DC motor. Explain the operation of a variable speed controller operating a DC motor. Ident ify different types of inverter drives. Explain the operation of a AC motor controlled by an inverter. Ident ify the major component s of a PWM invert er operating an AC motor. Explain the operation of a PWM inverter operating an AC mot or. Ident ify the major component s of a flux vector drive. Explain the operation of an AC mot or controlled by a flux vector drive. Ident ify different types of flux vect or drives. Explain the operation of a flux vector drive.
Subjects: DC Drives Control of DC Motors DC Controller Component s DC Controller Operation Inverter Drives Inverter Control of AC Motors AC Inverter Components PWM Controller Operat ion Flux Vector Drives Flux Vector Control of AC Motors Flux Vector Controller Operation Course 242 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Programming Controllers (IHRDC_OM_ACVPC)
Overview: The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Programming Controllers training program, or unit, is designed t o familiarize trainees with the basic principles of programming controllers for variable speed DC and AC motors. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to identify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed for a DC variable speed controller and for an AC variable speed controller. They should also be able to describe additional programming that may be required when an AC variable speed controller is set up for flux vector operat ion. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Ident ify and describe common paramet ers that may have to be programmed during the setup of a DC variable speed drive controller. Ident ify and describe common paramet ers that may have to be programmed when configuring the I/O for a DC variable speed drive controller. Ident ify and describe common paramet ers that may have to be programmed in order to monitor the operation of a DC variable speed drive cont roller. Ident ify and describe common paramet ers that may have to be programmed during the setup of an AC variable speed drive controller. Ident ify and describe common paramet ers that may have to be programmed when configuring the I/O for an AC variable speed drive controller. Ident ify and describe common paramet ers that may have to be programmed in order to monitor the operation of an AC variable speed drive controller. Describe additional programming that may be required when an AC variable speed cont roller is set up for flux vector operation.
Subjects: Programming DC Controllers Set up I/O Configurat ion Monitoring Programming AC Controllers Set up I/O Configurat ion Monitoring Flux Vector Programming Course 243 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACVST)
Overview: The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Troubleshoot ing training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of a basic five-step troubleshooting method to troubleshoot a variable speed drive system. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to describe problems associated wit h a variable speed drive system's motor, wiring, and electrical supply. They should also be able to describe each step of the five-step troubleshoot ing process and explain how to use t hose st eps to troubleshoot a problem in a variable speed drive system. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Explain how to locate and correct loose motor connections. Explain how to detect conditions that could lead to motor winding failure, and suggest remedies for those condit ions. Explain how to detect conditions that could lead to motor bearing failure, and suggest remedies for those conditions. Explain how to detect motor leakage currents, and suggest remedies for the problem. Explain how to locate and correct loose wiring connections. Ident ify and suggest modifications to variable speed drives affected by improper shielding and grounding. Explain how to check and monitor cont rol system feedback. Ident ify and suggest modifications to variable speed drives affected by overvoltage reflect ions. Explain how to locate and correct loose wiring connections. Ident ify and suggest methods for correcting voltage imbalance in variable speed drive systems. Explain how to detect single phasing in variable speed drive applications. Explain how to detect harmonic anomalies, and suggest remedies for those conditions. Explain why it is important to know the equipment before you start to troubleshoot. List the aids available to you in investigating the symptoms. Explain how to identify probable causes. Explain how to prioritize probable causes. Explain why it is important to determine the root causes of malfunctions. Explain how to use the five-step troubleshoot ing met hod t o troubleshoot a variable speed drive.
Subjects: Troubleshooting a VSD System Troubleshooting the Motor Troubleshooting the Wiring Troubleshooting the Electrical Supply Five-Step Troubleshooting Method Know the Equipment Investigate Symptoms List Probable Causes Test Probable Causes Discover Root Causes Troubleshooting Case St udy Course 244 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Systems and Integration (IHRDC_OM_ACVSI)
Overview: The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Int egration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with several common ways in which variable speed drives and automated systems are linked together. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to describe how variable speed drives are integrated into distributed control systems and programmable control systems. They should also be able to describe the operation of tachometers, encoders, and resolvers, and explain how to inst all field devices for variable speed drives. Duration: 2 hrs Objectives: Describe how variable speed drives are integrated into distributed control systems. Ident ify the net work connect ions between a variable speed drive and a distributed control system. Explain how to install a variable speed drive in a distributed control system. Describe how variable speed drives are integrated into programmable control systems. Ident ify the net work connect ions between a variable speed drive and a programmable control syst em. Explain how to install a variable speed drive in a programmable control syst em. Describe the operation of a tachometer used to cont rol a variable speed drive. Explain how to install and set up tachometers for variable speed drives. Describe the operation of an encoder used to control a variable speed drive. Explain how to install and set up encoders for variable speed drives. Describe the operation of a resolver used to cont rol a variable speed drive. Explain how to install and set up resolvers for variable speed drives. Explain how to install field devices for variable speed drives.
Subjects: Control System Integration DCS Integrat ion PLC Int egration Feedback and Field Device Integration Tachometers Encoders and Resolvers Field Devices Course 245 of 245

IHRDC E-Learning Solutions Detailed Catalog

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IHRDC E-Learning Solutions Detailed Catalog

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

e-Learning Solutions

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Basic Skills of the Petroleum Geologist

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Basic Skills of the Petroleum Geologist

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Basic Skills of the Petroleum Geologist

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for the Non-Engineer

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for the Non-Engineer

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and Global Tectonics

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and Global Tectonics

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and Global Tectonics

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and Global Tectonics

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Geochemistry

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Geochemistry

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for the Non-Engineer

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for the Non-Engineer

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and Seismic Signals

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and Seismic Signals

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and Seismic Signals

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and Seismic Signals

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and Seismic Signals

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other Geophysical Methods

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other Geophysical Methods

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other Geophysical Methods

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and Field Techniques

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other Geophysical Methods

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other Geophysical Methods

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing